manualshive.com logo in svg

YASKAWA GA700, Technical Manual

The YASKAWA GA700, an advanced motor drive, provides exceptional performance and efficiency. To fully understand its features and functions, a comprehensive Technical Manual is available for download, free of charge, on our website. Unlock the full potential of the GA700 by accessing the manual at manualshive.com.

Share
Download
background image

11.8 H: Terminal Functions

938

YASKAWA ELECTRIC

SIEP C710617 05F YASKAWA AC Drive GA700 Technical Manual

■

H7-42: Virtual Analog Output FilterTime

No.

(Hex.)

Name

Description

Default

(Range)

H7-42

(1165)

Virtual Analog
Output FilterTime

Sets the time constant for a primary filter of the virtual analog output.

0.00 s

(0.00 - 2.00 s)

V/f

CL-V/f

OLV

CLV

AOLV

OLV/PM

OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM

EZOLV

Summary of Contents for GA700

Page 1: ...posal 8 Specifications 9 Parameter List 10 Parameter Details 11 MANUAL NO SIEP C710617 05F YASKAWA AC Drive GA700 High Performance Type Technical Manual Type CIPR GA70Cxxxxxxxx Models 200 V class 0 55 to 110 kW 400 V class 0 55 to 355 kW To properly use the product read this manual thoroughly and retain for easy reference inspection and maintenance Ensure the end user receives this manual ...

Page 2: ...This Page Intentionally Blank 2 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710617 05F YASKAWA AC Drive GA700 Technical Manual ...

Page 3: ...5 2 3 Installation Position and Distance 36 2 4 Moving the Drive 38 Using the Hanging Brackets to Move the Drive 38 Instructions on Drive Suspension 38 2 5 Drive Watt Loss 40 2 6 Remove and Reattach the Keypad 44 Remove the Keypad 44 Reattach the Keypad 44 2 7 Install the Keypad to a Control Panel or Another Device 45 Operate the Keypad Apart from the Drive 45 Connect the Keypad from a Remote Loca...

Page 4: ... ON Termination Resistor for MEMOBUS Modbus Communications 116 2 16 Connect the Drive to a PC 117 2 17 External Interlock 118 2 18 Braking Resistor Installation 119 Install a Braking Resistor ERF Type 119 Install a Braking Resistor Unit LKEB Type 119 Install a Braking Unit Connection CDBR Type 120 Connect Braking Units in Parallel 120 Dynamic Braking Option Overload Protection 121 2 19 Drive Wirin...

Page 5: ... Show Monitors as Bar Graphs 159 Set the Monitors to Show as Analog Gauges 160 Display Monitors as an Analog Gauge 161 Set Monitoring Items to be Shown as a Trend Plot 162 Show Monitor Items as a Trend Plot 165 Change Parameter Settings 166 Examine User Custom Parameters 168 Save a Backup of Parameters 169 Write Backed up Parameters to the Drive 170 Verify Keypad Parameters and Drive Parameters 17...

Page 6: ...4 3 UL Standards 256 Area of Use 256 Wire the Main Circuit Terminal Block 256 Low Voltage Wiring for Control Circuit Terminals 276 Drive Motor Overload and Overheat Protection 276 4 4 China RoHS Compliance 282 Information on Hazardous Substances in This Product 282 4 5 对应中国RoHS指令 283 本产品中含有有害物质的信息 283 4 6 Safe Disable Input 284 Safe Disable Specifications 284 Notes 285 Using the Safe Disable Funct...

Page 7: ... Braking Is Enabled 394 The Load Falls When a Brake Is Applied 394 There Is Audible Noise from the Drive or Motor Cables When the Drive Is Energized 394 Residual Current Monitoring Detection RCM RCD Trips During Run 395 Motor Rotation Causes Unexpected Audible Noise from Connected Machinery 395 Motor Rotation Causes Oscillation or Hunting 395 PID Output Fault 395 The Starting Torque Is Not Suffici...

Page 8: ...10 1 Section Safety 496 10 2 How to Read the Parameter List 497 Icons and Terms that Identify Parameters and Control Modes 497 10 3 Parameter Groups 498 10 4 A Initialization Parameters 500 A1 Initialization 500 A2 User Parameters 501 10 5 b Application 502 b1 Operation Mode Selection 502 b2 DC Injection Braking and Short Circuit Braking 503 b3 Speed Search 504 b4 Timer Function 506 b5 PID Control...

Page 9: ...rotection 568 L2 Power Loss Ride Through 569 L3 Stall Prevention 570 L4 Speed Detection 572 L5 Fault Restart 573 L6 Torque Detection 573 L7 Torque Limit 574 L8 Hardware Protection 575 L9 Drive Protection 2 578 10 12 n Special Adjustment 579 n1 Hunting Prevention 579 n2 SpdFeedbackDetectControl AFR Tun 580 n3 High Slip Braking HSB 580 n4 Observer 581 n5 Feed Forward Control 582 n6 Online Tuning 582...

Page 10: ...eries IPM Motors Constant Torque 660 11 Parameter Details 673 11 1 Safety Precautions 674 11 2 A Initialization Parameters 675 A1 Initialization 675 A2 User Parameters 696 11 3 b Application 697 b1 Operation Mode Selection 697 b2 DC Injection Braking and Short Circuit Braking 710 b3 Speed Search 713 b4 Timer Function 721 b5 PID Control 723 b6 Dwell Function 740 b7 Droop Control 741 b8 Energy Savin...

Page 11: ...on I O 934 11 9 L Protection Functions 939 L1 Motor Protection 939 L2 Power Loss Ride Through 945 L3 Stall Prevention 955 L4 Speed Detection 965 L5 Fault Restart 967 L6 Torque Detection 969 L7 Torque Limit 974 L8 Drive Protection 977 L9 Drive Protection 2 986 11 10 n Special Adjustment 987 n1 Hunting Prevention 987 n2 Auto Freq Regulator AFR 989 n3 High Slip Braking HSB and Overexcitation Braking ...

Page 12: ...12 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710617 05F YASKAWA AC Drive GA700 Technical Manual ...

Page 13: ...ns for the use of this product Failure to obey these precautions can cause serious injury or death or damage to the product or related devices and systems Yaskawa must not be held responsible for any injury or equipment damage as a result of the failure to observe these precautions and instructions i 1 Receiving 14 i 2 Using the Product Safely 15 i 3 Warranty Information 18 ...

Page 14: ...ector Control OLV PM Open Loop Vector Control for Permanent Magnet Motors PM motor Permanent Magnet Synchronous motor generic name for IPM motors and SPM motors SIL Safety Integrity Level SPM Motor Yaskawa SMRA Series motors V f V f Control About Registered Trademarks CANopen is a registered trademark of CAN in Automation CIA CC Link is a registered trademark of CC Link Partner Association DeviceN...

Page 15: ...ers and shields before operation Use options and drives only as specified by the instructions The figures in this manual are examples only All figures do not apply to all products included in this manual Yaskawa can change the products specifications and content of the instructions without notice to make the product and or the instructions better If you damage or lose these instructions contact a ...

Page 16: ... product made by the user Only let authorized persons install wire maintain examine replace parts and repair the drive Failure to obey can cause death or serious injury Do not remove covers or touch circuit boards while the drive is energized Failure to obey can cause death or serious injury Do not immediately energize the drive or operate peripheral devices after the drive blows a fuse or trips a...

Page 17: ...r equipment with missing parts Failure to obey can cause damage to the drive and connected equipment If it is necessary to use disinfectant or to debug wood material for packaging use a method other than steam Example Heat treatment core at 56 C 133 F or higher for more than 30 minutes Gas steam from fumigated wooden packaging materials can cause damage to electrical components Halogen disinfectan...

Page 18: ... if you are considering the application of this product for special purposes such as machines or systems used for passenger cars medicine airplanes and aerospace nuclear power electric power or undersea relaying WARNING Injury to Personnel Yaskawa manufactured this product with strict quality control guidelines Install applicable safety devices to minimize the risk of accidents when installing the...

Page 19: ...ical Manual 19 1 Receiving This chapter gives information about the different drive models and features and how to examine the drive when you receive it 1 1 Section Safety 20 1 2 Model Number and Nameplate Check 21 1 3 Features and Advantages of Control Methods 26 ...

Page 20: ...Technical Manual 1 1 Section Safety DANGER Do not ignore the safety messages in this manual The operating company is responsible for injuries or equipment damage caused from ignoring the messages in this manual Failure to obey the safety messages will cause death or serious injury ...

Page 21: ...e drive nameplate to make sure that you received the correct model Contact your supplier if you receive the incorrect drive model or if the drive does not operate correctly Nameplate A Mass B Drive software version C The address of the head office of Yaskawa Electric Corporation D Accreditation standards E Surrounding air temperature F Protection design G Serial number H Lot number I Output specif...

Page 22: ...circuit terminal board Reserved 11 Option card connector CN5 A Reserved 12 Option card connector CN5 B Reserved 13 Option card connector CN5 C Reserved 14 Keypad Reserved 15 Special applications Reserved Rated Output Current Table 1 2 to Table 1 4 give the rated output current values Note These output current values are applicable for drives that operate at standard specifications Derate the curre...

Page 23: ...115 37 138 169 37 145 45 169 211 45 180 55 211 257 55 215 75 257 313 75 283 90 313 360 90 346 110 360 415 110 415 Table 1 3 Three Phase AC 400 V Class Input Voltage 460 V No E1 01 Input AC Supply Voltage 460 Heavy Duty Rating HD C6 01 0 Default Normal Duty Rating ND C6 01 1 Maximum Applicable Motor Output kW Rated Output Current A Maximum Applicable Motor Output kW Rated Output Current A 002 0 55 ...

Page 24: ...315 605 355 675 Table 1 4 Three Phase AC 400 V Class Input Voltage 460 V No E1 01 Input AC Supply Voltage 460 Heavy Duty Rating HD C6 01 0 Default Normal Duty Rating ND C6 01 1 Maximum Applicable Motor Output HP Rated Output Current A Maximum Applicable Motor Output HP Rated Output Current A 002 3 4 1 6 1 2 1 004 1 2 1 2 3 005 2 3 4 3 4 8 007 3 4 8 4 6 9 009 4 6 9 5 7 6 012 5 7 6 7 1 2 11 018 7 1 ...

Page 25: ...ASKAWA AC Drive GA700 Technical Manual 25 No E1 01 Input AC Supply Voltage 460 Heavy Duty Rating HD C6 01 0 Default Normal Duty Rating ND C6 01 1 Maximum Applicable Motor Output HP Rated Output Current A Maximum Applicable Motor Output HP Rated Output Current A 568 400 477 450 515 675 ...

Page 26: ...drive capacity when a large quantity of torque is necessary at low speed Auto Tuning 1 Rotational and Line to Line Resistance usually not necessary Rotational and Line to Line Resistance usually not necessary Automatically tunes electrical motor parameters Torque Limits 1 No No Controls maximum motor torque to prevent damage to machines and loads Torque Control 1 No No Directly controls motor torq...

Page 27: ...ic Control Open Loop Current Vector Control Closed Loop Current Vector Control Open Loop Current Vector Control Main Applications General purpose variable speed control Applications in which high performance is necessary without machine encoders Very high performance control with motor encoders Example High precision speed control torque control torque limits Sensorless vector control with speed c...

Page 28: ...n time Overvoltage Suppression Function 2 3 Yes Yes Yes Adjusts speed during regeneration to prevent overvoltage 1 Select the drive capacity accordingly 2 Note these points when you use this function When you can decouple the motor and machine for a test run use Rotational Auto Tuning You must make adjustments to the control in the range where there is no vibration in the machine after Rotational ...

Page 29: ...control and torque limits Low speed torque applications Example Fans and pumps PG Option Card Not necessary Not necessary Necessary PG X3 Not necessary Maximum Output Frequency 590 Hz 400 Hz 400 Hz 120 Hz Speed Control Range 1 20 AM 1 20 AM 1 100 1 2 3 1 1500 1 100 This is the range of variable control When you connect and operate motors in this mode think about the increase in motor temperature S...

Page 30: ...tion at the previous speed when restores power without coasting the motor Overexcitation Deceleration No induction motor specific function No induction motor specific function No induction motor specific function No Sets the V f higher than the setting value during deceleration to increase motor loss and decrease deceleration time Overvoltage Suppression Function 5 7 Yes Yes Yes Yes Adjusts speed ...

Page 31: ...her Device 45 2 8 Removing Reattaching Covers 50 2 9 Change the Drive Enclosure Type 55 2 10 Installation Methods 68 2 11 Electrical Installation 73 2 12 Main Circuit Wiring 76 2 13 Main Circuit Terminal Block Wiring Procedure 98 2 14 Control Circuit Wiring 104 2 15 Control I O Connections 113 2 16 Connect the Drive to a PC 117 2 17 External Interlock 118 2 18 Braking Resistor Installation 119 2 1...

Page 32: ...y to automatically turn off when the protective ground wire disconnects Users can also connect a protective ground wire that has a minimum cross sectional area of 10 mm2 copper wire or 16 mm2 aluminum wire Failure to obey these standards can cause death or serious injury Always use a type B Residual Current Monitor Residual Current Device RCM RCD where a residual current operated protective or mon...

Page 33: ...al blocks and other drive components before hanging the drive vertically Failure to obey can cause serious injury or death from falling equipment Prevent more than 1 96 m s2 0 2 G vibration and impact to a hanging drive Failure to obey can cause death or serious injury from falling equipment Do not try to flip over a hanging drive or leave a hanging drive unattended Failure to obey can cause death...

Page 34: ...rent of standard motors Use the rated output current to select an applicable drive When the distance between the motor and drive is long use a wire that can connect the motor to the drive without a reduction in motor torque To use an explosion proof motor you must do an explosion proof test with the drive As the drive is not explosion proof make sure that you install it in a safe area Failure to o...

Page 35: ...nted materials Radioactive materials or flammable materials including wood Harmful gas or fluids Salt Direct sunlight Keep wood and other flammable materials away from the drive Altitude 1000 m 3281 ft maximum Note Derate the output current by 1 for each 100 m 328 ft to install the drive in altitudes between 1000 m to 3000 m 3281 ft to 9843 ft It is not necessary to derate the rated voltage in the...

Page 36: ...ion Use the clearances specified in Figure 2 2 to install the drive Make sure that there is sufficient space for wiring and airflow A 50 mm 2 in minimum B 30 mm 1 2 in minimum on both sides C 120 mm 4 7 in minimum above and below D Airflow direction Figure 2 2 Installation Distances for One Drive Install Drives Side by Side Users can install drive models 2004xB to 2082xB and 4002xB to 4044xB side ...

Page 37: ...2 mm 0 08 in minimum between each drive D 120 mm 4 7 in minimum above and below Figure 2 3 Installation Distances for Multiple Drives Side by Side Note Align the tops of drives that have different dimensions to help when replacing cooling fans Remove the top protective covers of all drives when mounting UL Type 1 enclosure drives side by side Figure 2 4 Enclosed Wall Mounted Type UL Type 1 Install...

Page 38: ...RNING Crush Hazard Use screws to correctly attach the drive front cover terminal blocks and other drive components before hanging the drive vertically Failure to obey can cause serious injury or death from falling equipment WARNING Crush Hazard Prevent more than 1 96 m s2 0 2 G vibration and impact to a hanging drive Failure to obey can cause death or serious injury from falling equipment WARNING ...

Page 39: ...op before the drive touches the floor then slowly lower it the remaining distance Horizontal Suspension Put the drive on the ground horizontally Connect wires to the 4 hanging brackets and use a crane to lift the drive NOTICE If you attach a horizontal wire to the drive the wire can scratch and damage the drive if touches the drive Use a jig or pad to prevent damage to the drive A Hanging bracket ...

Page 40: ... 75 8 179 478 657 2110 88 8 155 563 718 2138 115 8 212 680 892 2169 145 5 275 820 1095 2211 180 5 314 991 1305 2257 215 5 398 1252 1650 2313 283 5 502 1643 2145 2360 346 5 582 1978 2560 2415 415 5 644 2359 3003 Table 2 2 Drive Watt Loss Normal Duty Model Rated Output Current A Carrier Frequency kHz Interior Unit Loss W Cooling Fin Loss W Total Loss W 2004 3 5 2 35 16 51 2006 6 2 38 25 63 2010 9 6 ...

Page 41: ... 4007 5 5 8 48 45 93 4009 7 2 8 37 61 98 4012 9 2 8 46 82 128 4018 14 8 8 65 140 205 4023 18 8 73 150 223 4031 24 8 101 211 312 4038 31 8 119 272 391 4044 39 8 148 354 502 4060 45 8 126 389 515 4075 60 8 165 527 692 4089 75 8 184 617 801 4103 91 8 237 779 1016 4140 112 5 300 956 1256 4168 150 5 486 1274 1760 4208 180 5 446 1432 1878 4250 216 5 558 1464 2022 4296 260 5 692 2061 2753 4371 304 5 824 ...

Page 42: ...4250 180 5 454 1174 1628 4296 240 5 664 2021 2685 4371 302 5 843 2499 3342 4389 361 5 745 2161 2906 4453 414 2 1024 2835 3859 4568 477 2 1183 3329 4512 4675 Table 2 5 Drive Watt Loss Normal Duty 460 V Model Rated Output Current A Carrier Frequency kHz Interior Unit Loss W Cooling Fin Loss W Total Loss W 4002 2 1 2 39 16 55 4004 4 1 2 44 33 77 4005 5 4 2 48 31 79 4007 7 1 2 52 44 96 4009 8 9 2 42 5...

Page 43: ... 460 V Model Rated Output Current A Carrier Frequency kHz Interior Unit Loss W Cooling Fin Loss W Total Loss W 4002 2 1 2 39 16 55 4004 3 2 42 25 67 4005 4 8 2 45 28 73 4007 6 9 2 50 42 92 4009 7 6 2 35 49 84 4012 11 2 49 76 125 4018 14 2 64 112 176 4023 21 2 87 158 245 4031 27 2 109 188 297 4038 34 2 116 234 350 4044 40 2 137 296 433 4060 52 2 133 379 512 4075 65 2 156 450 606 4089 77 2 180 569 7...

Page 44: ...nection and incorrect operation Remove the Keypad 1 Push down the tab on the top of the keypad then pull the keypad forward and remove it from the drive Figure 2 7 Remove the Keypad 2 Pull the keypad connector out from the drive horizontally then put it in the holder Note Insert the end of the keypad connector that has the tab A Holder B Hook C Keypad connector Figure 2 8 Move the Keypad Connector...

Page 45: ... panel Simplified installation is possible Separately sold installation support sets are not necessary Phillips screwdriver 2 M3 Inside the control panel Keypad does not extend farther than the front of the control panel Phillips screwdriver 2 M3 M4 Installation support set A for mounting with screws model 900 192 933 001 Phillips screwdriver 2 M3 Wrench M4 Installation support set B for mounting ...

Page 46: ...le 2 9 Panel Cut out Dimensions mm in W H W1 H1 H2 H3 d 22 0 89 78 3 07 22 0 89 29 1 14 22 0 89 1 0 04 3 6 0 14 2 Remove the keypad and put the keypad connector in the holder on the front cover Note Insert the end of the keypad connector that has the tab A Keypad B Keypad connector C Holder Figure 2 12 Remove the Keypad 3 Put the keypad on the outside of the control panel Use M3 screws 6 mm 0 2 in...

Page 47: ... D Keypad E Cable connector Figure 2 14 Connect the Drive and Keypad with the Remote Control Extension Cable Install Inside Control Panel To attach the keypad inside of the control panel you must purchase the installation support set which is sold separately Contact Yaskawa or your nearest sales representative to order mounting brackets and mounting hardware Note The installation procedure and pan...

Page 48: ...ns mm in W H W1 H1 d 64 0 5 2 52 0 02 130 5 12 45 1 77 105 0 5 4 13 0 02 4 8 0 12 2 Remove the keypad and put the keypad connector in the holder on the front cover Note Insert the end of the keypad connector that has the tab A Keypad B Keypad connector C Holder Figure 2 16 Remove the Keypad 3 Use the screws supplied with the mounting bracket and attach the keypad to the mounting bracket Tighten th...

Page 49: ...ing the screws Use the screws supplied with the installation support set and tighten them to a tightening torque of 0 98 to 1 33 N m 8 67 to 11 77 lb in A M4 screws B Control panel Figure 2 18 Mount Mounting Bracket to the Interior of the Control Panel 5 Connect the keypad with the drive using the remote control extension cable A Remote control extension B Communications connector C Drive D Keypad...

Page 50: ...ct or disconnect wiring on an energized drive Before servicing disconnect all power to the equipment and wait for the time specified on the warning label at a minimum The internal capacitor stays charged after the drive is de energized The charge indicator LED extinguishes when the DC bus voltage decreases below 50 Vdc When all indicators are OFF remove the covers before measuring for dangerous vo...

Page 51: ...t Cover 3 Reattach the keypad to the original position Removing Reattaching the Cover Using Procedure B DANGER Electrical Shock Hazard Do not examine connect or disconnect wiring on an energized drive Before servicing disconnect all power to the equipment and wait for the time specified on the warning label at a minimum The internal capacitor stays charged after the drive is de energized The charg...

Page 52: ... the front cover B Unhook the tabs found on the sides of the front cover Figure 2 26 Pull Forward to Remove the Front Cover 4 Remove the front cover from the drive Figure 2 27 Remove the Front Cover Reattach the Front Cover Wire the drive and other peripheral devices then reattach the front cover Note Wire the grounding terminals first main circuit terminals next and control circuit terminals last...

Page 53: ...TION Crush Hazard Only loosen the cover screws Do not fully remove the cover screws Make sure that the terminal covers for larger drives do not fall Missing cover screws can cause the terminal cover to fall and cause injury Figure 2 30 Loosen the Terminal Cover Mounting Screws 2 Pull the terminal cover away from the drive Figure 2 31 Remove the Terminal Cover Reattach the Terminal Cover Wire the d...

Page 54: ...2 8 Removing Reattaching Covers 54 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710617 05F YASKAWA AC Drive GA700 Technical Manual Figure 2 32 Reattach the Terminal Cover ...

Page 55: ...4 2082 4002 4060 Procedure A 55 2110 4075 Procedure B 56 2138 4089 4103 Procedure C 58 2169 2211 4140 4168 Procedure D 61 2257 2313 4208 4296 Procedure E 63 2360 4371 Procedure F 65 Attach the Protective Cover Procedure A Attach the Top Protective Cover Align the hooks on the rear of top protective cover with the holes on the top of the drive to attach the top protective cover Note Attach the top ...

Page 56: ...it bracket 2 with the screw holes on conduit bracket 1 Tighten the screws to a tightening torque of 0 98 N m to 1 33 N m 8 67 lb in to 11 77 lb in A Conduit bracket 2 Figure 2 36 Attach Conduit Bracket 2 4 Attach the front cover Attach the Protective Cover Procedure B Attach the Top Protective Cover Align the hooks on the rear of top protective cover with the holes on the top of the drive to attac...

Page 57: ...it at the sides and the bottom Tighten the screws to a correct tightening torque Screw A 1 96 to 2 53 N m 17 35 to 22 39 lb in Screw B 0 98 to 1 33 N m 8 67 to 11 77 lb in A Screw holes on sides B Conduit bracket 1 C Screws A D Screws B Figure 2 38 Attach Conduit Bracket 1 Figure 2 39 shows the locations of the screw holes on the bottom of the drive A Front of drive B Screw holes on bottom Figure ...

Page 58: ...ew holes on conduit bracket 3 with the screw holes on conduit bracket 2 Tighten the screws to a tightening torque of 0 98 N m to 1 33 N m 8 67 lb in to 11 77 lb in and lift bracket 3 a short distance A Conduit bracket 3 Figure 2 42 Attach Conduit Bracket 3 Attach the Protective Cover Procedure C Attach the Top Protective Cover Put the hooks on the back of the top protective cover into the hook hol...

Page 59: ...uded screws to a tightening torque of 0 98 N m to 1 33 N m 8 67 lb in to 11 77 lb in to attach the stay bracket to the base A Stay bracket B Base C Screw Figure 2 44 Assemble Conduit Bracket 1 2 Align the screw holes on conduit bracket 1 with the screw holes on the drive Tighten the included screws to a tightening torque of 3 92 N m to 4 90 N m 34 70 lb in to 43 37 lb in to attach the bracket to t...

Page 60: ... m 8 67 lb in to 11 77 lb in A Conduit bracket 2 Figure 2 47 Attach Conduit Bracket 2 Figure 2 48 shows the locations of the screw holes on the bottom of conduit bracket 1 A Front of drive B Screw holes on bottom Figure 2 48 Locations of Screw Holes on Bottom of Conduit Bracket 1 4 Align the screw holes on conduit bracket 3 with the screw holes on conduit bracket 2 Tighten the screws to a tighteni...

Page 61: ...ctive cover C Temporary placement holes Figure 2 50 Attach the Top Protective Cover Attach the Conduit Bracket 1 Align the screw holes on the stay bracket with the screw holes on the base Tighten the included screws to a tightening torque of 0 98 N m to 1 33 N m 8 67 lb in to 11 77 lb in to attach the stay bracket to the base A Stay bracket B Base C Screw Figure 2 51 Assemble Conduit Bracket 1 2 A...

Page 62: ...the screw holes on the bottom of the drive A Front of drive B Screw holes on bottom Figure 2 53 Locations of Screw Holes on Bottom 3 Align the screw holes on conduit bracket 2 with the screw holes on conduit bracket 1 Tighten the screws to a tightening torque of 0 98 N m to 1 33 N m 8 67 lb in to 11 77 lb in A Conduit bracket 2 Figure 2 54 Attach Conduit Bracket 2 Figure 2 55 shows the locations o...

Page 63: ...n conduit bracket 2 Tighten the screws to a tightening torque of 0 98 N m to 1 33 N m 8 67 lb in to 11 77 lb in and lift bracket 3 a short distance A Conduit bracket 3 Figure 2 56 Attach Conduit Bracket 3 Attach the Protective Cover Procedure E Attach the Top Protective Cover Align the screw holes of the top protective cover with the screw holes on the top of the drive Tighten the screws to a tigh...

Page 64: ... Stay bracket B Base C Screw Figure 2 58 Assemble Conduit Bracket 1 2 Align the screw holes on conduit bracket 1 with the screw holes on the drive and push the bracket into position Use the screws to attach the bracket Tighten the screws to a correct tightening torque Screw A 0 98 N m to 1 33 N m 8 67 lb in to 11 77 lb in Screw B 1 96 N m to 2 53 N m 17 35 lb in to 22 39 lb in A Screw holes on sid...

Page 65: ... holes on conduit bracket 1 Tighten the screws to a tightening torque of 0 98 N m to 1 33 N m 8 67 lb in to 11 77 lb in A Conduit bracket 2 Figure 2 61 Attach Conduit Bracket 2 Attach the Protective Cover Procedure F Attach the Top Protective Cover Align the screw holes of the top protective cover with the screw holes on the top of the drive Tighten the screws to a tightening torque of 0 98 N m to...

Page 66: ... A Bracket B Base C Screws Figure 2 63 Assemble Conduit Bracket 1 2 Align the screw holes on conduit bracket 1 with the screw holes on the drive and push the bracket into position Use the screws to attach the bracket Tighten the screws to a correct tightening torque Screw A 0 98 N m to 1 33 N m 8 67 lb in to 11 77 lb in Screw B 1 96 N m to 2 53 N m 17 35 lb in to 22 39 lb in A Screw holes on sides...

Page 67: ...cal Manual 67 A Front of drive B Screw holes on bottom Figure 2 65 Locations of Screw Holes on Bottom 3 Align the screw holes on conduit bracket 2 with the screw holes on conduit bracket 1 Tighten the screws to a tightening torque of 0 98 N m to 1 33 N m 8 67 lb in to 11 77 lb in A Conduit bracket 2 Figure 2 66 Attach Conduit Bracket 2 ...

Page 68: ...dure External Heatsink Refer to Table 2 13 and Table 2 14 for the panel cut out dimensions for external heatsink installations An attachment is necessary to install drive models smaller than 2082 200 V class and 4060 400 V class with the heatsink outside of the panel Note The exterior mounting dimensions and installation dimensions for a standard installation are different than the dimensions for ...

Page 69: ... W1 W2 W3 W4 H1 H2 H3 H4 H5 A B d1 2004 1 140 5 51 294 11 57 138 5 43 38 1 50 102 4 02 102 4 02 16 0 630 3 0 118 282 11 10 23 0 906 6 0 236 26 1 02 6 0 236 134 5 28 233 9 17 M5 2006 1 140 5 51 294 11 57 138 5 43 38 1 50 102 4 02 102 4 02 16 0 630 3 0 118 282 11 10 23 0 906 6 0 236 26 1 02 6 0 236 134 5 28 233 9 17 M5 2010 1 140 5 51 294 11 57 138 5 43 38 1 50 102 4 02 102 4 02 16 0 630 3 0 118 282...

Page 70: ... 15 12 140 5 51 87 3 43 192 7 56 192 7 56 11 0 433 3 0 118 371 14 61 27 1 063 7 0 276 25 0 984 6 0 236 214 8 43 319 12 56 M6 2110 240 9 45 400 15 75 166 6 54 114 4 49 195 7 68 204 8 03 14 5 0 571 8 0 315 385 15 16 19 5 0 768 7 5 0 295 19 5 0 768 7 5 0 295 224 8 82 346 13 62 M6 2138 255 10 04 450 17 72 166 6 54 114 4 49 170 6 69 210 8 27 34 5 1 36 8 0 315 436 17 17 20 0 787 8 0 315 20 0 787 6 0 236...

Page 71: ...23 6 26 1 02 6 0 23 6 134 5 28 233 9 17 M5 4031 1 180 7 09 329 12 9 5 134 5 28 68 2 68 140 5 51 140 5 51 17 0 66 9 3 0 11 8 318 12 5 2 23 5 0 92 5 5 0 19 7 24 5 0 96 5 6 0 23 6 174 6 85 270 10 6 3 M5 4038 1 180 7 09 329 12 9 5 134 5 28 68 2 68 140 5 51 140 5 51 17 0 66 9 3 0 11 8 318 12 5 2 23 5 0 92 5 5 0 19 7 24 5 0 96 5 6 0 23 6 174 6 85 270 10 6 3 M5 4044 1 220 8 66 384 15 1 2 140 5 51 87 3 43...

Page 72: ... 1 24 13 0 51 2 416 16 3 8 710 27 9 5 M12 4389 440 17 3 2 800 31 5 0 254 10 0 0 218 8 58 370 14 5 7 310 12 2 0 23 0 91 12 0 47 2 773 30 4 3 31 5 1 24 0 14 0 55 1 31 5 1 24 13 0 51 2 416 16 3 8 710 27 9 5 M12 4453 510 20 0 8 1140 44 8 8 260 10 2 4 220 8 66 450 17 7 2 404 15 9 1 18 0 71 12 0 47 2 179 7 05 225 8 86 1110 43 7 0 34 1 33 9 15 0 59 1 34 1 34 15 0 59 1 486 19 1 3 1042 41 0 2 M12 4568 510 ...

Page 73: ...uit sequence settings can cause death or serious injury from moving equipment WARNING Sudden Movement Hazard Correctly wire the start stop and safety circuits before energizing the drive Momentarily closing a digital input terminal can start a drive that is programmed for 3 Wire control Failure to obey can cause death or serious injury from moving equipment WARNING Sudden Movement Hazard When usin...

Page 74: ...rive with the fault relay output If the drive outputs a fault during fault restart when you use the fault restart function set L5 02 1 Fault Contact at Restart Select Always Active to de energize the drive Be careful when you use a cut off sequence The default setting for L5 02 is 0 Active Only when Not Restarting 2 When you install a DC reactor you must remove the jumper between terminals 1 and 2...

Page 75: ...the type of the power supply for MFDI sinking sourcing mode or internal external power supply NOTICE Do not close the circuit between terminals SP and SN Failure to obey will cause damage to the drive Sinking Mode Install a jumper between terminals SC and SP NOTICE Do not close the circuit between terminals SC and SN Failure to obey will cause damage to the drive Sourcing Mode Install a jumper bet...

Page 76: ...e ON and OFF with the MC on the power source side to Run and Stop the drive Incorrect operation can decrease the service life of the relay contacts and electrolytic capacitors Motor and Main Circuit Connections WARNING Electrical Shock Hazard Do not connect terminals R L1 S L2 T L3 U T1 V T2 W T3 1 2 3 B1 or B2 to the ground terminal Failure to obey can cause death serious injury or damage to equi...

Page 77: ...77 Model Figure 4060 Figure 2 74 2110 Figure 2 75 4075 Figure 2 76 4089 Figure 2 77 2138 4103 Figure 2 78 2169 2211 4140 4168 Figure 2 79 2257 2313 4208 4296 Figure 2 80 2360 2415 4371 4389 Figure 2 81 4453 4675 Figure 2 82 Figure 2 70 Configuration of Main Circuit Terminal Block Figure 2 71 Configuration of Main Circuit Terminal Block ...

Page 78: ...in Circuit Wiring 78 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710617 05F YASKAWA AC Drive GA700 Technical Manual Figure 2 72 Configuration of Main Circuit Terminal Block Figure 2 73 Configuration of Main Circuit Terminal Block ...

Page 79: ... Wiring YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710617 05F YASKAWA AC Drive GA700 Technical Manual 79 Figure 2 74 Configuration of Main Circuit Terminal Block Figure 2 75 Configuration of Main Circuit Terminal Block Figure 2 76 Configuration of Main Circuit Terminal Block ...

Page 80: ... ELECTRIC SIEP C710617 05F YASKAWA AC Drive GA700 Technical Manual Figure 2 77 Configuration of Main Circuit Terminal Block Figure 2 78 Configuration of Main Circuit Terminal Block Figure 2 79 Configuration of Main Circuit Terminal Block ...

Page 81: ...echnical Manual 81 Figure 2 80 Configuration of Main Circuit Terminal Block Figure 2 81 Configuration of Main Circuit Terminal Block Figure 2 82 Configuration of Main Circuit Terminal Block Main Circuit Terminal Functions Refer to Table 2 16 for the functions of drive main circuit terminals R L1 T L3 R L1 T L3 R L1 T L3 ...

Page 82: ...on Precautions WARNING Electrical Shock Hazard The leakage current of the drive will be more than 3 5 mA in drive models 2xxxB 2xxxC 4002B to 4371B 4002C to 4371C with built in EMC filter turned ON and 4389 to 4675 The IEC EN 61800 5 1 2007 standard specifies that users must wire the power supply to automatically turn off when the protective ground wire disconnects Users can also connect a protect...

Page 83: ...ion manual for each device for recommended wire gauges to connect peripheral devices or options to terminals 1 2 3 B1 and B2 Contact Yaskawa or your nearest sales representative if the recommended wire gauges for the peripheral devices or options are out of the range of the applicable gauges for the drive Three Phase 200 V Class Model Terminals Recommended Gauge mm2 Applicable Gauge IP20 Applicabl...

Page 84: ...d 1 5 1 7 13 5 15 U T1 V T2 W T3 2 5 2 5 10 2 5 10 10 M4 Slotted 1 5 1 7 13 5 15 1 2 4 2 5 16 2 5 16 18 M5 Slotted 2 3 2 5 19 8 22 3 B1 B2 2 5 2 5 4 2 5 4 10 M4 Slotted 1 5 1 7 13 5 15 2 5 4 2 5 10 M4 Phillips slotted combo 1 2 1 5 10 6 13 3 2021 R L1 S L2 T L3 6 2 5 10 2 5 10 10 M4 Slotted 1 5 1 7 13 5 15 U T1 V T2 W T3 2 5 2 5 10 2 5 10 10 M4 Slotted 1 5 1 7 13 5 15 1 2 6 2 5 16 2 5 16 18 M5 Slo...

Page 85: ... V T2 W T3 16 2 5 16 6 16 18 M5 Slotted 2 3 2 5 19 8 22 3 1 2 35 2 5 35 10 35 20 M6 Hex socket cap WAF 5 mm 5 5 5 45 49 B1 B2 10 2 5 10 2 5 10 10 M4 Slotted 1 5 1 7 13 5 15 16 10 16 M6 Phillips slotted combo 5 4 6 0 47 8 53 1 2070 R L1 S L2 T L3 35 2 5 35 25 35 20 M6 Hex socket cap WAF 5 mm 5 5 5 45 49 U T1 V T2 W T3 16 2 5 16 16 20 M6 Hex socket cap WAF 5 mm 5 5 5 45 49 1 2 50 2 5 50 35 50 20 M6 ...

Page 86: ...1 V T2 W T3 50 16 50 50 27 M6 Hex socket cap WAF 5 mm 8 9 71 80 1 70 25 70 50 70 27 M8 Hex socket cap WAF 6 mm 10 12 89 107 B1 B2 35 6 35 6 35 21 M6 Minus 3 3 5 27 31 25 25 M6 Hex bolt 5 4 6 0 47 8 53 1 2169 R L1 S L2 T L3 70 50 95 95 37 M10 Hex socket cap WAF 8 mm 12 14 107 124 U T1 V T2 W T3 70 50 95 95 37 M10 Hex socket cap WAF 8 mm 12 14 107 124 1 1 5 6 35 16 50 50 28 M6 Hex socket cap WAF 5 m...

Page 87: ...2 T L3 120 2P 70 150 2P 150 2P M12 Hex self locking nut 35 310 U T1 V T2 W T3 120 2P 70 150 2P 150 2P M12 Hex self locking nut 35 310 1 120 2P 95 185 2P 185 2P M12 Hex self locking nut 35 310 3 70 2P 50 95 2P M12 Hex self locking nut 35 310 120 120 240 M12 Hex bolt slotted 32 40 283 354 2415 R L1 S L2 T L3 120 2P 70 150 2P 150 2P M12 Hex self locking nut 35 310 U T1 V T2 W T3 120 2P 70 150 2P 150 ...

Page 88: ...ted 1 5 1 7 13 5 15 U T1 V T2 W T3 2 5 2 5 10 2 5 10 10 M4 Slotted 1 5 1 7 13 5 15 1 2 2 5 2 5 16 2 5 16 18 M5 Slotted 2 3 2 5 19 8 22 3 B1 B2 2 5 2 5 4 2 5 4 10 M4 Slotted 1 5 1 7 13 5 15 2 5 4 2 5 10 M4 Phillips slotted combo 1 2 1 5 10 6 13 3 4005 R L1 S L2 T L3 2 5 2 5 10 2 5 10 10 M4 Slotted 1 5 1 7 13 5 15 U T1 V T2 W T3 2 5 2 5 10 2 5 10 10 M4 Slotted 1 5 1 7 13 5 15 1 2 2 5 2 5 16 2 5 16 1...

Page 89: ...10 10 M4 Slotted 1 5 1 7 13 5 15 U T1 V T2 W T3 2 5 2 5 10 2 5 10 10 M4 Slotted 1 5 1 7 13 5 15 1 2 2 5 2 5 16 2 5 16 18 M5 Slotted 2 3 2 5 19 8 22 3 B1 B2 2 5 2 5 4 2 5 4 10 M4 Slotted 1 5 1 7 13 5 15 2 5 4 2 5 10 M4 Phillips slotted combo 1 2 1 5 10 6 13 3 4018 R L1 S L2 T L3 2 5 2 5 10 2 5 10 10 M4 Slotted 1 5 1 7 13 5 15 U T1 V T2 W T3 2 5 2 5 10 2 5 10 10 M4 Slotted 1 5 1 7 13 5 15 1 2 4 2 5 ...

Page 90: ...d 2 3 2 5 19 8 22 3 U T1 V T2 W T3 6 2 5 16 6 16 18 M5 Slotted 2 3 2 5 19 8 22 3 1 2 16 2 5 35 10 35 20 M6 Hex socket cap WAF 5 mm 5 5 5 45 49 B1 B2 4 2 5 10 2 5 10 10 M4 Slotted 1 5 1 7 13 5 15 10 6 16 M6 Phillips slotted combo 5 4 6 0 47 8 53 1 4044 R L1 S L2 T L3 16 2 5 16 4 16 18 M5 Slotted 2 3 2 5 19 8 22 3 U T1 V T2 W T3 10 2 5 10 6 10 18 M5 Slotted 2 3 2 5 19 8 22 3 1 2 25 2 5 25 6 25 18 M5...

Page 91: ...2 3 2 5 19 8 22 3 U T1 V T2 W T3 25 2 5 25 10 25 18 M5 Slotted 2 3 2 5 19 8 22 3 1 35 2 5 35 16 35 20 M6 Hex socket cap WAF 5 mm 5 5 5 45 49 B1 B2 16 2 5 16 4 16 18 M5 Slotted 2 3 2 5 19 8 22 3 16 16 25 M6 Hex bolt 5 4 6 0 47 8 53 1 4103 R L1 S L2 T L3 35 16 50 50 27 M6 Hex socket cap WAF 5 mm 8 9 71 80 U T1 V T2 W T3 35 16 50 50 27 M6 Hex socket cap WAF 5 mm 8 9 71 80 1 50 25 70 50 70 27 M8 Hex s...

Page 92: ... nut 20 177 U T1 V T2 W T3 50 2P 25 95 2P 70 95 2P M10 Hex self locking nut 20 177 1 70 2P 35 120 2P 120 2P M10 Hex self locking nut 20 177 3 35 2P 25 70 2P 70 2P M10 Hex self locking nut 20 177 50 50 240 M10 Hex bolt slotted 18 23 159 204 4250 R L1 S L2 T L3 50 2P 25 95 2P 70 95 2P M10 Hex self locking nut 20 177 U T1 V T2 W T3 50 2P 25 95 2P 70 95 2P M10 Hex self locking nut 20 177 1 70 2P 35 12...

Page 93: ...U T1 V T2 W T3 120 2P 70 150 2P 150 2P M12 Hex self locking nut 35 310 1 120 2P 95 185 2P 185 2P M12 Hex self locking nut 35 310 3 95 2P 50 95 2P M12 Hex self locking nut 35 310 95 35 240 M12 Hex bolt slotted 32 40 283 354 4453 R L1 S L2 T L3 R1 L11 S1 L21 T1 L31 120 4P 70 150 4P 150 4P M12 Hex self locking nut 35 310 U T1 V T2 W T3 95 4P 70 150 4P 120 150 4P M12 Hex self locking nut 35 310 1 95 4...

Page 94: ...als U T1 V T2 and W T3 Failure to obey correct wiring procedures can cause the motor to run in reverse if the phase order is incorrect NOTICE Do not connect phase advancing capacitors or LC RC noise filters to the output circuits Failure to obey can cause damage to the drive phase advancing capacitors LC RC noise filters and leakage breakers ELCB GFCI or RCM RCD Cable Length Between Drive and Moto...

Page 95: ...round to 10 Ω or less Failure to obey can cause death or serious injury from contacting ungrounded electrical equipment NOTICE Do not share the ground wire with other devices for example welding machines or large current electrical equipment Incorrect equipment grounding can cause drive or equipment malfunction from electrical interference NOTICE To use more than one drive obey the instructions to...

Page 96: ...2 12 Main Circuit Wiring 96 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710617 05F YASKAWA AC Drive GA700 Technical Manual Figure 2 84 Drive Main Circuit Configuration Figure 2 85 Drive Main Circuit Configuration ...

Page 97: ...A700 Technical Manual 97 Figure 2 86 Drive Main Circuit Configuration Figure 2 87 Drive Main Circuit Configuration Protection of Main Circuit Terminals When wiring the main circuit terminals do not let cable ends go near terminals or the drive If you use crimped terminals make sure that you also use insulation caps ...

Page 98: ...ove the covers before measuring for dangerous voltages to make sure that the drive is safe Failure to obey will cause death or serious injury The procedures to wire the main circuit terminal block are different for different drive models Refer to Table 2 18 for model numbers and procedures Table 2 18 Types of Wiring Procedure for the Main Circuit Terminal Block Model Procedure Reference 2004 2211 ...

Page 99: ...sary to wire the screw clamp terminal Use applicable tools as specified by the recommended conditions in the product manual If you use power tools to tighten the terminal screws use a low speed setting 300 to 400 r min Failure to obey can cause damage to the terminal screws Users can purchase wiring tools from Yaskawa Contact Yaskawa or your nearest sales representative for more information Wire g...

Page 100: ... PHOENIX CONTACT 5 9 N m 2 3 Slotted Bit SF BIT SL 1 2X6 5 70 PHOENIX CONTACT 3 3 5 N m 2 3 M8 Hex socket cap WAF 6 mm Bit SF BIT HEX 6 50 PHOENIX CONTACT 8 12 N m 2 3 M10 Hex socket cap WAF 8 mm Bit SF BIT HEX 8 50 PHOENIX CONTACT 12 14 N m 2 3 1 When wiring drive models 2056 and 4089 and smaller select the correct tools for the wire gauge 2 Use 6 35 mm 0 25 in bit socket holder 3 Use a torque wr...

Page 101: ...he wired terminal The drive will not keep its IP20 protective level if areas that do not apply to the wired terminal are removed Tightly hold the cutaway section when removing pieces of the cutaway section Pieces of the cutaway section can fly out and cause injury Remove sharp edges from the wiring cover cutaway section to prevent damage to the wires The drive might not keep its IP20 protective le...

Page 102: ...no loose stranded wires or frayed wires after wiring is complete Main Circuit Terminal Block Wiring Procedure Remove the terminal cover before wiring the main circuit terminal block 1 Remove the screws on the terminal block cover and pull the terminal block cover away from the drive Pull the wiring cover away from the drive to remove the wiring cover after removing the terminal block cover A Termi...

Page 103: ...to the wired terminal are removed Tightly hold the cutaway section when removing pieces of the cutaway section Pieces of the cutaway section can fly out and cause injury Remove sharp edges from the wiring cover cutaway section to prevent damage to the wires The drive might not keep its IP20 protective level if wires other than those specified by Yaskawa are used even if the wiring cover is used co...

Page 104: ...102 Figure 2 102 Control Circuit Connection Diagram 1 To operate the control circuit while the main circuit power supply is OFF connect a 24 V power supply unit option 2 Install a wire jumper between terminals SC SP SN to select the type of the power supply for MFDI sinking sourcing mode or internal external power supply NOTICE Do not close the circuit between terminals SP and SN Failure to obey w...

Page 105: ...s 8 To use the internal power supply with the Safe Disable input use sourcing mode 9 Disconnect the wire jumper between H1 and HC and H2 and HC to use the Safe Disable input 10 Use multi function analog monitor outputs with analog frequency meters ammeters voltmeters and wattmeters Do not use monitor outputs with feedback type signal devices Control Circuit Terminal Block Functions Hx xx parameter...

Page 106: ...nals SC SN and terminals SC SP S2 MFDI selection 2 ON Reverse run OFF Stop S3 MFDI selection 3 External fault N O S4 MFDI selection 4 Fault reset S5 MFDI selection 5 Multi step speed reference 1 S6 MFDI selection 6 Multi step speed reference 2 S7 MFDI selection 7 Jog command S8 MFDI selection 8 Baseblock command N O SN MFDI power supply 0 V MFDI power supply 24 V maximum 150 mA NOTICE Do not close...

Page 107: ...Auxiliary frequency reference Voltage input or current input Select using DIP switch S1 3 and H3 05 Terminal A3 Signal Level Select 10 V to 10 V 100 to 100 0 V to 10 V 100 input impedance 20 kΩ 4 mA to 20 mA 100 0 mA to 20 mA 100 input impedance 250 Ω PTC input Motor Overheat Protection Set DIP switch S4 to PTC and set DIP switch S1 3 to V to set terminal A3 for PTC input AC Frequency reference co...

Page 108: ...rminals Type Terminal Name Default Function External Power Supply Input Terminals PS External 24 V power supply input Supplies backup power to the drive control circuit keypad and option board 21 6 VDC to 26 4 VDC 700 mA AC External 24 V power supply ground 0 V Serial Communication Terminals Refer to Table 2 24 for a list of serial communication terminals and functions Table 2 24 Serial Communicat...

Page 109: ...nd Tightening Torques Terminal Bare Wire Crimp Ferrule Recommended Gauge mm2 AWG Applicable Gauge mm2 AWG Recommended Gauge mm2 AWG Applicable Gauge mm2 AWG S1 S8 SC SN SP H1 H2 HC RP V V A1 A2 A3 AC MP FM AM AC D D AC MA MB MC M1 M6 PS E G 0 75 18 Stranded wire 0 2 1 0 24 18 Solid wire 0 2 1 5 24 16 0 5 20 0 25 0 5 24 20 Crimp Ferrules Attach an insulated sleeve when you use crimp ferrules Refer ...

Page 110: ...er supply NOTICE Insulate wire shields with tape or shrink tubing to prevent contact with other signal lines or equipment Incorrect wiring procedures could cause the drive or connected equipment to malfunction because of short circuits NOTICE Connect the shield of shielded cable to the applicable ground terminal Incorrect equipment grounding could cause the drive or connected equipment to malfunct...

Page 111: ...e with an analog signal from a remote source Failure to obey could cause unsatisfactory system performance A Wire with a crimp ferrule attached or unsoldered wire with the core wires lightly twisted B Pull back the shielding and lightly twist the end with your fingers to keep the ends from fraying C Remove approximately 5 5 mm 0 21 in of the covering at the end of the wire if you do not use crimp ...

Page 112: ...nctions for each terminal Figure 2 111 Locations of Switches Table 2 27 I O Terminals and Switches Functions Posi tion Switch Terminal Function Default Setting A DIP switch S2 Enables and disables the MEMOBUS Modbus communications termination resistor OFF B Jumper switch S5 FM AM Sets terminals FM and AM to voltage or current output FM V voltage output AM V voltage output C DIP switch S1 1 A1 Sele...

Page 113: ...ted circuits Use for sourcing mode The load impedance changes the voltage level of the pulse train output signal Load Impedance RL kΩ Output Voltage VMP V 1 5 kΩ or more 5 Vor more 4 0 kΩ or more 8 Vor more 10 kΩ or more 10 Vor more Note Use the formula in Figure 2 112 to calculate the necessary load resistance kΩ to increase output voltage V MP A Load impedance Figure 2 112 Wiring to Use Pulse Tr...

Page 114: ...de NPN Sourcing Mode PNP Set Input Signals for MFAI Terminals A1 to A3 Use terminals A1 to A3 to input a voltage or a current signal Set the signal type as shown in Table 2 28 Figure 2 114 Location of DIP Switch S1 Table 2 28 MFAI Terminals A1 to A3 Signal Settings Termi nal Input Signal DIP Switch Settings Parameters Switch Setting No Signal Level A1 Voltage input S1 1 V Default H3 01 0 0 V to 10...

Page 115: ... 8 mm 0 03 in to set DIP switches Set DIP switch S4 to AI to use terminal A3 as an analog input voltage current terminal The default setting for DIP switch S4 is AI Set MFAI Terminal A3 to PTC Input Set terminal A3 as an MFAI or as the PTC input for motor overload protection Use DIP switch S4 to set the input function Figure 2 115 Location of DIP Switch S4 Terminal Settings for DIP Switches Descri...

Page 116: ... V 1 10 V to 10 V Current output 2 4 mA to 20 mA Switch ON Termination Resistor for MEMOBUS Modbus Communications When the drive is the last slave in a MEMOBUS Modbus communications set DIP switch S2 to the ON position This drive has a built in termination resistor for the RS 485 interface Figure 2 117 Location of DIP Switch S2 Table 2 29 MEMOBUS Modbus Communications Termination Resistor Setting ...

Page 117: ...as a mini B type USB port You can use a USB cable USB 2 0 type A mini B to connect the drive to a type A USB port on a PC After you connect the drive to the PC you can use Yaskawa DriveWizard Industrial software to monitor drive performance and manage parameter settings A USB 2 0 type A mini B cable B Mini B type connector C Type A connector D PC Figure 2 118 Connect to a PC USB A B C D ...

Page 118: ...rive Ready is OFF and the drive ignores Run commands The drive is de energized During a fault There is problem with the control power supply There is a parameter setting error that will not let the drive run although a Run command is entered An overvoltage or undervoltage fault occurs when the Run command is entered The drive is in Programming Mode Interlock Circuit Example Refer to Figure 2 119 f...

Page 119: ...run the drive make sure that the braking circuit can dissipate the energy for the set deceleration time To install a dynamic braking option set L8 01 0 3 ERF DB Resistor Protection Disabled WARNING Fire Hazard The braking resistor connection terminals are B1 and B2 Do not connect braking resistors to other terminals Incorrect wiring connections could cause the braking resistor to overheat Failure ...

Page 120: ...it connections Set L8 55 0 Internal DB TransistorProtection Disable Note To install a CDBR type braking unit to the drive models 2004 to 2138 and 4002 to 4168 that have a built in braking transistor connect drive terminal B1 to terminal on the braking unit Figure 2 122 Install a Braking Unit CDBR Type Braking Resistor Unit LKEB Type Connect Braking Units in Parallel To connect two or more braking ...

Page 121: ... option set a sequence to de energize the drive at the trip contacts of the thermal overload relay Figure 2 124 Power Supply Interrupt for Overheat Protection Example WARNING Fire Hazard When you use a braking unit use a thermal relay on the braking resistors and set a fault contact output for the braking resistor unit to disconnect drive main power through an input contactor Incorrect braking cir...

Page 122: ...e energize the drive before you wire the main circuit terminal Failure to obey can cause death or serious injury Install a Residual Current Monitoring Detection RCM RCD When the drive output does switches at high speeds it causes high frequency leakage current To prevent electrical shock and fires caused by ground fault protection that is not sufficient install an RCM RCD Use a high frequency RCM ...

Page 123: ... the input side primary side to prevent damage to the braking resistor braking resistor unit WARNING Fire Hazard When you use a braking unit use a thermal relay on the braking resistors and set a fault contact output for the braking resistor unit to disconnect drive main power through an input contactor Incorrect braking circuit protection can overheat the resistors and cause death or serious inju...

Page 124: ...otection of the drive Length of the Motor Cables If you use long motor cables with a high carrier frequency the increased leakage current can cause nuisance tripping of the thermal relay To prevent this decrease the carrier frequency or increase the tripping level of the thermal overload relay Nuisance Tripping Because of High Drive Carrier Frequency High carrier frequency PWM drives make current ...

Page 125: ...the same power supply system you should use an AC reactor regardless of the conditions of the power supply The main circuit terminal block for the drive and the terminal blocks for the AC and DC reactors come in different shapes The drive has a European style terminal block and the AC and DC reactors have a circular terminal block Use caution when you prepare the ends of the wires Connect an AC Re...

Page 126: ...ce A surge protective device decreases the surge voltage that is generated from switching an inductive load near the drive Inductive loads include Magnetic contactors Electromagnetic relays Magnetic valves Solenoids Magnetic brakes Always use a surge protective device or diode with inductive loads Note Do not connect a surge protective device to the drive output side ...

Page 127: ... B Input side primary side noise filter C Drive D Other controller Note The input side primary side noise filter model is LNFD xx Figure 2 128 Example of Connecting the Noise Filter on the Input Side Primary Side Connect a Noise Filter to the Output Side Secondary Side A noise filter on the output side of the drive decreases inductive noise and radio frequency interference Figure 2 129 shows an ex...

Page 128: ...its A Power supply B Drive C Shielded motor cable D Motor E Minimum of 30 cm 11 8 in apart F Controller G Signal line Figure 2 130 Prevent Inductive Noise Decrease Radio Frequency Interference The drive input lines and output lines generate radio frequency interference Use noise filters on input and output sides and install the drive in a steel box to decrease radio frequency interference Note Kee...

Page 129: ...S symmetrical amperes and 240 Vac when there is a short circuit in the power supply 400 V class Use the fuses specified in this document to prepare the drive for use on a circuit that supplies not more than 100 000 RMS symmetrical amperes and 480 Vac when there is a short circuit in the power supply The built in short circuit protection of the drive does not provide branch circuit protection The u...

Page 130: ...1 45 60 164 FWH 325A FWH 450A 1 2257 55 75 200 FWH 600A 2313 75 100 271 FWH 800A 2360 90 125 324 FWH 1000A 2415 110 150 394 FWH 1000A 1 Yaskawa recommends a fuse with a large rated current for applications with repeated loads Table 2 32 Factory Recommended Branch Circuit Protection 400 V Class ND Drive Model Maximum Applicable Motor Output kW HP Input Voltage 460 V Maximum Applicable Motor Output ...

Page 131: ...th a large rated current for applications with repeated loads Table 2 33 Factory Recommended Branch Circuit Protection 400 V Class HD Drive Model Maximum Applicable Motor Output kW HP Input Voltage 460 V Maximum Applicable Motor Output kW HP Input Voltage 460 V Input Current Rating A Semiconductor Protection Fuse Rated Current Manufacturer EATON Bussmann 4002 0 55 0 75 0 55 0 75 1 9 FWH 50B 4004 1...

Page 132: ...mum Applicable Motor Output kW HP Input Voltage 460 V Input Current Rating A Semiconductor Protection Fuse Rated Current Manufacturer EATON Bussmann 4389 200 250 220 300 373 FWH 1000A 4453 220 300 260 350 410 FWH 1200A 4568 250 335 300 400 465 FWH 1200A 4675 315 400 335 450 584 FWH 1400A FWH 1600A 1 1 Yaskawa recommends a fuse with a large rated current for applications with repeated loads ...

Page 133: ...Motor rated voltage V 0 02 3 wire resistance Ω km wiring distance m motor rated current A 10 3 When the cable between the drive and motor is longer than 50 m 164 ft use parameter C6 02 Carrier Frequency Selection to decrease the carrier frequency 6 Correctly ground the drive 7 Tighten main circuit and grounding terminal screws of the drive to their specified torques 8 When operating more than one ...

Page 134: ...7 Pick up all wire clippings 8 Make sure that none of the wires on the terminal block touch other terminals or connections 9 Isolate control circuit wiring from main circuit wiring 10 Make sure that control circuit wiring is not longer than 50 m 164 ft 11 Make sure that Safe Disable input wiring is not longer than 30 m 98 ft ...

Page 135: ... insulated drive motor NOTICE Use a motor that provides insulation correct for PWM drives Failure to obey can cause a short circuit or ground fault from insulation deterioration High Speed Operation If you operate a motor more than its rated speed you can have problems with the motor bearing durability and dynamic balance of the machine Contact the motor or machine manufacturer Torque Characterist...

Page 136: ...ions in applications with heavy loads for example conveyors or elevators To restart a coasting motor that is rotating faster than 200 Hz in V f Control first use the Short Circuit Braking function to stop the motor A special braking resistor unit is necessary for Short Circuit Braking Contact Yaskawa or your nearest sales representative for more information To restart a coasting motor that is rota...

Page 137: ...to flow to the capacitors and can damage the capacitors A split phase start or a repulsion start can burn out the starter coils because the internal centrifugal switch is not activated Motors with Brakes If you use a drive to operate a motor that has a brake connected to the output side low voltage levels can cause the brake to possibly not release at start Use a motor with a brake that has a dedi...

Page 138: ...2 26 Motor Application Precautions 138 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710617 05F YASKAWA AC Drive GA700 Technical Manual ...

Page 139: ...unctions 141 3 3 LED Status Ring 147 3 4 Start up Procedures 149 3 5 Items to Check before Starting Up the Drive 153 3 6 Keypad Operation 155 3 7 Automatic Parameter Settings Optimized for Specific Applications Application Presets 190 3 8 Auto Tuning 192 3 9 Test Run 202 3 10 Fine Tuning during Test Runs Adjust the Control Function 204 3 11 Test Run Checklist 215 ...

Page 140: ...NING Electrical Shock Hazard Do not operate equipment when covers are missing Some figures in this section include drives without covers or safety shields to more clearly show the inside of the drive Replace covers and shields before operation Use drives only as specified by the instructions Failure to obey can cause death or serious injury Do not remove covers or touch circuit boards while the dr...

Page 141: ...OCAL Mode The drive received a Run command from the MFDI terminals when the drive is not in Drive Mode The drive received a Fast Stop command The safety function shuts off the drive output The user pushed on the keypad while the drive is operating in REMOTE Mode The drive is energized with an active Run command and b1 17 0 Run Command at Power Up Disregard Existing RUN Command B ALM LED Illuminate...

Page 142: ...ty in H Left Arrow Key Moves the cursor to the left Up Arrow Key Down Arrow Key Scrolls up or down to display the next item or the previous item Selects parameter numbers and increments or decrements setting values Right Arrow Key RESET Moves the cursor to the right Continues to the next screen Clears drive faults ENTER Key Enters parameter values and settings Selects menu items to move the user b...

Page 143: ...EZ operation FWD or REV flash C Ready The screen will show Rdy when the drive is ready for operation or when the drive is running D Mode display area Shows the name of the current mode or screen E Frequency reference source indicator Shows the current frequency reference source KPD keypad AI analog input terminal terminals A1 to A3 COM MEMOBUS Modbus communications OPT option card RP pulse train i...

Page 144: ...n the keypad while the drive is operating in REMOTE Mode The drive is energized with an active Run command and b1 17 0 Run Command at Power Up Disregard Existing RUN Command When b1 03 3 Stopping Method Selection Coast to Stop with Timer the Run command is disabled then enabled during the Run wait time The drive received a DC Injection Braking command OFF The motor is stopped ALM LED Illuminated T...

Page 145: ...ocedure and Test Run 3 3 2 Component Names and Functions YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710617 05F YASKAWA AC Drive GA700 Technical Manual 145 Keypad Mode and Menu Displays Figure 3 5 Keypad Functions and Display Levels ...

Page 146: ...un command from an external source while in Programming Mode Set b1 08 0 Disregard RUN while Programming to reject the Run command from an external source while in Programming Mode default Set b1 08 1 Accept RUN while Programming to accept the Run command from an external source while in Programming Mode Set b1 08 2 Allow Programming Only at Stop to prevent changes from Drive Mode to Programming M...

Page 147: ...t the drive cannot operate For example in Programming Mode or when is flashing C RUN Illuminated The drive is in regular operation Flashing 1 The drive is decelerating to stop The drive received a Run command with a frequency reference of 0 Hz but the drive is not set for zero speed control The drive received a DC Injection Braking command Flashing Quickly 1 The drive received a Run command from t...

Page 148: ...3 3 LED Status Ring 148 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710617 05F YASKAWA AC Drive GA700 Technical Manual Figure 3 6 LED Flashing Statuses Figure 3 7 Relation between RUN LED and Drive Operation ...

Page 149: ...plication This section gives information about only the most basic settings Note Refer to the A1 06 section to use an Application Preset to set up the drive Flowchart A Connect and Run the Motor with Minimum Setting Changes Flowchart A shows a basic start up sequence to connect and run a motor with a minimum of setting changes Settings can change when the application changes Use the drive default ...

Page 150: ...ure Figure 3 9 Induction Motor Auto Tuning and Test Run Procedure 1 Be sure to release the holding brake before doing Inertia Tuning 2 In ASR Tuning the drive will automatically tune Feed Forward control and KEB Ride Thru 2 parameters Sub Chart A 2 PM Motor Auto Tuning and Test Run Procedure Sub Chart A 2 gives the basic steps to start up the drive for a PM motor ...

Page 151: ...or speed control with an encoder set F1 05 PG 1 Rotation Selection before starting Auto Tuning 2 If you replace the encoder do Z Pulse Offset Tuning WARNING Crash Hazard Test the system to make sure that the drive operates safely after you wire the drive and set parameters Failure to obey can cause injury or damage to equipment Figure 3 10 PM Motor Auto Tuning and Test Run Procedure ...

Page 152: ... manufacturer set E5 01 FFFF 2 Be sure to release the holding brake before doing Inertia Tuning 3 In ASR Tuning the drive will automatically tune Feed Forward control and KEB Ride Thru 2 parameters Subchart A 3 EZ Open Loop Vector Control Test Run Procedure Subchart A 3 gives the setup procedure to run a PM motor in EZ Open Loop Vector Control Figure 3 11 Procedure for Test Run of EZ Open Loop Vec...

Page 153: ...to the drive control circuit terminals Control Circuit Terminal Status Turn OFF the inputs from all devices and switches connected to the drive control circuit terminals Connection between Machinery and Motor Disengage all couplings and belts that connect the motor and machinery Check after Energizing the Drive Check the items in Table 3 5 after energizing the drive The keypad will show these scre...

Page 154: ...et Parameters Using the Setup Wizard on page 181 for more information Note If the keypad does not show the Initial Setup screen Initial Setup from the Main Menu to show the Initial Setup screen 1 Make the initial settings for each item A Language Selection B Set Date Time C Setup Wizard D Show Initial Setup Screen Note If you select Yes from the Show Initial Setup Screen setting the keypad will sh...

Page 155: ... JOG to run the motor Release to stop the motor Change Motor between Forward Reverse Run You can change the direction of motor rotation when operating the drive from the keypad Push to illuminate Push and hold FWD REV to toggle the direction of motor rotation between forward and reverse Show the Standard Monitor Push to show the standard monitor Ux xx Push HOME to go back to the HOME screen Note W...

Page 156: ...hows how to show the standard monitor Ux xx 1 Push Home to show the HOME screen Note The keypad will show Home in the top right corner when the HOME screen is active If Home is not shown on push Back to show Home on 2 Push Menu 3 Push or to select Monitors then push 4 Push or to select Standard Monitor then push 5 Push or to move the cursor to change the value 6 Push or to change the monitor numbe...

Page 157: ...corner when the HOME screen is active If Home is not shown on push Back to show Home on 2 Push Menu 3 Push or to select Monitors then push 4 Push or to select Custom Monitor then push Setup 5 Push or to select Custom Monitor 1 then push 6 Push or to select the monitor number to register then push Enter the three digits in x xx part of monitor Ux xx to identify which monitor to output For example t...

Page 158: ...is figure When there are a minimum of two screens push or to switch between screens If you registered only one custom monitor to Custom Monitor 1 the screen will show only one monitor If you registered custom monitors only to Custom Monitor 1 and Custom Monitor 2 the screen will show only two monitors Set the Monitors to Show as a Bar Graph The procedure in this section shows how to show the frequ...

Page 159: ...hen push Enter the three digits in x xx part of monitor Ux xx to identify which monitor to output For example to show monitor U1 01 Frequency Reference set it to 101 as shown in this figure The configuration procedure is complete Show Monitors as Bar Graphs The procedure in this section shows how to show a specific monitor as a bar graph You can show a maximum of three 1 Push Home to display the H...

Page 160: ...en will show the monitors as shown in this figure Set the Monitors to Show as Analog Gauges The procedure in this section shows how to show the frequency reference monitor as an analog gauge 1 Push Home to show the HOME screen Note The keypad will show Home in the top right corner when the HOME screen is active If Home is not shown on push Back to show Home on 2 Push Menu 3 Push or to select Monit...

Page 161: ...entify which monitor to output For example to show monitor U1 01 Frequency Reference set it to 101 as shown in this figure The configuration procedure is complete Display Monitors as an Analog Gauge The following explains how to display the contents selected for a monitor as an analog gauge 1 Push Home to show the HOME screen Note The keypad will show Home in the top right corner when the HOME scr...

Page 162: ...nitor 1 B Monitor Parameter 2 set with Custom Monitor 2 C Trend Plot 2 Scale Maximum Minimum Value D Trend Plot Time Scale E Trend Plot 1 Scale Maximum Minimum Value Select Monitor Items to Show as a Trend Plot The procedure in this section shows how to show the frequency reference monitor as a trend plot 1 Push Home to show the HOME screen Note The keypad will show Home in the top right corner wh...

Page 163: ...ter then push When the U parameters are on the display as Ux xx the three digits in x xx identify which monitor to output For example to show monitor U1 01 Frequency Reference set it to 101 as shown in this figure 8 Push or to select Trend Plot 1 Scale Minimum Value then push 9 Push or to select the specified digit then push or to select the correct number Push Default to set the parameters to the...

Page 164: ...s to the factory default Push Min Max to move between the minimum value and maximum value 13 Push to keep the changes 14 Push Back If necessary use the same procedure to set Custom Monitor 2 Set the Time Scale for the Trend Plot Monitor The procedure in this section shows how to set the time scale for the trend plot monitor 1 Push Home to show the HOME screen Note The keypad will show Home in the ...

Page 165: ... push or to select the correct number Push Default to set the parameters to the factory default Push Min Max to move between the minimum value and maximum value 7 Push to keep the changes The configuration procedure is complete Show Monitor Items as a Trend Plot The procedure in this section shows how to show the selected monitor data as a trend plot 1 Push Home to show the HOME screen Note The ke...

Page 166: ...switch between Pause and Restart for the monitor display The Hold ENTER message flashes while monitoring is paused Change Parameter Settings Do the steps in this procedure to set parameters for the application This example shows how to change the setting value for C1 01 Acceleration Time 1 1 Push Home to show the HOME screen Note When the drive is in HOME Mode the screen shows Home in the upper ri...

Page 167: ...ct C1 Accel Decel Time then push 6 Push or to select C1 01 then push 7 Push or to select the specified digit then push or to select the correct number Push Default to set the parameters to factory defaults Push Min Max to show the minimum value or the maximum value on the display 8 Push to keep the changes 9 Continue to change parameters then push Back to go back to the home screen after you chang...

Page 168: ...at the top of the list The A2 01 to A2 32 settings change when the A1 06 setting changes which makes it easier to set and reference the necessary parameter settings 1 Push Home to show the HOME screen Note The keypad will show Home in the top right corner when the HOME screen is active If Home is not shown on push Back to show Home on 2 Push Menu 3 Push or to select User Custom Parameters then pus...

Page 169: ... when setting parameters after replacing a drive If you set up more than one drive you can copy the parameter settings from a drive that completed a test run to the other drives Note Always stop the motor before making a backup of the parameters When making a backup the drive will not accept Run commands 1 Push Home to show the HOME screen Note The keypad will show Home in the top right corner whe...

Page 170: ...e them to different drives Note Always stop the drive before you start to restore the parameter backups The drive rejects Run commands while it is restoring parameters 1 Push Home to show the HOME screen Note The keypad will show Home in the top right corner when the HOME screen is active If Home is not shown on push Back to show Home on 2 Push Menu 3 Push or to select Parameter Backup Restore the...

Page 171: ...up D Parameter backup data is not registered E Backup data does not contain the date Information F Backup date Verify Keypad Parameters and Drive Parameters This procedure verifies that the parameter setting values that were backed up in the keypad agree with the parameter setting values in the drive Note Always stop the drive before you start to verify the parameters The drive does not accept Run...

Page 172: ...rive Note The keypad shows vFyE Parameters do not Match when the parameter settings backed up in the keypad do not agree with the parameter settings copied to the drive Push one of the keys to return to the screen in Step 6 Delete Parameters Backed Up to the Keypad This procedure deletes the parameters that were backed up to the keypad 1 Push Home to show the HOME screen Note The keypad will show ...

Page 173: ...ure will show all parameters that were changed from their defaults as the result of Auto Tuning or setting changes This helps find which settings have been changed and is very useful when you replace a drive This lets users quickly access and re edit changed parameters If no parameters have been changed the keypad will show 0 Parameters 1 Push Home to show the HOME screen Note The keypad will show...

Page 174: ...w the parameter to check 7 To re edit a parameter push or select the parameter to edit then push 8 Push or to select the digit then push or to change the value 9 When you are done changing the value push The parameter revision procedure is complete Restore Modified Parameters to Defaults This procedure will set all parameters with changed values to their default settings ...

Page 175: ...screen Note The keypad will show Home in the top right corner when the HOME screen is active If Home is not shown on push Back to show Home on 2 Push Menu 3 Push or to select Modified Param Fault Log then push 4 Push or to select Modified Parameters then push 5 Push 6 Push or to select the parameters to return to their default settings then push 7 Push Default ...

Page 176: ...ock battery you must set the date and time each time you energize the drive 1 Push Home to show the HOME screen Note The keypad will show Home in the top right corner when the HOME screen is active If Home is not shown on push Back to show Home on 2 Push Menu 3 Push or to select Modified Parameters Fault History then push 4 Push or to select Fault History then push 5 Push or to show the fault hist...

Page 177: ...brake is engaged on the load Make sure that the motor can freely spin before starting Auto Tuning Failure to obey could cause incorrect operation of the drive NOTICE Do not do Rotational Auto Tuning with the load connected to the motor Uncouple the load from the motor Failure to obey can cause incorrect operation The drive cannot accurately calculate motor parameters if the load is connected to th...

Page 178: ...the changed parameters as the result of Auto Tuning 10 Push or in the parameter change confirmation screen to check the changed parameters then select Auto Tuning Successful at the bottom of the screen and push To change a parameter again push or to select the parameter to change then push to show the Parameter setting screen Auto Tuning is complete Note If the drive detects an error or you push b...

Page 179: ...to select the language then push The procedure to set the keypad language is complete Set the Date and Time The procedure in this section shows how to set the date and time Note Refer to Replace the Keypad Battery on page 437 for information about the battery installation procedure To set the drive to detect an alarm when the battery is dead or when the clock is not set install the battery then se...

Page 180: ...or to select Initial Setup then push 4 Push or to select Set Date Time and push 5 Push or to select the format of date display then push 6 Push or to select the format of time display then push 7 Push or to select a number from Year Month Day then push or to change the value 8 When you are done changing the value push ...

Page 181: ...Wizard lets users follow simple messages on the keypad to set these basic parameters Frequency reference source Input signal level Run command source Duty Rating Motor type Control method Maximum frequency Input output settings Note The Setup Wizard function will initialize all parameters before it sets the basic parameters 1 Push Home to show the HOME screen Note The keypad will show Home in the ...

Page 182: ...7 For the next steps follow the instructions shown on the keypad until the Parameter Change Confirmation Screen is shown 8 In the parameter change confirmation screen push or to examine the changed parameter then select Apply of each parameter at the bottom of the screen and push Note To change a parameter again push or to select the parameter to change then push to show the parameter setting scre...

Page 183: ... 2 Push MENU 3 Push to select Initial Setup then push 4 Push to select Show Initial Setup Screen then push 5 Push to select No then push No The keypad will not show the Initial Setup Screen when the drive is energized Yes The keypad will show the Initial Setup Screen when the drive is energized Start Data Logging The data log function keeps a record of a maximum of 10 drive monitors The procedure ...

Page 184: ...n push Yes Data logging starts No Data logging will not start If the drive was logging data when you entered the command the keypad look like this Set Data to Log Set Monitor to Log The procedure in this section shows how to set the monitor for which to log data 1 Push Home to show the HOME screen Note The keypad will show Home in the top right corner when the HOME screen is active If Home is not ...

Page 185: ...og Monitor then push 6 Push or to select the save destination monitor parameter then push 7 Push or to select the monitor number to be logged then push The setting procedure is complete Set the Sampling Time The procedure in this section shows how to set the sampling time for data logging 1 Push Home to show the HOME screen Note The keypad will show Home in the top right corner when the HOME scree...

Page 186: ...g Interval then push 6 Push or to select the digit then push or to change the value 7 When you are done changing the value push The procedure to set the sampling time is complete Set Backlight to Automatically Turn OFF You can set the backlight of the keypad screen to automatically turn OFF after a set length of time since the last key operation on the keypad The procedure in this section shows ho...

Page 187: ...Note The keypad will show Home in the top right corner when the HOME screen is active If Home is not shown on push Back to show Home on 2 Push Menu 3 Push or to select Diagnostic Tools then push 4 Push or to select Backlight then push 5 Push or to select ON or OFF then push ON Backlight is always ON OFF Backlight turns OFF after set length of time 6 Push Setup 7 Push ...

Page 188: ...rive The procedure in this section shows how to show the drive model maximum applicable motor output HD ND rated output current HD ND software version and the serial number on the keypad 1 Push Home to show the HOME screen Note The keypad will show Home in the top right corner when the HOME screen is active If Home is not shown on push Back to show Home on 2 Push Menu 3 Push or to select Diagnosti...

Page 189: ...ive and write those parameters to a different drive as specified by the settings of o3 06 Auto Parameter Backup Selection and o3 07 Auto Parameter Backup Interval Note Set o3 06 1 Auto Parameter Backup Selection Enabled in each drive to which you will write the parameters This operation is not available when the parameters in the keypad and the parameters on the other drives are set to the same va...

Page 190: ...that were automatically changed by the application preset function Note Make sure that you set A1 03 2220 3330 Initialize Parameters 2 Wire Initialization 3 Wire Initialization to initialize parameters before you set A1 06 This section shows the procedure to set an application preset 1 Push Home to show the HOME screen Note The keypad will show Home in the top right corner when the HOME screen is ...

Page 191: ...ke sure that you do Auto Tuning after you set A1 06 You cannot change the value set in A1 06 To select an application preset first set A1 03 2220 to initialize parameters and then make a selection to A1 06 If initializing all parameters will cause a problem it is not necessary to change settings When the drive changes to the A1 06 setting it will also reset the parameters automatically registered ...

Page 192: ...e the parameters for the measured motor characteristics after you do Stationary Auto Tuning Table 3 6 Types of Auto Tuning for Induction Motors Type Parameter Settings Application Conditions and Benefits Applicable Control Method A1 02 Value V f 0 CL V f 1 OLV 2 CLV 3 AOLV 4 Rotational Auto Tuning T1 01 0 When you can decouple the motor and load the motor can rotate freely while Auto Tuning When o...

Page 193: ...0 Hz x 2 Motor Iron Loss T1 11 W x 3 Test Mode Selection 4 T1 12 x 5 No Load Voltage T1 13 V x 6 x 6 1 Input this value when A1 02 3 Control Method Selection Closed Loop Vector 2 0 Hz is displayed as the initial value If you do not know the Motor Rated Slip Frequency keep the setting at 0 Hz 3 Input this value when A1 02 0 or 1 Control Method Selection V f Control or V f Control with Encoder 4 If ...

Page 194: ...rent x x x Z Pulse Offset Tuning T2 01 3 When you do not know the encoder Z pulse offset When the encoder was replaced If you have compensated for the deviation from Z phase Δθ Note The motor will rotate slowly while the drive measures the encoder base position x PM Rotational Auto Tuning T2 01 4 When the information from the motor test report or motor nameplate is available When you can decouple ...

Page 195: ...xis Inductance T2 12 mH x x x InducedVoltage Const Unit Select T2 13 x x x PM Motor Induced Voltage Const T2 14 3 x x x Pull InCurrentLv forPM Motor Tun T2 15 x x PGNumOfPulses Rev forPMMotor Tun T2 16 4 4 4 Encoder Z Pulse Offset for PM Motor T2 17 Degrees 4 4 4 1 Set the motor code for a Yaskawa PM motor 2 Set the motor code to FFFF for a PM motor from a different manufacturer 3 Changes when the...

Page 196: ...en the value set in T2 13 changes EZ Tuning This section gives information about the Auto Tuning mode for EZ Open Loop Vector Control Auto Tuning will set the E9 xx parameters Table 3 11 EZ Tuning Mode Selection Mode Parameter Settings Application Conditions and Benefits Applicable Control Method A1 02 Value Motor Parameter Setting T4 01 0 For efficient operation of induction motors and PM motors ...

Page 197: ... Rate Tuning KEB Tuning Note If you do Control Tuning you cannot set H1 xx 16 Motor 2 Selection Do not do Control Tuning for applications that switch between motor 1 and motor 2 Table 3 13 Control Loop Tuning Selection Mode T3 00 Application Conditions and Benefits Applicable Control Method A1 02 Value V f 0 CL V f 1 OLV 2 CLV 3 AOLV 4 OLV PM 5 AOLV PM 6 CLV PM 7 EZOL V 8 Inertia Tuning 0 For Feed...

Page 198: ...t ramp to stop deceleration curve for KEB Ride Thru ASR Tuning ASR Tuning estimates the motor load inertia and automatically sets the parameters ASR Tuning also uses the measured load inertia value to do an automatic adjustment after calculating the proportional gain of speed control ASR Deceleration Rate Tuning Deceleration Rate Tuning automatically sets the deceleration rate to prevent an ov Ove...

Page 199: ...V for 400 V class models This is very important when operating the motor at more than 90 of base speed where high torque precision is necessary If the input power supply is equal to the motor rated voltage the drive output voltage will not be sufficient and performance will decrease Push on the keypad to cancel Auto Tuning If a Safe Disable input signal is input to the drive during Auto Tuning Aut...

Page 200: ...e motor until Auto Tuning is complete Failure to obey could cause serious injury Uncouple the drive from the motor before Rotational Auto Tuning to prevent drive malfunction If you do Rotational Auto Tuning with the motor connected to a load that is more than 30 of the motor duty rating the drive will not correctly calculate the motor parameters and the motor can operate incorrectly When the load ...

Page 201: ...ational Auto Tuning the drive applies voltage to the motor before the motor rotates Do not touch the motor until Auto Tuning is complete Failure to obey could cause serious injury Do rotational motor parameter tuning or look at the motor test report or nameplate to enter the values manually Make sure that the motor magnetic brake is released Connect the motor and load Make sure that external force...

Page 202: ...oad test run 1 Energize the drive or push to show the HOME screen If Home is not shown on push Back to show Home on 2 Push to illuminate the LOCAL REMOTE indicator 3 Push to show d1 01 Reference 1 and set it to 6 00 Hz 4 Push The RUN indicator illuminates and the motor runs at 6 00 Hz in the forward direction 5 Make sure that the motor is rotating in the correct direction and that the drive does n...

Page 203: ...ize the drive or push Home to show the HOME screen If Home is not shown on push Back to show Home on 2 Set d1 01 Reference 1 to 6 00 Hz 3 Push to illuminate the LOCAL REMOTE indicator 4 Push The RUN indicator illuminates and the motor runs at 6 00 Hz in the forward direction 5 Make sure that the motor is rotating in the correct direction and that the drive does not show a fault If the drive detect...

Page 204: ...er Solution Default Setting Recommended Setting Hunting or oscillation at mid range speeds 10 Hz to 40 Hz n1 02 Hunting Prevention Gain Setting If torque is not sufficient with heavy loads decrease the setting value If hunting or oscillation occur with light loads increase the setting value If hunting occurs with a low inductance motor for example a motor with a larger frame size or a high frequen...

Page 205: ...thod speed precision is unsatisfactory C5 01 ASR Proportional Gain 1 P C5 02 ASR Integral Time 1 I 5 Adjust C5 01 C5 02 C5 01 0 20 C5 02 0 200 s Proportional gain 0 10 to 1 00 Integral time 0 100 to 2 000 s 1 Default value changes when o2 04 Drive Model KVA Selection and C6 01 Normal Heavy Duty Selection values change 2 Default value changes when A1 02 Control Method Selection and o2 04 Drive Mode...

Page 206: ...ase the setting value in increments of 0 05 If hunting or oscillation occur decrease the setting value in increments of 0 05 1 00 0 50 2 00 n2 02 SpdFeedbackDetCtr AFR TimeConst1 To increase the speed of torque or speed response decrease the setting value in increments of 10 ms and examine the response If hunting or oscillation occur or if the load inertia is too much increase the setting value in...

Page 207: ...value by the same ratio 750 ms 750 2000 ms C4 06 Motor 2 Torque Comp Delay Time If ov occurs increase the setting value in increments of 10 ms and examine the response If the response is not sufficient decrease the setting value in increments of 2 ms and examine the response Note Make sure that this parameter setting is C4 02 Torque Compensation Delay Time C4 06 When you adjust C4 06 you must also...

Page 208: ...setting value is set too high a large torque reference may be output even with light loads E1 08 11 0 2 E1 10 2 0 2 Default setting 2 V 4 1 Default value changes when A1 02 Control Method Selection and o2 04 Drive Model KVA Selection values change 2 Default value changes when A1 02 Control Method Selection and E1 03 V f Pattern Selection values change 3 Default value changes when o2 04 Drive Model...

Page 209: ...ault value changes when o2 04 Drive Model KVA Selection and C6 01 Normal Heavy Duty Selection values change Advanced Open Loop Vector Control Method Table 3 20 Parameters for Fine Tuning the Drive Advanced Open Loop Vector Control Method Issue Parameter Number Solution Default Setting Recommended Setting oS Overspeed occurs Hunting or oscillation T1 01 Auto Tuning Mode Selection Make sure that the...

Page 210: ...se for low speed or high speed C5 07 ASR Gain Switchover Frequency 4 High speed C5 01 ASR Proportional Gain 1 P C5 02 ASR Integral Time 1 I Low speed C5 03 ASR Proportional Gain 2 P 3 C5 04 ASR Integral Time 2 I Change the ASR proportional gain and ASR integral time to conform to the output frequency 0 0 Hz 0 0 to maximum output frequency Hunting or oscillation C5 06 ASR Delay Time 4 If torque or ...

Page 211: ... Feedback Detection Gain Decrease the setting value in increments of 0 05 0 80 C4 01 Torque Compensation Gain Adjust the setting value Note Setting this value too high can cause overcompensation and motor oscillation 0 00 1 00 Oscillation at start Motor stalls n8 51 Pull in Current Accel Decel Increase the setting value in increments of 5 50 b2 02 DC Injection Braking Current b2 03 DC Inject Braki...

Page 212: ...n8 62 Output Voltage Limit Level Set to a value lower than the actual input voltage 200 0 V 400 0 V 1 Default value changes when E5 01 Motor Code Selection and o2 04 Drive Model KVA Selection values change Advanced Open Loop Vector Control Method for PM Table 3 22 Parameters for Fine Tuning the Drive Advanced Open Loop Vector Control Method for PM Issue Parameter Number Solution Default Setting Re...

Page 213: ...02 ASR Integral Time 1 I Low speed C5 04 ASR Integral Time 2 I If torque or speed response are slow decrease the setting value If hunting or oscillation occur increase the setting value 0 500 s 0 300 to 1 000 s 1 The drive cannot find speed response for low speed or high speed C5 07 ASR Gain Switchover Frequency High speed C5 01 ASR Proportional Gain 1 P C5 02 ASR Integral Time 1 I Low speed C5 03...

Page 214: ...ng value If hunting or oscillation occur increase the setting value 0 500 s 0 300 to 1 000 s 1 The drive cannot find ASR proportional gain or integral time for low speed or high speed C5 07 ASR Gain Switchover Frequency Change the ASR proportional gain and ASR integral time to conform to the output frequency 0 0 0 0 to maximum rotation speed Hunting or oscillation C5 06 ASR Delay Time If the rigid...

Page 215: ... No Description 5 Set F1 01 Encoder 1 Pulse Count PPR correctly and make sure that encoder pulse counting direction is correct 6 Set C5 01 ASR Proportional Gain 1 and C5 02 ASR Integral Time 1 Table 3 27 Open Loop Vector Control A1 02 2 or Closed Loop Vector Control A1 02 3 Check No Description 7 Decouple motor shafts and machines 8 Refer to the information on the motor nameplate and set this data...

Page 216: ...ode when the control circuit terminals supply the Run command and frequency reference in REMOTE Mode the LO RE LED turns OFF 25 When terminal A1 is used for the frequency reference Voltage input Set DIP Switch S1 1 on the drive to V Set H3 01 0 1 Terminal A1 Signal Level Select 0 to 10V Lower Limit at 0 10 to 10V Bipolar Reference Set H3 02 0 Terminal A1 Function Selection Frequency Reference Curr...

Page 217: ...n the drive to I Set H3 05 2 3 Terminal A3 Signal Level Select 4 to 20 mA 0 to 20 mA Set H3 06 0 Terminal A3 Function Selection Frequency Reference 28 Make sure that the frequency reference reaches the necessary minimum and maximum values If drive operation is incorrect make these adjustments Gain adjustment Set the maximum voltage and current values then adjust the analog input gain until the fre...

Page 218: ...3 11 Test Run Checklist 218 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710617 05F YASKAWA AC Drive GA700 Technical Manual ...

Page 219: ...iance This chapter gives information about how to make the machines and devices that use this product comply with European standards and UL standards 4 1 General Safety 220 4 2 European Standards 222 4 3 UL Standards 256 4 4 China RoHS Compliance 282 4 5 对应中国RoHS指令 283 4 6 Safe Disable Input 284 ...

Page 220: ...come into contact with the drive case Failure to obey could cause death or serious injury Only let authorized persons install wire maintain examine replace parts and repair the drive Failure to obey can cause death or serious injury Do not work on the drive or around the drive while wearing loose clothing or jewelry Tighten loose clothing and remove all metal objects such as watches or rings Failu...

Page 221: ...hing the drive and circuit boards Failure to obey can cause ESD damage to the drive circuitry Do not connect or disconnect the motor from the drive while the drive is supplying voltage Incorrect equipment sequencing can cause damage to the drive Do not use unshielded wire for control wiring Use shielded twisted pair wires and ground the shield to the ground terminal of the drive Failure to comply ...

Page 222: ...ective This product displays the CE Mark in accordance with the Low Voltage Directive the EMC Directive and the Machinery Directive Table 4 1 Harmonized Standard European Directive Harmonized Standard CE Low Voltage Directive Compliance 2014 35 EU IEC EN 61800 5 1 2007 EMC Directive 2014 30 EU EN 61800 3 2004 A1 2012 Machinery Directive 2006 42 EC EN ISO 13849 1 AC 2009 PL e Cat III IEC 62061 A1 2...

Page 223: ...Standards Compliance 4 4 2 European Standards YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710617 05F YASKAWA AC Drive GA700 Technical Manual 223 EU Declaration of Conformity ...

Page 224: ...4 2 European Standards 224 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710617 05F YASKAWA AC Drive GA700 Technical Manual ...

Page 225: ...Standards Compliance 4 4 2 European Standards YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710617 05F YASKAWA AC Drive GA700 Technical Manual 225 ...

Page 226: ...4 2 European Standards 226 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710617 05F YASKAWA AC Drive GA700 Technical Manual ...

Page 227: ...Standards Compliance 4 4 2 European Standards YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710617 05F YASKAWA AC Drive GA700 Technical Manual 227 ...

Page 228: ...ECTRIC SIEP C710617 05F YASKAWA AC Drive GA700 Technical Manual CE Low Voltage Directive Compliance It has been confirmed that this product complies with the CE Low Voltage Directive by conducting a test according to IEC EN 61800 5 1 2007 ...

Page 229: ...ge Directive Area of Use Install this product in a location with overvoltage category III and pollution degree 2 or less These standards are defined by IEC EN 60664 Guarding against Debris When installing IP20 enclosure drives model 2xxxB 4xxxB use an enclosure that does not let unwanted material enter the drive from above or below Wiring Diagram Refer to Figure 4 2 for an example of a drive that ...

Page 230: ...ilure to obey can cause death or serious injury 2 For circuit protection the main circuit is separated from the surface case that can touch the main circuit 3 The control circuit is a Safety Extra Low Voltage circuit Separate this circuit from other circuits with reinforced insulation Make sure that the Safety Extra Low Voltage circuit is connected as specified 4 Reinforced insulation separates th...

Page 231: ... range of the applicable gauges for the drive Three Phase 200 V Class Model Terminals Recommended Gauge mm2 Applicable Gauge IP20 Applicable Gauge 1 mm2 Wire Stripping Length 2 mm Terminal Screw Tightening Torque N m lb in Size Shape 2004 R L1 S L2 T L3 2 5 2 5 10 2 5 10 10 M4 Slotted 1 5 1 7 13 5 15 U T1 V T2 W T3 2 5 2 5 10 2 5 10 10 M4 Slotted 1 5 1 7 13 5 15 1 2 2 5 2 5 16 2 5 16 18 M5 Slotted...

Page 232: ... 1 5 1 7 13 5 15 U T1 V T2 W T3 2 5 2 5 10 2 5 10 10 M4 Slotted 1 5 1 7 13 5 15 1 2 4 2 5 16 2 5 16 18 M5 Slotted 2 3 2 5 19 8 22 3 B1 B2 2 5 2 5 4 2 5 4 10 M4 Slotted 1 5 1 7 13 5 15 2 5 4 2 5 10 M4 Phillips slotted combo 1 2 1 5 10 6 13 3 2021 R L1 S L2 T L3 6 2 5 10 2 5 10 10 M4 Slotted 1 5 1 7 13 5 15 U T1 V T2 W T3 2 5 2 5 10 2 5 10 10 M4 Slotted 1 5 1 7 13 5 15 1 2 6 2 5 16 2 5 16 18 M5 Slot...

Page 233: ... T3 16 2 5 16 6 16 18 M5 Slotted 2 3 2 5 19 8 22 3 1 2 35 2 5 35 10 35 20 M6 Hex socket cap WAF 5 mm 5 5 5 45 49 B1 B2 10 2 5 10 2 5 10 10 M4 Slotted 1 5 1 7 13 5 15 16 10 16 M6 Phillips slotted combo 5 4 6 0 47 8 53 1 2070 R L1 S L2 T L3 35 2 5 35 25 35 20 M6 Hex socket cap WAF 5 mm 5 5 5 45 49 U T1 V T2 W T3 16 2 5 16 16 20 M6 Hex socket cap WAF 5 mm 5 5 5 45 49 1 2 50 2 5 50 35 50 20 M6 Hex soc...

Page 234: ... V T2 W T3 50 16 50 50 27 M6 Hex socket cap WAF 5 mm 8 9 71 80 1 70 25 70 50 70 27 M8 Hex socket cap WAF 6 mm 10 12 89 107 B1 B2 35 6 35 6 35 21 M6 Minus 3 3 5 27 31 25 25 M6 Hex bolt 5 4 6 0 47 8 53 1 2169 R L1 S L2 T L3 70 50 95 95 37 M10 Hex socket cap WAF 8 mm 12 14 107 124 U T1 V T2 W T3 70 50 95 95 37 M10 Hex socket cap WAF 8 mm 12 14 107 124 1 1 5 6 35 16 50 50 28 M6 Hex socket cap WAF 5 mm...

Page 235: ...120 2P 70 150 2P 150 2P M12 Hex self locking nut 35 310 U T1 V T2 W T3 120 2P 70 150 2P 150 2P M12 Hex self locking nut 35 310 1 120 2P 95 185 2P 185 2P M12 Hex self locking nut 35 310 3 70 2P 50 95 2P M12 Hex self locking nut 35 310 120 120 240 M12 Hex bolt slotted 32 40 283 354 2415 R L1 S L2 T L3 120 2P 70 150 2P 150 2P M12 Hex self locking nut 35 310 U T1 V T2 W T3 120 2P 70 150 2P 150 2P M12 ...

Page 236: ...ted 1 5 1 7 13 5 15 U T1 V T2 W T3 2 5 2 5 10 2 5 10 10 M4 Slotted 1 5 1 7 13 5 15 1 2 2 5 2 5 16 2 5 16 18 M5 Slotted 2 3 2 5 19 8 22 3 B1 B2 2 5 2 5 4 2 5 4 10 M4 Slotted 1 5 1 7 13 5 15 2 5 4 2 5 10 M4 Phillips slotted combo 1 2 1 5 10 6 13 3 4005 R L1 S L2 T L3 2 5 2 5 10 2 5 10 10 M4 Slotted 1 5 1 7 13 5 15 U T1 V T2 W T3 2 5 2 5 10 2 5 10 10 M4 Slotted 1 5 1 7 13 5 15 1 2 2 5 2 5 16 2 5 16 1...

Page 237: ... Slotted 1 5 1 7 13 5 15 U T1 V T2 W T3 2 5 2 5 10 2 5 10 10 M4 Slotted 1 5 1 7 13 5 15 1 2 2 5 2 5 16 2 5 16 18 M5 Slotted 2 3 2 5 19 8 22 3 B1 B2 2 5 2 5 4 2 5 4 10 M4 Slotted 1 5 1 7 13 5 15 2 5 4 2 5 10 M4 Phillips slotted combo 1 2 1 5 10 6 13 3 4018 R L1 S L2 T L3 2 5 2 5 10 2 5 10 10 M4 Slotted 1 5 1 7 13 5 15 U T1 V T2 W T3 2 5 2 5 10 2 5 10 10 M4 Slotted 1 5 1 7 13 5 15 1 2 4 2 5 16 2 5 1...

Page 238: ... 2 3 2 5 19 8 22 3 U T1 V T2 W T3 6 2 5 16 6 16 18 M5 Slotted 2 3 2 5 19 8 22 3 1 2 16 2 5 35 10 35 20 M6 Hex socket cap WAF 5 mm 5 5 5 45 49 B1 B2 4 2 5 10 2 5 10 10 M4 Slotted 1 5 1 7 13 5 15 10 6 16 M6 Phillips slotted combo 5 4 6 0 47 8 53 1 4044 R L1 S L2 T L3 16 2 5 16 4 16 18 M5 Slotted 2 3 2 5 19 8 22 3 U T1 V T2 W T3 10 2 5 10 6 10 18 M5 Slotted 2 3 2 5 19 8 22 3 1 2 25 2 5 25 6 25 18 M5 ...

Page 239: ...19 8 22 3 U T1 V T2 W T3 25 2 5 25 10 25 18 M5 Slotted 2 3 2 5 19 8 22 3 1 35 2 5 35 16 35 20 M6 Hex socket cap WAF 5 mm 5 5 5 45 49 B1 B2 16 2 5 16 4 16 18 M5 Slotted 2 3 2 5 19 8 22 3 16 16 25 M6 Hex bolt 5 4 6 0 47 8 53 1 4103 R L1 S L2 T L3 35 16 50 50 27 M6 Hex socket cap WAF 5 mm 8 9 71 80 U T1 V T2 W T3 35 16 50 50 27 M6 Hex socket cap WAF 5 mm 8 9 71 80 1 50 25 70 50 70 27 M8 Hex socket ca...

Page 240: ... nut 20 177 U T1 V T2 W T3 50 2P 25 95 2P 70 95 2P M10 Hex self locking nut 20 177 1 70 2P 35 120 2P 120 2P M10 Hex self locking nut 20 177 3 35 2P 25 70 2P 70 2P M10 Hex self locking nut 20 177 50 50 240 M10 Hex bolt slotted 18 23 159 204 4250 R L1 S L2 T L3 50 2P 25 95 2P 70 95 2P M10 Hex self locking nut 20 177 U T1 V T2 W T3 50 2P 25 95 2P 70 95 2P M10 Hex self locking nut 20 177 1 70 2P 35 12...

Page 241: ...2 W T3 120 2P 70 150 2P 150 2P M12 Hex self locking nut 35 310 1 120 2P 95 185 2P 185 2P M12 Hex self locking nut 35 310 3 95 2P 50 95 2P M12 Hex self locking nut 35 310 95 35 240 M12 Hex bolt slotted 32 40 283 354 4453 R L1 S L2 T L3 R1 L11 S1 L21 T1 L31 120 4P 70 150 4P 150 4P M12 Hex self locking nut 35 310 U T1 V T2 W T3 95 4P 70 150 4P 120 150 4P M12 Hex self locking nut 35 310 1 95 4P 95 185...

Page 242: ...l is necessary to connect a braking resistor unit LKEB series to terminals B1 and B2 Connect a Fuse to the Input Side Primary Side The drive circuit protection must comply with IEC EN 61800 5 1 2007 for protection against a short circuit in the internal circuitry Yaskawa recommends connecting semiconductor protection fuses on the input side for branch circuit protection WARNING Electrical Shock Ha...

Page 243: ...Manufacturer EATON Bussmann 4002 FWH 50B 4004 FWH 50B 4005 FWH 50B 4007 FWH 60B 4009 FWH 60B 4012 FWH 60B 4018 FWH 80B 4023 FWH 90B 4031 FWH 150B 4038 FWH 200B 4044 FWH 200B 4060 FWH 225A 4075 FWH 250A 4089 FWH 275A 4103 FWH 275A 4140 FWH 300A 4168 FWH 325A FWH 400A 1 4208 FWH 500A 4250 FWH 600A 4296 FWH 700A 4371 FWH 800A 4389 FWH 1000A 4453 FWH 1200A 4568 FWH 1200A 4675 FWH 1400A FWH 1600A 1 1 Y...

Page 244: ...to Table 4 4 and Table 4 5 for the recommended fuses Table 4 4 Recommended Fuse Three Phase 200 V Class Drive Model Fuse Manufacturer Bussmann Model Quantity 2004 FWH 45B 2 2006 FWH 45B 2 2010 FWH 45B 2 2012 FWH 50B 2 2018 FWH 80B 2 2021 FWH 80B 2 2030 FWH 125B 2 2042 FWH 150B 2 2056 FWH 200B 2 2070 FWH 250A 2 2082 FWH 250A FWH 300A 1 2 2110 FWH 250A FWH 275A 1 2 2138 FWH 300A FWH 350A 1 2 2169 FW...

Page 245: ...08 FWH 500A FWH 600A 1 2 4250 FWH 600A FWH 700A 1 2 4296 FWH 700A FWH 800A 1 2 4371 FWH 800A FWH 1000A 1 2 4389 FWH 1000A FWH 1200A 1 2 4453 FWH 1200A FWH 1400A 1 2 4568 FWH 1200A FWH 1600A 1 2 4675 FWH 1600A 2 1 Yaskawa recommends a fuse with a large rated current for applications with repeated loads EMC Directive Drives with built in EMC filters models 2xxxB 2xxxC 4xxxB 4xxxC were tested in acco...

Page 246: ...ve B 10 m 32 8 ft maximum C Motor D Metal conduit E Grounding wire Figure 4 4 Wiring the Drive and Motor Note Use a braided shield cable for the drive and motor wiring or put the wires through a metal conduit The maximum wiring length between the drive and motor is 10 m 32 8 ft Keep the cable between the drive and motor as short as possible Keep the grounding wire as short as possible 4 Use a cabl...

Page 247: ...t terminal block for the drive and the terminal blocks for the DC reactor come in different shapes The drive has a European style terminal block and the DC reactor has a round terminal block Correctly prepare the ends of the wiring Ground Wiring WARNING Electrical Shock Hazard Do not remove covers or touch circuit boards while the drive is energized Failure to obey can cause death or serious injur...

Page 248: ...ilure to obey can cause death or serious injury NOTICE When disabling the internal EMC filter move the screws from ON to OFF and then tighten to the specified torque Completely removing the screws or tightening the screws to an incorrect torque may cause drive failure NOTICE Move the EMC switch screw or screws to the OFF position for networks that are not symmetrically grounded Failure to obey can...

Page 249: ...031B 4038B 2056C 4031C 4038C Figure 4 9 2070B 2082B 4044B 4060B 2070C 2082C 4044C 4060C Figure 4 10 2110B 4075B 2138B 2211B 4089B 4168B 2110C 4075C 2138C 2211C 4089C 4168C Figure 4 11 2257B 2313B 4208B 4296B 2257C 2313C 4208C 4296C Figure 4 12 2360B 2415B 4371B 4389B 2360C 2415C 4371C 4389C Figure 4 13 4453B 4675B 4453C 4675C Figure 4 14 A SW ON B Screw OFF Figure 4 8 EMC Filter Switch Location 1 ...

Page 250: ...IC SIEP C710617 05F YASKAWA AC Drive GA700 Technical Manual A SW ON B Screw OFF Figure 4 10 EMC Filter Switch Location 3 A SW ON B Screw OFF Figure 4 11 EMC Filter Switch Location 4 A SW ON B Screw OFF Figure 4 12 EMC Filter Switch Location 5 ...

Page 251: ...ues Model Screw Size Tightening Torque N m 2004 2082 4002 4060 M4 20 1 0 1 3 2110 2211 4075 4168 M4 25 1 0 1 3 2257 2415 4208 4675 M5 25 2 0 2 5 Installing the External EMC Noise Filter Drive models 2xxxA and 4xxxA must meet conditions in this section to comply with EN 61800 3 2004 A1 2012 Connect an EMC noise filter to the input side primary side that complies with European standards as specified...

Page 252: ... drive and motor wiring or put the wires through a metal conduit The maximum wiring length between the drive and motor is 10 m 32 8 ft Keep the cable between the drive and motor as short as possible Keep the grounding wire as short as possible 4 Use a cable clamp to ground the motor cable to the metal plate Note Make sure that the protective ground wire complies with technical specifications and l...

Page 253: ...reactor to decrease harmonic distortion Refer to DC Reactor on page 255 to select a DC reactor Note To maintain compliance with IEC EN 61000 3 2 on drive models 2004 2006 4002 and 4004 install a DC reactor The main circuit terminal block for the drive and the terminal blocks for the DC reactor come in different shapes The drive has a European style terminal block and the DC reactor has a round ter...

Page 254: ...5060 1 TDK 2056A RTEN 5080 1 TDK 2070A FS5972 100 35 1 Schaffner 2082A FS5972 100 35 1 Schaffner 2110A FS5972 170 40 1 Schaffner 2138A FS5972 170 40 1 Schaffner 2169A FS5972 170 40 1 Schaffner 2211A FS5972 250 37 1 Schaffner 2257A FS5972 410 99 1 Schaffner 2313A FS5972 410 99 1 Schaffner 2360A FS5972 410 99 1 Schaffner 2415A FS5972 600 99 1 Schaffner Table 4 10 External EMC Noise Filter 4xxxA Mode...

Page 255: ...FS5972 600 99 1 Schaffner 4568A FS5972 600 99 1 Schaffner 4675A FS5972 410 99 2 Schaffner DC Reactor To comply with IEC EN 61000 3 2 install a DC reactor to drive models 2004 2006 4002 and 4004 when using an internal or external EMC filter Refer to Table 4 11 to select the correct DC reactor Table 4 11 DC Reactors for Harmonic Suppression Manufacturer Yaskawa Electric Drive Model DC Reactor Model ...

Page 256: ...in a location with overvoltage category III and pollution degree 2 or less These standards are specified in IEC EN 60664 Ambient Temperature Maintain the ambient temperature within the following ranges according to the enclosure type Enclosed wall mounted type UL Type 1 10 C to 40 C 14 F to 104 F Open chassis type IP20 10 C to 50 C 14 F to 122 F Wire the Main Circuit Terminal Block Wire the main c...

Page 257: ...clamp terminal Use applicable tools as specified by the recommended conditions in the product manual If you use power tools to tighten the terminal screws use a low speed setting 300 to 400 r min Failure to obey can cause damage to the terminal screws Users can purchase wiring tools from Yaskawa Contact Yaskawa or your nearest sales representative for more information Wire gauges on existing drive...

Page 258: ...e Phase 200 V Class on page 259 and Three Phase 400 V Class on page 264 for the recommended wire gauges and tightening torques of the main circuit terminals Comply with local standards for correct wire gauges in the region where the drive is used WARNING Electrical Shock Hazard Only connect peripheral options for example a DC reactor or braking resistor to terminals 1 2 3 B1 and B2 Failure to obey...

Page 259: ...2 T L3 14 14 6 14 6 10 M4 Slotted 1 5 1 7 13 5 15 U T1 V T2 W T3 14 14 6 14 6 10 M4 Slotted 1 5 1 7 13 5 15 1 2 14 14 3 14 3 18 M5 Slotted 2 3 2 5 19 8 22 3 B1 B2 14 14 10 14 10 10 M4 Slotted 1 5 1 7 13 5 15 10 14 8 M4 Phillips slotted combo 1 2 1 5 10 6 13 3 2010 R L1 S L2 T L3 12 14 6 14 6 10 M4 Slotted 1 5 1 7 13 5 15 U T1 V T2 W T3 14 14 6 14 6 10 M4 Slotted 1 5 1 7 13 5 15 1 2 12 14 3 14 3 18...

Page 260: ...10 M4 Slotted 1 5 1 7 13 5 15 U T1 V T2 W T3 10 14 6 14 6 10 M4 Slotted 1 5 1 7 13 5 15 1 2 8 14 3 14 3 18 M5 Slotted 2 3 2 5 19 8 22 3 B1 B2 14 14 10 14 10 10 M4 Slotted 1 5 1 7 13 5 15 10 12 8 M4 Phillips slotted combo 1 2 1 5 10 6 13 3 2030 R L1 S L2 T L3 6 14 6 14 6 10 M4 Slotted 1 5 1 7 13 5 15 U T1 V T2 W T3 8 14 6 14 6 10 M4 Slotted 1 5 1 7 13 5 15 1 2 6 14 3 14 3 18 M5 Slotted 2 3 2 5 19 8...

Page 261: ...5 5 5 45 49 U T1 V T2 W T3 3 14 3 6 3 20 M6 Hex socket cap WAF 5 mm 5 5 5 45 49 1 2 1 0 14 1 0 4 1 0 20 M6 Hex socket cap WAF 5 mm 5 5 5 45 49 B1 B2 8 14 8 14 8 10 M4 Slotted 1 5 1 7 13 5 15 6 6 4 M6 Phillips slotted combo 5 4 6 0 47 8 53 1 2082 R L1 S L2 T L3 1 0 14 1 0 6 1 0 20 M6 Hex socket cap WAF 5 mm 5 5 5 45 49 U T1 V T2 W T3 2 14 2 6 2 20 M6 Hex socket cap WAF 5 mm 5 5 5 45 49 1 2 2 0 14 2...

Page 262: ... 0 300 37 M10 Hex socket cap WAF 8 mm 12 14 107 124 1 1 4 5 1 6 2 0 1 0 2 0 28 M6 Hex socket cap WAF 5 mm 8 9 71 80 3 5 1 0 4 2 0 1 2 0 28 M8 Hex socket cap WAF 6 mm 8 9 71 80 4 4 1 0 M8 Hex bolt slotted 9 0 11 79 7 97 4 2211 R L1 S L2 T L3 250 2 250 2 0 250 37 M10 Hex socket cap WAF 8 mm 12 14 107 124 U T1 V T2 W T3 300 2 300 3 0 300 37 M10 Hex socket cap WAF 8 mm 12 14 107 124 1 1 4 5 2 0 6 2 0 ...

Page 263: ... self locking nut 35 310 1 350 2P 4 0 400 2P 300 400 2P M12 Hex self locking nut 35 310 3 3 0 2P 1 0 4 0 2P M12 Hex self locking nut 35 310 1 1 350 M12 Hex bolt slotted 32 40 283 354 2415 R L1 S L2 T L3 250 2P 2 0 300 2P 250 300 2P M12 Hex self locking nut 35 310 U T1 V T2 W T3 300 2P 2 0 300 2P 250 300 2P M12 Hex self locking nut 35 310 1 350 2P 4 0 400 2P 300 400 2P M12 Hex self locking nut 35 3...

Page 264: ...4 6 14 6 10 M4 Slotted 1 5 1 7 13 5 15 U T1 V T2 W T3 14 14 6 14 6 10 M4 Slotted 1 5 1 7 13 5 15 1 2 14 14 3 14 3 18 M5 Slotted 2 3 2 5 19 8 22 3 B1 B2 14 14 10 14 10 10 M4 Slotted 1 5 1 7 13 5 15 12 14 8 M4 Phillips slotted combo 1 2 1 5 10 6 13 3 4005 R L1 S L2 T L3 14 14 6 14 6 10 M4 Slotted 1 5 1 7 13 5 15 U T1 V T2 W T3 14 14 6 14 6 10 M4 Slotted 1 5 1 7 13 5 15 1 2 14 14 3 14 3 18 M5 Slotted...

Page 265: ...14 6 14 6 10 M4 Slotted 1 5 1 7 13 5 15 U T1 V T2 W T3 14 14 6 14 6 10 M4 Slotted 1 5 1 7 13 5 15 1 2 10 14 3 14 3 18 M5 Slotted 2 3 2 5 19 8 22 3 B1 B2 14 14 10 14 10 10 M4 Slotted 1 5 1 7 13 5 15 10 14 8 M4 Phillips slotted combo 1 2 1 5 10 6 13 3 4018 R L1 S L2 T L3 10 14 6 14 6 10 M4 Slotted 1 5 1 7 13 5 15 U T1 V T2 W T3 10 14 6 14 6 10 M4 Slotted 1 5 1 7 13 5 15 1 2 8 14 3 14 3 18 M5 Slotted...

Page 266: ...18 M5 Slotted 2 3 2 5 19 8 22 3 U T1 V T2 W T3 8 14 4 10 4 18 M5 Slotted 2 3 2 5 19 8 22 3 1 2 4 14 1 8 1 20 M6 Hex socket cap WAF 5 mm 5 5 5 45 49 B1 B2 10 14 8 14 8 10 M4 Slotted 1 5 1 7 13 5 15 6 10 6 M6 Phillips slotted combo 5 4 6 0 47 8 53 1 4044 R L1 S L2 T L3 4 14 4 10 4 18 M5 Slotted 2 3 2 5 19 8 22 3 U T1 V T2 W T3 6 14 6 10 6 18 M5 Slotted 2 3 2 5 19 8 22 3 1 2 3 14 3 10 3 18 M5 Slotted...

Page 267: ...1 V T2 W T3 2 14 2 10 2 18 M5 Slotted 2 3 2 5 19 8 22 3 1 1 0 14 1 0 6 1 0 20 M6 Hex socket cap WAF 5 mm 5 5 5 45 49 B1 B2 6 14 6 14 6 18 M5 Slotted 2 3 2 5 19 8 22 3 4 6 4 M6 Hex bolt 5 4 6 0 47 8 53 1 4103 R L1 S L2 T L3 1 0 6 2 0 2 2 0 27 M6 Hex socket cap WAF 5 mm 8 9 71 80 U T1 V T2 W T3 1 6 2 0 2 2 0 27 M6 Hex socket cap WAF 5 mm 8 9 71 80 1 2 0 2 4 0 2 4 0 27 M8 Hex socket cap WAF 6 mm 10 1...

Page 268: ... nut 20 177 U T1 V T2 W T3 1 0 2P 3 4 0 2P 2 0 4 0 2P M10 Hex self locking nut 20 177 1 3 0 2P 2 250 2P 4 0 250 2P M10 Hex self locking nut 20 177 3 1 0 2P 4 1 0 2P 1 0 2P M10 Hex self locking nut 20 177 4 4 350 M10 Hex bolt slotted 18 23 159 204 4250 R L1 S L2 T L3 2 0 2P 3 4 0 2P 2 0 4 0 2P M10 Hex self locking nut 20 177 U T1 V T2 W T3 2 0 2P 3 4 0 2P 2 0 4 0 2P M10 Hex self locking nut 20 177 ...

Page 269: ... 300 2P 2 0 300 2P 250 300 2P M12 Hex self locking nut 35 310 1 400 2P 4 0 400 2P 300 400 2P M12 Hex self locking nut 35 310 3 4 0 2P 1 4 0 2P M12 Hex self locking nut 35 310 1 1 350 M12 Hex bolt slotted 32 40 283 354 4453 R L1 S L2 T L3 R1 L11 S1 L21 T1 L31 250 4P 2 0 300 4P 250 300 4P M12 Hex self locking nut 35 310 U T1 V T2 W T3 4 0 4P 2 0 300 4P 250 300 4P M12 Hex self locking nut 35 310 1 4 ...

Page 270: ...nd 4208 to 4675 use UL approved closed loop crimp terminals Use the tools recommend by the terminal manufacturer to crimp the closed loop crimp terminal Yaskawa recommends closed loop crimp terminals from JST Mfg Co Ltd and insulation caps from Tokyo DIP Co Ltd Comply with local standards for correct wire gauges in the region where the drive is used Contact Yaskawa or your nearest sales representa...

Page 271: ...200 12 TD 327 TD 314 TP 200 2415 1 M12 R60 12 YF 1 YET 300 1 TD 321 TD 311 TP 060 3 0 2P 80 12 TD 323 TD 312 TP 080 250 2P R150 12 TD 325 TD 313 TP 150 300 2P 350 2P R200 12 TD 327 TD 314 TP 200 4002 4004 12 M4 R5 5 4 YA 4 AD 900 TP 005 4005 4012 10 M4 R5 5 4 YA 4 AD 900 TP 005 4018 4023 10 M5 R5 5 5 YA 4 AD 900 TP 005 4031 8 M6 R8 6 YA 4 AD 901 TP 008 4038 6 M6 R14 6 YA 4 AD 902 TP 014 4044 4060 ...

Page 272: ... 300 2P 300 2P R150 12 TD 325 TD 313 TP 150 400 2P R200 12 TD 327 TD 314 TP 200 4453 1 0 M12 R60 12 YF 1 YET 300 1 TD 321 TD 311 TP 060 3 0 4P 80 12 TD 323 TD 312 TP 080 4 0 4P 4 0 4P R100 12 TD 324 TD 312 TP 100 250 4P R150 12 TD 325 TD 313 TP 150 4568 2 0 M12 80 12 YF 1 YET 300 1 TD 323 TD 312 TP 080 3 0 4P 4 0 4P R100 12 TD 324 TD 312 TP 100 250 4P R150 12 TD 325 TD 313 TP 150 300 4P 4675 2 0 M...

Page 273: ...e drive does not provide branch circuit protection The user must provide branch circuit protection as specified by the National Electric Code NEC the Canadian Electric Code Part I CEC and local codes Table 4 14 Factory Recommended Branch Circuit Protection 200 V Class ND Drive Model Maximum Applicable Motor Output kW HP Input Current Rating A Semiconductor Protection Fuse Rated Current Manufacture...

Page 274: ...00A 1 Yaskawa recommends a fuse with a large rated current for applications with repeated loads Table 4 16 Factory Recommended Branch Circuit Protection 400 V Class ND Drive Model Maximum Applicable Motor Output kW HP Input Voltage 460 V Maximum Applicable Motor Output kW HP Input Voltage 460 V Input Current Rating A Semiconductor Protection Fuse Rated Current Manufacturer EATON Bussmann 4002 0 75...

Page 275: ... Circuit Protection 400 V Class HD Drive Model Maximum Applicable Motor Output kW HP Input Voltage 460 V Maximum Applicable Motor Output kW HP Input Voltage 460 V Input Current Rating A Semiconductor Protection Fuse Rated Current Manufacturer EATON Bussmann 4002 0 55 0 75 0 55 0 75 1 9 FWH 50B 4004 1 1 1 5 0 75 1 3 5 FWH 50B 4005 1 5 2 1 5 2 4 7 FWH 50B 4007 2 2 3 2 2 3 6 7 FWH 60B 4009 3 4 3 4 8 ...

Page 276: ...e LVLC power supply in the drive Pulse train output MP AC Uses the LVLC power supply in the drive Use the UL Listed class 2 power supply for external power supply Pulse train input RP AC Uses the LVLC power supply in the drive Use the UL Listed class 2 power supply for external power supply Safe disable input H1 H2 HC Uses the LVLC power supply in the drive Use the UL Listed class 2 power supply f...

Page 277: ...escription Default Range E9 06 11E9 Motor Rated Current FLA Sets the motor rated current in amps Determined by E9 01 and o2 04 10 to 200 of the drive rated current Note When the drive model changes the display units for this parameter also change 0 01 A 2004 to 2042 4002 to 4023 0 1 A 2056 to 2415 4031 to 4675 The setting value of E9 06 is the reference value for motor protection Enter the motor r...

Page 278: ...abled configure the circuits then add thermal relays to each motor The magnetic contactor installed for motor protection cannot be switched ON OFF during run Failure to obey can cause motor failure 1 Variable Torque Use this setting for general purpose motors with a 60 Hz base frequency The overload tolerance decreases as motor speed decreases because the cooling fan speed decreases and the abilit...

Page 279: ...slower than 1 speed at 100 load will cause motor overload 4 PM Variable Torque Use this setting for PM motors with derated torque characteristics The overload tolerance decreases as motor speed decreases because the cooling fan speed decreases and the ability of the motor to cool decreases in the low speed range The overload tolerance characteristics of the motor change the trigger point for the e...

Page 280: ...cies less than commercial line power the drive will detect oL1 The drive triggers a fault relay output and the motor coasts to stop L1 02 Motor Overload Protection Time No Hex Name Description Default Range L1 02 0481 Motor Overload Protection Time Sets the operation time for the electronic thermal protector of the drive to prevent damage to the motor Usually it is not necessary to change this set...

Page 281: ...n C1 09 Fast Stop Time Fault relay output terminal MA MC turns ON and MB MC turns OFF 3 Alarm Only The keypad shows oH3 and operation continues The output terminal set for Alarm H2 01 to H2 03 10 turns ON L1 04 Motor Thermistor oH Fault Select No Hex Name Description Default Range L1 04 0483 Motor Thermistor oH Fault Select Sets the drive operation when the PTC input signal to the drive is at the ...

Page 282: ...nt the human body or property The environment friendly use period for this product is 15 years This period is not the product warranty period Note This mark will be added to factory shipments from late June 2016 There may be a mix of products that reflect or do not reflect this change during the distribution stage Thank you for your understanding Information on Hazardous Substances in This Product...

Page 283: ...产销售以及进口的电子电气产品的环保使用期限 年限 电子电气产品的环 保使用期限从生产日期算起 在期限内 正常使用产品的过程中 不会有特定的6种有害物质外泄进而对环境 人 和财产造成深刻影响 本产品的环保使用期限为15年 但需要注意的是环保使用期限并非产品的质量保证期限 注 2016年6月下旬以后出厂的产品会依次进行标识 此外 标识和未标识的产品可能会在物流阶段混在一起 敬请注意 本产品中含有有害物质的信息 本产品中所含有害物质的详细信息如表 4 20所示 表 4 20 本产品中有害物质的名称及含量 部件名称 有害物质 铅 Pb 汞 Hg 镉 Cd 六价铬 Cr VI 多溴联苯 PBB 多溴二苯醚 PBDE 实装基板 电子元件 黄铜螺钉 铝压铸 本表格依据SJ T 11364的规定编制 表示该有害物质在该部件所有均质材料中的含量均在GB T 26572规定的限量要求以下 表示该有害物质至少在...

Page 284: ... and IEC EN 61508 It is also equipped with the safety status monitor to detect safety circuit errors When you install the drive as a component in a system you must make sure that the system complies with the applicable safety standards Refer to Table 4 22 for safety function specifications Table 4 22 Specifications for the Safety Function Item Description Input output Input 2 Safe Disable input H1...

Page 285: ...y during maintenance and installations on the drive input and output sides Failure to obey could cause death or serious injury WARNING Sudden Movement Hazard An external gravitational force in the vertical axis will move the motor although the Safe Disable function is in operation Failure to obey could cause serious injury or death WARNING Sudden Movement Hazard Remove the pre installed wire links...

Page 286: ... The Safe Torque Off status is only possible with the Safe Disable function Clear the Run command to stop the drive Turning off drive output a baseblock condition Safe Torque Off NOTICE A maximum of 3 ms will elapse from when terminals H1 or H2 shut off until the drive switches to the Safe Torque Off status Set the OFF status for terminals H1 and H2 to hold for at least 2 ms The drive may not be a...

Page 287: ... This will help verify the condition of the safety circuit Refer to the manual for the safety device for more information about the Safety function It is possible to switch polarity of the Safety monitor output signal with the MFDO function settings Refer to Table 4 23 for setting instructions Keypad Display If the two input channels are OFF Open the keypad will flash STo Safe Torque OFF If there ...

Page 288: ...4 6 Safe Disable Input 288 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710617 05F YASKAWA AC Drive GA700 Technical Manual ...

Page 289: ...YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710617 05F YASKAWA AC Drive GA700 Technical Manual 289 5 Network Communications 5 1 Safety Precautions 290 5 2 Field Bus Network Support 291 5 3 MEMOBUS Modbus Communications 292 ...

Page 290: ...Technical Manual 5 1 Safety Precautions DANGER Do not ignore the safety messages in this manual The operating company is responsible for injuries or equipment damage caused from ignoring the messages in this manual Failure to obey the safety messages will cause death or serious injury ...

Page 291: ... on the drive to support other network communications Available Communication Options Refer to Table 5 1 for the field bus networks that are compatible with the drive Contact Yaskawa or your nearest sales representative to order a communication option Table 5 1 Available Field Bus Network Type of Communications Option model CC Link SI C3 MECHATROLINK II SI T3 MECHATROLINK III SI ET3 PROFIBUS DP SI...

Page 292: ...mmunications to make sure that the master uses the correct address numbers A Master PLC B Slave drive Figure 5 1 PLC and Drive Connection Example Communication Specifications Table 5 2 lists the specifications for the MEMOBUS Modbus communications Table 5 2 MEMOBUS Modbus Specifications Item Specification Interface RS 485 Synchronization method Asynchronous start stop synchronization Communication...

Page 293: ... H5 01 Drive Node Address H5 02 Communication Speed Selection H5 03 Communication Parity Selection H5 04 Stopping Method after Com Error H5 05 Comm Fault Detection Select H5 06 Drive Transmit Wait Time H5 09 CE Detection Time H5 10 Modbus Register 0025H Unit Sel H5 11 Communications ENTER Func Select H5 12 Run Command Method Selection 5 De energize the drive and wait for the keypad display to turn...

Page 294: ...Control Select the external command that sets the frequency references and motor run stop with MEMOBUS Modbus communications Use the information in Table 5 3 to set the parameters as specified by the application Table 5 3 Required Parameter Settings for Drive Control from MEMOBUS Modbus LOCAL Control Selected No Name Setting Value External reference 1 b1 01 Frequency Reference Selection 1 2 Memobu...

Page 295: ...sage If the drive receives command type 2 or command type 3 messages in the minimum wait time it will trigger a communications error or the drive will ignore the command Figure 5 5 Minimum Wait Time to Send a Message You must set the timer in the master to measure the length of time for the slave to respond to the master If you set the timer but the slave does not send a response message in a spec...

Page 296: ...n of the command changes For a loopback test it switches to test code The communications register for the drive has a 2 byte length Data that is written to the register for the drive is usually 2 bytes Register data that is read from the drive is also 2 bytes Error Check Error check uses the CRC 16 method to detect transmission errors Use the procedure in this section to calculate CRC 16 Command D...

Page 297: ... Hex 1111 1111 1111 1111 0000 0010 1111 1111 1111 1101 0111 1111 1111 1110 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1010 0000 0000 0001 1101 1111 1111 1111 0110 1111 1111 1111 1010 0000 0000 0001 1100 1111 1111 1110 0110 0111 1111 1111 0011 0011 1111 1111 1010 0000 0000 0001 1001 0011 1111 1110 0100 1001 1111 1111 0010 0100 1111 1111 1010 0000 0000 0001 1000 0100 1111 1110 0100 0010 0111 1111 0010 0001 001...

Page 298: ...Test Writing to Multiple Holding Registers You can write the data that you set to the number of holding registers set in function code 10 hex You must configure the number of the holding registers and each 8 higher bits and 8 lower bits in order in the command message for the write data You can write to a maximum of 16 holding registers Figure 5 11 shows example messages when you use the PLC to se...

Page 299: ... more than one command register Table 5 6 uses this register data for the examples The drive for slave 1 is set for Forward run with a frequency reference of 60 00 Hz The setting in H5 25 to H5 28 and the data in the specified holding registers are as follows H5 25 0044H U1 05 Motor Speed 60 00 Hz 6000 1770H H5 26 0045H U1 06 Output Voltage Ref 200 0 V 2000 07D0H H5 27 0042H U1 03 Output Current 5...

Page 300: ...ower 43 Lower 01 CRC 16 Upper E9 13 Data Qty Upper 00 Lower 6C 14 Lower 02 15 CRC 16 Upper AC 16 Lower D0 Note The number of bytes set in the command message set the data quantity 2 during the command message The response message uses the same formula Register status bit 0 Data in register 1 selected with H5 25 1 Successfully read the register 0 Register read error bit 1 Data in register 2 selecte...

Page 301: ...rite the specified data to a maximum of 60 holding registers that uses function code 67 Hex and subfunction code 010E Hex You must give the holding register number from which to write separately Table 5 8 shows example messages when you write the frequency reference and torque limit from the drive for slave 1 Table 5 8 uses these specified holding registers data for the examples 0002H Frequency Re...

Page 302: ...the same time This process saves the parameter changes until you de energize the drive 0910 This updates the data on the RAM but does not write data to the EEPROM This process saves the parameter changes until you de energize the drive Note You can write the EEPROM to the drive a maximum of 100 000 times Do not frequently execute the Enter command 0900 Hex that is written to EEPROM The Enter comma...

Page 303: ...ssion terminal to the reception terminal on the control circuit It then transmits the data sent by the drive and makes sure that the drive can communicate correctly Use this procedure to do Self Diagnostics 1 Energize the drive 2 Set H1 06 67 Terminal S6 Function Selection Communications Test Mode 3 De energize the drive 4 Connect a jumper between control circuit terminals S6 and SN Figure 5 12 Se...

Page 304: ...e gives priority to the communications option bit 5 Multi function input 2 When the multi function input command is H1 02 41 Reverse RUN 2 Wire bit 5 is ComCtrl Note When you switch the bit ON as ComCtrl the Run Command source changes to MEMOBUS Modbus communications When you connect a communication option to the drive the Run Command source gives priority to the communications option bit 6 Multi ...

Page 305: ...alues from MEMOBUS Modbus bit 3 Torque Compensation Input 1 Enables setting values from MEMOBUS Modbus bit 4 Reserved bit 5 PID feedback from the MEMOBUS Modbus 1 Enables PID feedback 15FF Hex from MEMOBUS Modbus bit 6 B Reserved bit C Terminal S5 input of broadcast message 1 Enabled 0 Disabled bit D Terminal S6 input of broadcast message 1 Enabled 0 Disabled bit E Terminal S7 input of broadcast m...

Page 306: ...year and the day of the week in YYDW format YY the last two digits of the year from 16 to 99 decimal DW the day of the week Sunday 00 Monday 01 Tuesday 02 Wednesday 03 Thursday 04 Friday 05 Saturday 06 3006 Date Setting Setting range 0101 to 1231 decimal the default value at energize 0101 Set the month and the date in MMDD format MM 01 to 12 decimal DD 01 to 31 decimal 3007 Set the Date Informatio...

Page 307: ... Overcurrent GF Ground Fault bit 1 ov DC Bus Overvoltage bit 2 oL2 Drive Overloaded bit 3 oH1 Heatsink Overheat oH2 External Overheat H1 XX B bit 4 rH Braking Resistor Overheat rr Dynamic Braking Transistor Fault bit 5 Reserved bit 6 FbL PID Feedback Loss FbH Excessive PID Feedback bit 7 EF0 Option Card External Fault EF1 to EF8 External Fault bit 8 CPFxx Hardware Fault Note Includes oFx bit 9 oL1...

Page 308: ...ite to RAM Only bit 7 F Reserved 0023 U1 01 Frequency Reference Note o1 03 Frequency Display Unit Selection sets the units 0024 U1 02 Output Frequency Note o1 03 Frequency Display Unit Selection sets the units 0025 U1 06 Output Voltage Ref units 0 1 V Note Use H5 10 Modbus Register 0025H Unit Sel to change the setting unit 0026 U1 03 Output Current units 0 1 A 0027 U1 08 Output Power 0028 U1 09 To...

Page 309: ...Modbus Communication Error bit A bUS Option Communication Error bit B UL3 UL4 Undertorque Detection 1 2 bit C oH3 Motor Overheat PTC Input bit D FbL PID Feedback Loss FbH Excessive PID Feedback bit E Reserved bit F CALL Serial Comm Transmission Error 002B U1 10 Input Terminal Status bit 0 1 Control circuit terminal S1 ON bit 1 1 Control circuit terminal S2 ON bit 2 1 Control circuit terminal S3 ON...

Page 310: ...seblock bit 9 Frequency reference mode 1 No communication option 0 Communication option bit A Run command mode 1 No communication option 0 Communication option bit B During overtorque undertorque 1 2 detection bit C Frequency reference loss 1 Loss bit D Restart Enabled 1 Restart Enabled bit E Faults 1 Fault generated bit F MEMOBUS Modbus communications timeout 1 At Timeout 002D U1 11 Output Termin...

Page 311: ...4 E5 04 E9 08 Motor Pole Count 003F 0 01 units 0040 004A Used with U1 xx Operation Status Monitors Refer to the U Monitor for parameter details 004B U1 12 Drive Status bit 0 1 During run bit 1 1 During zero speed bit 2 1 During reverse bit 3 1 During reset signal input bit 4 1 During speed agreement bit 5 1 Drive operation ready bit 6 1 Minor Fault bit 7 1 Fault bit 8 1 oPExx Operation Error gener...

Page 312: ...Option codes connected to CN5 A The drive stores option codes in the register AI A3 0003 Hex AO A3 0004 Hex DI A3 0001 Hex DO A3 0002 Hex PG B3 0011 Hex PG F3 0021 Hex PG RT3 0023 Hex PG X3 0012 Hex SI C3 5343 Hex SI EM3 1005 Hex SI EN3 1006 Hex SI ET3 1004 Hex SI N3 534E Hex SI P3 5350 Hex SI S3 5353 Hex SI T3 5354 Hex SI W3 1003 Hex 00B1 Reserved 00B2 Option codes connected to CN5 B 00B3 Option ...

Page 313: ...oL2 Drive Overloaded bit C oL3 Overtorque Detection 1 bit D oL4 Overtorque Detection 2 bit E rr Dynamic Braking Transistor bit F rH Braking Resistor Overheat 00C1 Fault Description 4 bit 0 EF3 External Fault Terminal S3 bit 1 EF4 External Fault Terminal S4 bit 2 EF5 External Fault Terminal S5 bit 3 EF6 External Fault Terminal S6 bit 4 EF7 External Fault Terminal S7 bit 5 EF8 External Fault Termina...

Page 314: ...Pulse Fault bit 2 dv2 Z Pulse Noise Fault Detection bit 3 dv3 Inversion Detection bit 4 dv4 Inversion Prevention Detection bit 5 LF2 Output Current Imbalance bit 6 STPo Motor Step Out Detected bit 7 PGoH Encoder PG Hardware Fault bit 8 E5 MECHATROLINK Watchdog Timer Err bit 9 Reserved bit A SEr Speed Search Retries Exceeded bit B F Reserved 00C4 Fault Description 7 bit 0 FbH Excessive PID Feedback...

Page 315: ...0 Uv4 Gate Drive Board Power Supply Voltage Low bit 1 F Reserved 00C7 Reserved 00C8 Minor Fault Description 2 bit 0 Uv Undervoltage bit 1 ov DC Bus Overvoltage bit 2 oH Heatsink Overheat bit 3 Drive Overheat Alarm oH2 bit 4 oL3 Overtorque 1 bit 5 oL4 Overtorque 2 bit 6 EF FWD REV Run Command Input Error bit 7 bb Baseblock bit 8 EF3 External Fault Terminal S3 bit 9 EF4 External Fault Terminal S4 bi...

Page 316: ...dertorque Detection 2 bit F SE Modbus Test Mode Error 00CA Minor Fault Description 4 bit 0 Reserved bit 1 oH3 Motor Overheat PTC Input bit 2 5 Reserved bit 6 FbL PID Feedback Loss bit 7 FbH Excessive PID Feedback bit 8 Reserved bit 9 dnE Drive Disabled bit A PGoH Encoder PG Hardware Fault bit B F Reserved 00CB Minor Fault Description 5 bit 0 E5 MECHATROLINK Watchdog Timer Err bit 1 AEr Station Add...

Page 317: ...Data Error bit 7 CPF07 Terminal Board Connection Error bit 8 CPF08 Terminal Board Connection Error bit 9 Reserved bit A CPF10 ASIC Verify Fault bit B CPF11 RAM Fault bit C CPF12 FLASH Memory Fault bit D CPF13 Watchdog Circuit Exception bit E CPF14 Control Circuit Fault bit F Reserved 00D1 CPF Contents 2 bit 0 CPF16 Clock Fault bit 1 CPF17 Timing Fault bit 2 CPF18 Control Circuit Fault bit 3 CPF19 ...

Page 318: ...ry Data Error bit B CPF43 EEPROM Memory Data Error bit C CPF44 EEPROM Memory Data Error bit D CPF45 EEPROM Memory Data Error bit E F Reserved 00D3 00D7 Reserved 00D8 oFA0x Description CN5 A bit 0 oFA00 Option Not Compatible with Port bit 1 oFA01 Option Fault Connection Error bit 2 4 Reserved bit 5 oFA05 Option A D Error bit 6 oFA06 Option Communication Error bit 7 F Reserved 00D9 oFA1x Description...

Page 319: ...lResSel 1Err bit B oFA41 Drive Receive Time Over 4 bit C oFA42 CtrlResSel 2Err bit D oFA43 Drive Receive Time Over 5 bit E F Reserved 00DC oFb0x Description CN5 B bit 0 oFb00 Option Not Compatible with Port bit 1 oFb01 Option Fault Connection Error bit 2 oFb02 Duplicate Options bit 3 4 Reserved bit 5 oFb05 Option A D Error bit 6 oFb06 Option Communication Error bit 7 F Reserved 00DD oFb1x Descript...

Page 320: ...E1 oFC0x Description CN5 C bit 0 oFC00 Option Not Compatible with Port bit 1 oFC01 Option Fault Connection Error bit 2 oFC02 Duplicate Options bit 3 4 Reserved bit 5 oFC05 Option A D Error bit 6 oFC06 Option Communication Error bit 7 F Reserved 00E2 oFC1x Description CN5 C bit 0 oFC10 Option RAM Error bit 1 oFC11 Option Ope Mode Error bit 2 oFC12 Drive Receive CRC Error bit 3 oFC13 Drive Receive F...

Page 321: ...9 Reserved 00EA Fault Description 11 bit 0 TiM Keypad Time Not Set bit 1 bAT Keypad Battery Low Voltage bit 2 D Reserved bit E SCF Safety Circuit Fault bit F Reserved 00EB 00ED Reserved 00EE Fault Description 12 bit 0 2 Reserved bit 3 CP1 Comparator 1 Limit Error bit 4 CP2 Comparator 2 Limit Error bit 5 bCE Bluetooth Communication Error bit 6 F Reserved 00EF 00FA Reserved 00FB Output current Note ...

Page 322: ...rent 0008 ov Overvoltage 0009 oH Heatsink Overheat 000A oH1 Heatsink Overheat 000B oL1 Motor Overload 000C oL2 Drive Overload 000D oL3 Overtorque Detection 1 000E oL4 Overtorque Detection 2 000F rr Dynamic Braking Transistor Fault 0010 rH Braking Resistor Overheat 0011 EF3 External Fault Terminal S3 0012 EF4 External Fault Terminal S4 0013 EF5 External Fault Terminal S5 0014 EF6 External Fault Ter...

Page 323: ...it Fault 0091 CPF16 Clock Fault 0092 CPF17 Timing Fault 0093 CPF18 Control Circuit Fault 0094 CPF19 Control Circuit Fault 0095 CPF20 Control Circuit Error 0096 CPF21 Control Circuit Error 0097 CPF22 Hybrid IC Error Fault Code Hex Name 0098 CPF23 Control Board Connection Error 0099 CPF24 Drive Unit Signal Fault 009A CPF25 Terminal Board not Connected 009B CPF26 BB Circuit Error 009C CPF27 PWM Set R...

Page 324: ...23D oFb42 Control Response Selection 2 Error 023E oFb43 Drive Timeout Waiting for Response 0301 oFC00 Option Not Compatible with Port 0302 oFC01 Option Fault Connection Error 0303 oFC02 Duplicate Options 0306 oFC05 Option A D Error 0307 oFC06 Option Communication Error 0311 oFC10 Option RAM Error 0312 oFC11 Option Ope Mode Error 0313 oFC12 Drive Receive CRC Error 0314 oFC13 Drive Receive Frame Err...

Page 325: ...l Weakening Detection 1 003E UL5 Mechanical Weakening Detection 2 0042 TrPC IGBT Maintenance Time 90 0043 LT 3 SoftChargeBypassRelay MainteTime 0044 LT 4 IGBT Maintenance Time 50 0045 boL Braking Transistor Overload 0049 dWAL DriveWorksEZ Alarm 004A dWA2 DriveWorksEZ Alarm 2 004B dWA3 DriveWorksEZ Alarm 3 0081 EP24v External Power 24V Supply 0085 bAT Keypad Battery Low Voltage 0087 CP1 Comparator ...

Page 326: ...S Modbus communications When this error occurs the keypad shows a message and the drive continues operation No Response from Slave The slave ignores the command message from the master and will not send a response message in these conditions When a communications error overrun framing parity CRC 16 is detected in the command message When the slave address in the command message and the slave addre...

Page 327: ... Minor Faults Alarms and Errors 330 6 3 List of Fault Minor Fault Alarm and Error Codes 331 6 4 Faults 337 6 5 Minor Faults Alarms 361 6 6 Parameter Setting Errors 374 6 7 Auto Tuning Errors 381 6 8 Backup Function Operating Mode Display and Errors 386 6 9 Diagnosing and Resetting Faults 388 6 10 Troubleshooting Without Fault Display 389 ...

Page 328: ...is not known Failure to obey can cause death or serious injury and damage to the drive Only let authorized persons install wire maintain examine replace parts and repair the drive Failure to obey can cause death or serious injury Do not work on the drive or around the drive while wearing loose clothing or jewelry Tighten loose clothing and remove all metal objects such as watches or rings Failure ...

Page 329: ...rrect electrostatic discharge ESD procedures when touching the drive and circuit boards Failure to obey can cause ESD damage to the drive circuitry Do not connect or disconnect the motor from the drive while the drive is supplying voltage Incorrect equipment sequencing can cause damage to the drive Do not use unshielded wire for control wiring Use shielded twisted pair wires and ground the shield ...

Page 330: ...ws the alarm code and and ALM ERR on the LED Status Ring flash The drive will continue to operate the motor Some alarms let the user select a motor stopping method If the drive detects a minor fault the terminal set to H2 01 to H2 03 10 MFDO Function Select Alarm will switch ON If you do not set parameters H2 01 to H2 03 the drive will not trigger MFDO terminals when it detects a minor fault The d...

Page 331: ...ing Alarm 361 boL 004F BrakingTransistor Overload Fault Illuminated Fault 337 bUS 0015 Option Communication Error Flashing Alarm 361 bUS 0022 Option Communication Error Illuminated Fault 337 CALL 001D Serial Comm Transmission Error Flashing Alarm 362 CE 0014 Modbus Communication Error Flashing Alarm 362 CE 0021 Modbus Communication Error Illuminated Fault 338 CF 0025 Control Fault Illuminated Faul...

Page 332: ...External Fault Flashing Alarm 364 EF0 0027 Option Card External Fault Illuminated Fault 342 EF1 0042 External Fault Terminal S1 Illuminated Fault 342 EF1 0039 External Fault Terminal S1 Flashing Alarm 364 EF2 003A External Fault Terminal S2 Flashing Alarm 365 EF2 0043 External Fault Terminal S2 Illuminated Fault 342 EF3 0009 External Fault Terminal S3 Flashing Alarm 365 EF3 0011 External Fault Ter...

Page 333: ... Back EMF Error Flashing Auto Tuning Errors 384 Er 19 PM Inductance Error Flashing Auto Tuning Errors 385 Er 20 Stator Resistance Error Flashing Auto Tuning Errors 385 Er 21 Z Pulse Correction Error Flashing Auto Tuning Errors 385 Er 25 HighFreq Inject Param Tuning Err Flashing Auto Tuning Errors 385 Err 001F EEPROM Write Error Illuminated Fault 344 FAn 000F Internal Fan Fault Flashing Alarm 366 F...

Page 334: ...ith Port Illuminated Fault 350 oFC01 0302 Option Fault Connection Error Illuminated Fault 350 oFC02 0303 Duplicate Options Illuminated Fault 350 oFC03 to oFC11 0304 to 0312 Option Card Error Occurred at Option Port CN5 C Illuminated Fault 350 oFC12 to oFC17 0313 to 0318 Option Card Connection Error CN5 C Illuminated Fault 350 oFC50 to oFC55 0351 to 0356 Option Card Error Occurred at Option Port CN...

Page 335: ...ted Fault 354 oS 0010 Overspeed Flashing Alarm 370 oS 0018 Overspeed Illuminated Fault 354 ov 0002 DC Bus Overvoltage Flashing Alarm 370 ov 0008 Overvoltage Illuminated Fault 355 PASS Modbus Communication Test Flashing Not an alarm 371 PF 0047 Input Phase Loss Flashing Alarm 371 PF 001B Input Phase Loss Illuminated Fault 356 PGo 0012 Encoder PG Feedback Loss Flashing Alarm 371 PGo 001A Encoder PG ...

Page 336: ...orque Detection 2 Illuminated Fault 359 UL5 003E Mechanical Weakening Detection 2 Flashing Alarm 373 UL5 0045 Mechanical Weakening Detection 2 Illuminated Fault 359 Uv 0001 Undervoltage Flashing Alarm 373 Uv1 0002 DC Bus Undervoltage Illuminated Fault 359 Uv2 0003 Control Power Undervoltage Illuminated Fault 360 Uv3 0004 Soft Charge Answerback Fault Illuminated Fault 360 vAEr Voltage Class Capacit...

Page 337: ...akingTransistor Overload Fault The duty cycle of the braking transistor is high the regeneration power or repetition frequency is high Install a braking unit CDBR series Install a regenerative converter Increase the deceleration time You enabled the protective function for the braking transistor when you have a regenerative converter Set L8 55 0 Internal DB TransistorProtection Disable The braking...

Page 338: ... the power supply for communication Decrease the effects of electrical interference from the controller Note The drive detects this error if it does not correctly receive control data for the CE detection time set to H5 09 CE Detection Time Do a Fault Reset to clear the fault If the drive detects this error the drive will operate the motor as specified by the stopping method set in H5 04 Communica...

Page 339: ...CP2 Comparator 2 Limit Fault The monitor value set in H2 26 Comparator 2 Monitor Selection was outside the range of H2 27 Comparator 2 Lower Limit and H2 28 Comparator 2 Upper Limit Examine the monitor value and remove the cause of the fault Note The drive detects this error when the terminal is assigned to H2 01 to H2 03 67 MFDO Function Select Comparator2 Do a Fault Reset to clear the fault Set ...

Page 340: ...stays replace the control board or the drive For information about replacing the control board contact Yaskawa or your nearest sales representative Note The drive detects this error if it does not detect a Z pulse during one motor rotation Do a Fault Reset to clear the fault Code Name Causes Possible Solutions dv2 Z Pulse Noise Fault Detection Noise interference along the encoder cable Isolate the...

Page 341: ...interference along the encoder cable Correctly ground the shielded wire of the encoder cable The encoder cable is disconnected or incorrectly wired Examine for wiring errors or disconnected wires in the encoder cable and repair problems The PG option card or the encoder on the motor side is damaged Repair the wiring and re energize the drive then replace the PG option card or the encoder if the pr...

Page 342: ... If the drive detects this fault it will operate the motor as specified by the stop method set in F6 25 MECHATROLINK Watchdog Error Sel Code Name Causes Possible Solutions EF0 Option Card External Fault The communication option card received an external fault from the controller 1 Find the device that caused the external fault and remove the cause 2 Clear the external fault input from the controll...

Page 343: ...minal is not in use Correctly set the MFDI Note Do a Fault Reset to clear the fault Code Name Causes Possible Solutions EF5 External Fault Terminal S5 MFDI terminal S5 caused an external fault through an external device 1 Find the device that caused the external fault and remove the cause 2 Clear the external fault input in the MFDI The wiring is incorrect Correctly connect the signal line to MFDI...

Page 344: ... Code Name Causes Possible Solutions FAn Internal Fan Fault The circulation fan stopped operating correctly Examine circulation fan operation Re energize the drive Check U4 03 Cooling Fan Ope Time and U4 04 Cool Fan Maintenance If the performance life of the circulation fan is expired or if there is damage to the fan replace the fan There is a problem with the power supply of the electromagnetic c...

Page 345: ...or the motor insulation is not satisfactory Measure the motor insulation resistance and replace the motor if there is electrical conduction or unserviceable insulation The motor main circuit cable is contacting ground to make a short circuit Examine the motor main circuit cable for damage and repair short circuits Measure the resistance between the motor main circuit cable and the ground terminal ...

Page 346: ...urrent from the PM motor Do a Fault Reset to clear the fault Code Name Causes Possible Solutions LSo Low Speed Motor Step Out The motor code set incorrectly Set E5 01 PM Motor Code Selection correctly as specified by the motor For specialized motors refer to the motor test report and set E5 xx correctly The load is too heavy Decrease the load Replace the drive and motor with larger capacity models...

Page 347: ...rque Replace the drive with a larger capacity model The drive is trying to operate a specialized motor or a motor that is larger than the maximum applicable motor output of the drive Examine the motor nameplate the motor and the drive to make sure that the drive rated current is larger than the motor rated current Replace the drive with a larger capacity model A magnetic contactor was switched at ...

Page 348: ... is not available for this fault Code Name Causes Possible Solutions oFA01 Option Fault Connection Error The option card connected to connector CN5 A is not compatible 1 De energize the drive 2 Refer to the option card manual and correctly connect the option card to the connector on the drive Note Do a Fault Reset to clear the fault Code Name Causes Possible Solutions oFA02 Duplicate Options The s...

Page 349: ...ult Reset to clear the fault Fault trace is not available for this fault Code Name Causes Possible Solutions oFb01 Option Fault Connection Error The option card connected to connector CN5 B was changed during operation 1 De energize the drive 2 Refer to the option card manual and correctly connect the option card to the connector on the drive Note Do a Fault Reset to clear the fault Code Name Caus...

Page 350: ...lt occurred in the option card 1 De energize the drive 2 Make sure that the option card is correctly connected to the connector 3 If the problem continues replace the option card Note Do a Fault Reset to clear the fault Code Name Causes Possible Solutions oFC12 to oFC17 Option Card Error Occurred at Option Port CN5 C A fault occurred in the option card 1 De energize the drive 2 Make sure that the ...

Page 351: ...detection level Do a Fault Reset to clear the fault L5 08 Fault Reset Enable Select Grp2 disables the Auto Restart function Code Name Causes Possible Solutions oH3 Motor Overheat PTC Input The thermistor wiring that detects motor temperature is defective Correct any wiring errors A fault occurred on the machine side Example The machine is locked Examine the machine and remove the cause of the faul...

Page 352: ... the value set in C1 01 to C1 08 Acceleration Deceleration Times Overload occurred while running at low speed Lower the load when running at low speed Increase the motor speed If the motor is run frequently at low speeds replace the motor with a larger motor or use a drive dedicated motor Note For general purpose motors overload can occur while running at low speed when operating at below the rate...

Page 353: ...The V f pattern does not fit the motor qualities Examine the ratios between the V f pattern frequency and voltage Lower the voltage if it is too high compared to the frequency Adjust E1 04 to E1 10 V f Pattern Parameters Lower the values set in E1 08 Mid Point A Voltage and E1 10 Minimum Output Voltage For motor 2 adjust E3 04 to E3 10 Note If E1 08 and E1 10 are set too low the overload tolerance...

Page 354: ...ion diagnostic test on the machine side Note Do a Fault Reset to clear the fault If the drive detects this fault it will operate the motor as specified by the Stopping Method set in L6 08 Code Name Causes Possible Solutions oL7 High Slip Braking Overload The load inertia is too large An external force on the load side rotated the motor Something is preventing deceleration on the load side Decrease...

Page 355: ...ble or motor is shorted to ground the current short to ground is charging the main circuit capacitor of the drive through the power supply 1 Examine the motor main circuit cable terminals and motor terminal box and then remove ground faults 2 Re energize the drive The speed search related parameters are set incorrectly this fault also occurs during recovery from momentary power loss and after Auto...

Page 356: ... Protection Sel Disabled The main circuit capacitors have become unserviceable Examine the capacitor maintenance time in monitor U4 05 CapacitorMaintenance If U4 05 is more than 90 replace the control board or the drive For information about replacing the control board contact Yaskawa or your nearest sales representative If drive input power is correct and the fault stays replace the control board...

Page 357: ...OT the surface temperature If the duty cycle is higher than the braking resistor rating the drive will show the alarm Do a Fault Reset to clear the fault L8 01 enables fault detection Code Name Causes Possible Solutions rr Dynamic Braking Transistor Fault The drive control circuit is damaged There is a malfunction in the internal braking transistor of the drive Re energize the drive If the fault s...

Page 358: ...load is too heavy Increase the value set in n8 55 Motor to Load Inertia Ratio Increase the value set in n8 51 Pull in Current Acceleration If the drive detects STPo during deceleration when increasing the value set in n8 51 set the value of n8 79 Pull in Current Deceleration lower than n8 51 Decrease the load Replace the drive and motor with larger capacity models The load inertia is too heavy Inc...

Page 359: ... if the drive output current is less than the level set in L6 05 for longer than L6 06 Do a Fault Reset to clear the fault If the drive detects this error it will operate the motor as specified by the Stopping Method set in L6 04 Torque Detection Selection 2 Code Name Causes Possible Solutions UL5 Mechanical Weakening Detection 2 The drive detected undertorque as specified by the conditions for me...

Page 360: ...ble Solutions Uv2 Control Power Undervoltage The value set in L2 02 Power Loss Ride Through Time increased and the momentary power loss recovery unit is not connected to the drive Connect the momentary power loss recovery unit to the drive There was a problem with the drive hardware Re energize the drive If the fault stays replace the control board or the drive For information about replacing the ...

Page 361: ...ication Error The smart device with DriveWizard Mobile is too far from the keypad Use the smart device within 10 m 32 8 ft from the keypad Note bCE can occur when the smart device is 10 m or nearer to the keypad depending on the specifications of the smart device Radio waves from a different device are causing interference with communications between the smart device and keypad Make sure that no d...

Page 362: ...and connect cables Replace the defective communications cable There was a programming error on the controller side Examine communications at start up and correct programming errors The communications circuitry is damaged Do a self diagnostics check If the problem continues replace the control board or the drive For information about replacing the control board contact Yaskawa or your nearest sales...

Page 363: ... 27 Comparator 2 Lower Limit and H2 28 Comparator 2 Upper Limit Examine the monitor value and remove the cause of the error Note The drive detects this error when the terminal is assigned to H2 01 to H2 03 67 MFDO Function Select Comparator2 If the drive detects this error the terminal assigned to H2 01 to H2 03 10 MFDO Function Select Alarm will be ON H2 35 Comparator2 Protection Selection enable...

Page 364: ...se manuals MECHATROLINK II Installation Guide MECHATROLINK Members Association manual number MMATDEP011 MECHATROLINK III Installation Manual MECHATROLINK Members Association publication number MMATDEP018 Note If the drive detects this error the terminal assigned to H2 01 to H2 03 10 MFDO Function Select Alarm will be ON If the drive detects this error it will operate the motor as specified by the ...

Page 365: ...t the MFDI Note If the drive detects this error the terminal assigned to H2 01 to H2 03 10 MFDO Function Select Alarm will be ON Code Name Causes Possible Solutions EF4 External Fault Terminal S4 MFDI terminal S4 caused an external fault through an external device 1 Find the device that caused the external fault and remove the cause 2 Clear the external fault input in the MFDI The wiring is incorr...

Page 366: ...e terminal assigned to H2 01 to H2 03 10 MFDO Function Select Alarm will be ON Code Name Causes Possible Solutions EP24v External Power 24V Supply The voltage of the main circuit power supply decreased and the 24 V power supply is supplying power to the drive Examine the main circuit power supply Turn ON the main circuit power supply to run the drive Note Set o2 26 Ext Power 24V Supply Display to ...

Page 367: ...ease the load for applications with repetitive starts and stops Replace the drive with a larger capacity model The acceleration time is too short Calculate the torque necessary during acceleration related to the load inertia and the specified acceleration time Increase the values set in C1 01 C1 03 C1 05 or C1 07 Acceleration Times until you get the necessary torque Increase the values set in C2 0...

Page 368: ...ve Note When the estimated performance life is expired the terminal assigned to H2 01 to H2 03 2F MFDO Function Select Maintenance Notification will be ON Code Name Causes Possible Solutions LT 3 SoftChargeBypassRelay MainteTime The soft charge bypass relay is at 90 of its expected performance life Replace the control board or the drive For information about replacing the control board contact Yas...

Page 369: ...d Increase the values set in C1 01 to C1 08 Acceleration Deceleration Time Set E2 01 Motor Rated Current FLA correctly to the value specified by the motor nameplate Make sure that the motor cooling system is operating correctly and repair or replace it if it is damaged Adjust E1 04 to E1 10 V f Pattern Parameters For motor 2 adjust E3 04 to E3 10 Decrease the values set in E1 08 Mid Point A Voltag...

Page 370: ...verspeed Detection Level and F1 09 Overspeed Detection Delay Time Note The drive detects this error if the motor speed is more than the value set in F1 08 for longer than F1 09 If the drive detects this error the terminal assigned to H2 01 to H2 03 10 MFDO Function Select Alarm will be ON If the drive detects this error it will operate the motor as specified by the Stopping Method set in F1 03 Ove...

Page 371: ...e PF detection Code Name Causes Possible Solutions PGo Encoder PG Feedback Loss The encoder cable is disconnected or wired incorrectly Examine for wiring errors or disconnected wires in the encoder cable and repair problems The encoder is not receiving power Examine the encoder power supply The holding brake is stopping the motor Release the holding brake Note The drive detects this error if it do...

Page 372: ...n If the drive detects this error the terminal assigned to H2 01 to H2 03 10 MFDO Function Select Alarm will be ON Code Name Causes Possible Solutions TrPC IGBT Maintenance Time 90 The IGBT is at 90 of its expected performance life Replace the IGBT or the drive For information about replacing the control board contact Yaskawa or your nearest sales representative Note If the drive detects this erro...

Page 373: ...oss of power Use a better power supply The main circuit capacitors have become unserviceable Examine the capacitor maintenance time in monitor U4 05 CapacitorMaintenance If U4 05 is more than 90 replace the control board or the drive For information about replacing the control board contact Yaskawa or your nearest sales representative The drive input power transformer is too small and voltage drop...

Page 374: ... occurs at the same time other oPExx errors have priority over oPE02 Set E2 01 E2 03 Motor Rated Current FLA Motor No Load Current Make sure that E2 01 E2 03 Note If it is necessary to set E2 01 E2 03 first lower the value set in E2 03 and then set E2 01 Code Name Causes Possible Solutions oPE03 Multi Function Input Setting Err The settings for these parameters do not agree H1 01 to H1 08 Terminal...

Page 375: ...7A 7B KEB Ride Thru 1 or 2 Activate and 68 High Slip Braking HSB Activate Setting values 16 Motor 2 Selection and 1A Accel Decel Time Selection 2 Setting values 65 66 KEB Ride Thru 1 Activate and 7A 7B KEB Ride Thru 2 Activate Setting values 40 41 Forward RUN 2 Wire Reverse RUN 2 Wire and 42 43 Run Command 2 Wire Sequence 2 FWD REV 2 Wire Sequence 2 Setting values 60 DC Injection Braking Command a...

Page 376: ... parameter correctly Note The Motor Switch function is not available with the PG RT3 option Code Name Causes Possible Solutions oPE05 Run Cmd Freq Ref Source Sel Err The setting to assign the Run command or frequency reference to an option card or the pulse train input is incorrect Correct the parameter settings b1 01 3 Frequency Reference Selection 1 Option PCB is set but there is no option card ...

Page 377: ...t Value The following parameters are set at the same time H3 02 H3 06 H3 10 H7 30 C b5 18 1 b5 19 PID Setpoint Selection Enabled The following parameters are set at the same time H6 01 2 b5 18 1 Remove the function settings that are not in use Code Name Causes Possible Solutions oPE08 Parameter Selection Error A function was set that is not compatible with the control method selected in A1 02 Cont...

Page 378: ...wer Limit 0 0 Correct the parameter settings The following parameters are set at the same time b5 01 1 2 Standard Standard D on feedback b5 11 1 PID Output Reverse Selection Negative Output Accepted Correct the parameter settings The following parameters are set at the same time b5 01 3 4 Fref PID Trim D Fdbk Fref PID Trim D on feedback d2 02 0 0 Correct the parameter settings Note The drive detec...

Page 379: ...ime that torque control is selected d5 01 1 or H1 xx 71 b7 01 0 0 Droop Control Gain 0 0 or n5 01 1 Feed Forward Control Selection Enabled Correct the parameter settings KEB Ride Thru 2 N O N C is enabled at the same time that torque control is selected d5 01 1 or H1 xx 71 H1 xx 7A KEB Ride Thru 2 Activate N C or H1 xx 7B KEB Ride Thru 2 Activate N O Correct the parameter settings Optimal decelera...

Page 380: ...e set at the same time H2 60 F Term M1 M2 Secondary Function Not Used H2 01 1xx Term M1 M2 Function Selection Inverse output of xx These two parameters are set at the same time H2 63 F Term M3 M4 Secondary Function Not Used H2 02 1xx Term M3 M4 Function Selection Inverse output of xx These two parameters are set at the same time H2 66 F Term M5 M6 Secondary Function Not Used H2 03 1xx Term M5 M6 F...

Page 381: ... set the motor nameplate data Auto Tuning results were not in the applicable parameter setting range and E2 07 or E2 08 Motor Saturation Coefficient 2 have temporary values Examine and repair damaged motor wiring If you can uncouple the motor and load remove the motor from the machine and do Rotational Auto Tuning again Code Name Causes Possible Solutions End3 Rated Current Setting Alarm The rated...

Page 382: ...se Speed do not match Do Auto Tuning again and correctly set the Motor Base Frequency and Motor Base Speed Code Name Causes Possible Solutions Er 02 Drive in an Alarm State The motor nameplate data entered during Auto Tuning is incorrect Make sure that the input motor nameplate data is correct Do Auto Tuning again and correctly set the motor nameplate data There is a defective motor cable or cable...

Page 383: ...ry Rotational Auto Tuning was done with a load that was more than 30 of the rating connected to the motor Disconnect the machine from the motor and do Rotational Auto Tuning again If you cannot uncouple the motor and load make sure that the load is less than 30 of the motor rating If a mechanical brake is installed in the motor release the brake during Rotational Auto Tuning Code Name Causes Possi...

Page 384: ... motor speed was more than two times the amplitude of speed reference during Inertia Tuning Decrease the value set in C5 01 ASR Proportional Gain 1 Code Name Causes Possible Solutions Er 15 Torque Saturation Error During Inertia Tuning the output torque was more than the value set in L7 01 to L7 04 Torque Limit Increase the value set in L7 01 to L7 04 Torque Limit as much as possible Decrease the ...

Page 385: ...orrectly 1 Repair motor and encoder wiring errors 2 Do Z Pulse Offset Tuning again Auto Tuning was performed when the motor was coasting 1 Make sure that the motor has stopped completely 2 Do Z Pulse Offset Tuning again The setting for the direction of the encoder motor rotation is incorrect 1 Set the direction of motor rotation of the encoder in F1 05 PG 1 Rotation Selection correctly 2 Do Z Puls...

Page 386: ...the error The table in this section show the error codes Refer to these tables to remove the cause of the errors Note Push any key on the keypad to clear an error Code Name Causes Possible Solutions CPEr Control Mode Mismatch The keypad setting and drive setting for A1 02 Control Method Selection do not match 1 Set A1 02 on the drive to the same value that is on the keypad 2 Restore the parameters...

Page 387: ...e Causes Possible Solutions vAEr Voltage Class Capacity Mismatch The power supply specifications or drive capacity parameter settings are different between the keypad and the drive 1 Make sure that drive model and the value set in o2 04 Drive Model KVA Selection are the same 2 Restore the parameters Code Name Causes Possible Solutions vFyE Parameters do not Match The parameters that are backed up ...

Page 388: ...nformation in the Troubleshooting tables to remove the fault Note 1 To find the faults that were triggered check the fault history in U2 02 Previous Fault To find information about drive status such as frequency current and voltage when the faults were triggered check U2 03 to U2 20 2 If the fault display stays after you re energize the drive remove the cause of the fault and reset Fault Occurs Wi...

Page 389: ...ion A1 02 Control Method Selection A1 03 Initialize Parameters A1 06 Application Preset A1 07 DriveWorksEZ Function Selection A2 01 to A2 32 User Parameter 1 to User Parameter 32 The drive detected Uv Undervoltage View U1 07 DC Bus Voltage to see the power supply voltage Examine the main circuit wiring The Motor Does Not Rotate After Entering Run Command Causes Possible Solutions The drive is not ...

Page 390: ... and A3 are applicable was pushed Turn the Run command OFF then ON from an external input Note When you push during operation the drive will ramp to stop Set o2 02 0 STOP Key Function Selection Disabled to disable the function The 2 wire sequence and 3 wire sequence are set incorrectly Set one of the parameters H1 03 to H1 08 Terminals S3 to S8 Function Select to 0 3 Wire Sequence to enable the 3 ...

Page 391: ...refully before setting drive parameters The motor is running continuously at a very low speed Change the run speed Use a drive dedicated motor The drive is operating in a vector control mode but Auto Tuning has not been done Do Auto Tuning Calculate motor parameter and set motor parameters Set A1 02 0 Control Method Selection V f Control The voltage insulation between motor phases is not sufficien...

Page 392: ... Examine the low gain level set in H3 03 H3 11 H3 07 Terminal A1 A2 A3 Gain Setting if you use MFAI The frequency reference is set incorrectly When H3 02 H3 10 H3 06 1 MFAI Function Select Frequency Gain are set see if voltage current has been set Check the values set in H3 02 H3 10 and H3 06 Use U1 13 to U1 15 Terminal A1 A2 A3 Input Voltage to make sure that the analog input values set to termin...

Page 393: ...the maximum output frequency set in E1 04 Maximum Output Frequency while PID control is active The Motor Speed Is Not Stable When Using a PM Motor Causes Possible Solutions E5 01 PM Motor Code Selection is set incorrectly Refer to Motor Performance Fine Tuning in the technical manual The drive is operating the motor at more than the specified speed control range Examine the speed control range and...

Page 394: ...as been set examine the settings for the MFAIs Examine the values set in H3 02 H3 10 and H3 06 Use U1 13 to U1 15 Terminal A1 A2 A3 Input Voltage to make sure that the analog input values set to terminals A1 A2 and A3 are applicable The load is more than the internal torque limit as specified by the drive rated current Replace the drive with a larger capacity model The Load Falls When a Brake Is A...

Page 395: ...quency reference is assigned to an external source and there is electrical interference in the signal Make sure that electrical interference does not have an effect on the signal lines Isolate control circuit wiring from main circuit wiring Use twisted pair cables or shielded wiring for the control circuit Increase the value of H3 13 Analog Input FilterTime Constant The cable between the drive and...

Page 396: ... 04 d2 01 100 A large load triggered Stall Prevention function during acceleration Decrease the load Adjust L3 02 Stall Prevent Level during Accel L3 01 3 Stall Prevent Select duringAccel ILim Mode has been set 1 Check whether the V f pattern and motor parameter settings are appropriate and set them correctly 2 If this does not solve the problem and it is not necessary to limit the current level o...

Page 397: ...ives information about how to examine and maintain drives in use how to replace cooling fans and other parts and how to store drives 7 1 Section Safety 398 7 2 Inspection 400 7 3 Maintenance 403 7 4 Replace a Cooling Fan and Circulation Fan 405 7 5 Replace the Drive 431 7 6 Replace the Keypad Battery 437 7 7 Storage Guidelines 438 ...

Page 398: ...show the inside of the drive Replace covers and shields before operation Use drives only as specified by the instructions Failure to obey can cause death or serious injury Always ground the motor side grounding terminal Contacting the motor case can cause death or serious injury from incorrect equipment grounding Only let authorized persons install wire maintain examine replace parts and repair th...

Page 399: ...the product made by the user Make sure that all connections are correct after you install the drive and connecting peripheral devices Failure to obey can cause damage to the drive Comply with proper wiring practices Connect motor input terminals U V and W to drive output terminals U T1 V T2 and W T3 The phase order for the drive and motor should match The motor may run in reverse if the phase orde...

Page 400: ...fail Make a copy of this checklist and put a check mark in the Checked column after each inspection Table 7 1 Daily Inspection Checklist Inspection Area Inspection Points Corrective Action Checked Motor Examine for unusual oscillation or noise coming from the motor Check the load coupling Measure motor vibration Tighten all loose components Cooling System Examine for unusual heat from the drive or...

Page 401: ...omponents Conductors and Wiring Examine wiring and connections for discoloration or damage Examine wiring and connections for discoloration from too much heat Examine wire insulation and shielding for discoloration and wear Repair or replace damaged wiring Terminal Block Examine terminals for stripped damaged or loose connections Tighten loose screws Replace damaged screws or terminals Note On dri...

Page 402: ...o not use solvents to clean the board The drive does not have many serviceable parts and it could be necessary to replace the drive Table 7 5 Cooling System Periodic Inspection Checklist Inspection Area Inspection Points Corrective Action Checked Cooling Fans Check for unusual oscillation or unusual noise Check for damaged or missing fan blades Clean or replace the fans as necessary Heatsink Exami...

Page 403: ...jury Part Replacement Guidelines Table 7 7 shows the standard replacement period for replacement parts When you replace these parts make sure that you use Yaskawa replacement parts for the applicable model and design revision number of your drive Table 7 7 Standard Replacement Period Part Standard Replacement Period Cooling fan 10 years Electrolytic Capacitor 1 10 years 1 If there is damage to par...

Page 404: ...e Replace the board or the drive Contact Yaskawa or your nearest sales representative to replace the board LT 4 IGBT Maintenance Time 50 The IGBTs are at 50 of their performance life estimate Check the load carrier frequency and output frequency TrPC IGBT Maintenance Time 90 The IGBTs are at 90 of their performance life estimate Replace the IGBTs or the drive 10 Related Parameters Replace the comp...

Page 405: ...to 4005 4007 to 4012 1 Procedure A 405 4018 4023 2 Procedure B 407 4031 4038 2 Procedure C 410 4044 to 4075 2 Procedure D 412 4089 to 4296 2 Procedure E 414 4371 2 1 Procedure F 417 4389 3 1 Procedure F 417 4453 to 4675 2 1 2 Procedure G 423 Replace a Fan Procedure A WARNING Electrical Shock Hazard Do not examine connect or disconnect wiring on an energized drive Before servicing disconnect all po...

Page 406: ... left and right sides of it and pull up A Fan finger guard Figure 7 1 Remove the Fan Finger Guard 2 Pull the cooling fan straight up from the drive Disconnect the power supply connector and remove the fan from the drive A Cooling fan Figure 7 2 Remove the Cooling Fan Install a Fan Reverse the removal procedure to install a cooling fan 1 Connect the drive and the fan connector Figure 7 3 Connect Co...

Page 407: ...ft and right sides of the fan finger guard and click it into place on the drive Figure 7 6 Reattach the Fan Finger Guard 5 Energize the drive and set o4 03 0 Fan Operation Time Setting 0 h to reset the cooling fan operation time Replace a Fan Procedure B WARNING Electrical Shock Hazard Do not examine connect or disconnect wiring on an energized drive Before servicing disconnect all power to the eq...

Page 408: ...ing maintenance to help ensure maximum useful product life Improper fan replacement could cause damage the drive Remove a Fan 1 To remove the fan finger guard from the drive push the hook on the back side of the fan finger guard and pull up A Fan finger guard Figure 7 7 Remove the Fan Finger Guard 2 Pull the cooling fan straight up from the drive Disconnect the power supply connector and remove th...

Page 409: ...e fan with the pins on the drive and install the cooling fan in the drive A Notch on fan B Alignment pins on drive C Front of drive Figure 7 10 Install the Cooling Fan Note When you install the cooling fan make sure that you do not pinch cables between the cooling fan and the drive 3 Put the cable in the recess of the drive A Front of drive Figure 7 11 Put the Cable in the Drive Recess ...

Page 410: ...he time specified on the warning label at a minimum The internal capacitor stays charged after the drive is de energized The charge indicator LED extinguishes when the DC bus voltage decreases below 50 Vdc When all indicators are OFF remove the covers before measuring for dangerous voltages to make sure that the drive is safe Failure to obey will cause death or serious injury CAUTION Burn Hazard D...

Page 411: ...Figure 7 15 Remove the Cooling Fans Install a Fan Reverse the removal procedure to install a cooling fan 1 Connect the drive and the fan connector Figure 7 16 Connect the Power Supply Connector 2 Align the notches on the fan with the pin on the drive and install the cooling fan in the drive A Notch on fan B Alignment pins on drive C Front of drive Figure 7 17 Install the Cooling Fan Note When you ...

Page 412: ...ternal capacitor stays charged after the drive is de energized The charge indicator LED extinguishes when the DC bus voltage decreases below 50 Vdc When all indicators are OFF remove the covers before measuring for dangerous voltages to make sure that the drive is safe Failure to obey will cause death or serious injury CAUTION Burn Hazard Do not touch a hot drive heatsink De energize the drive wai...

Page 413: ...ing Fan Figure 7 21 Remove the Cooling Fan Install a Fan Reverse the removal procedure to install a cooling fan 1 Connect the drive and the fan connector Figure 7 22 Connect Connector 2 Align the notches on the fan with the pins on the drive and install the cooling fan in the drive A Notch on fan B Alignment pins on drive C Front of drive Figure 7 23 Install the Cooling Fan Note When you install t...

Page 414: ...l Shock Hazard Do not examine connect or disconnect wiring on an energized drive Before servicing disconnect all power to the equipment and wait for the time specified on the warning label at a minimum The internal capacitor stays charged after the drive is de energized The charge indicator LED extinguishes when the DC bus voltage decreases below 50 Vdc When all indicators are OFF remove the cover...

Page 415: ... the left and right sides of it and pull up the back side of the guard A Fan finger guard Figure 7 27 Remove the Fan Finger Guard 2 Pull the cooling fan straight up from the drive Disconnect the power supply connector and remove the fan from the drive A Cooling Fan Figure 7 28 Remove the Cooling Fan Install a Fan Reverse the removal procedure to install a cooling fan 1 Connect the drive and the fa...

Page 416: ...of drive Figure 7 30 Install the Cooling Fan Note When you install the cooling fan make sure that you do not pinch cables between the cooling fan and the drive 3 Put the cable in the recess of the drive A Front of drive Figure 7 31 Put the Cable in the Drive Recess 4 Hold the fan finger guard at an angle and put the connector tabs on the fan finger guard into the holes on the drive A Front of driv...

Page 417: ... OFF remove the covers before measuring for dangerous voltages to make sure that the drive is safe Failure to obey will cause death or serious injury CAUTION Burn Hazard Do not touch a hot drive heatsink De energize the drive wait 15 minutes minimum and make sure that the heatsink is cool to replace the cooling fans Failure to obey can cause minor to moderate injury NOTICE Follow cooling fan repla...

Page 418: ... fan connector Figure 7 36 Connect Connector 2 Align the notches on the fan with the pins on the drive and install the cooling fan in the drive A Notch on fan B Alignment pins on drive C Front of drive Figure 7 37 Install the Cooling Fan Note When you install the cooling fan make sure that you do not pinch cables between the cooling fan and the drive ...

Page 419: ...onnector tabs on the fan finger guard into the holes on the drive Note When you install the cooling fan make sure that you do not pinch cables between the fan finger guard and the drive A Front of drive B Insertion area C Connector tabs Figure 7 39 Reattach the Fan Finger Guard 5 Push the hook on the back side of the fan finger guard and click it into place on the drive Figure 7 40 Reattach the Fa...

Page 420: ...o not fully remove the cover screws Make sure that the covers do not fall Missing cover screws can cause the cover to fall and cause injury 1 Unplug the fan cable from the hook A Fan unit B Hook C Fan cable Figure 7 41 Circulation Fan Components 2 Loosen the fan unit screws and slide the fan unit to the right Note To remove the fan unit it is only necessary to loosen the screws A Fan unit Figure 7...

Page 421: ...that safety the cooling fan and remove the fan A Cooling Fan Figure 7 44 Remove the Cooling Fan Install Circulation Fans Reverse the removal procedure to install a circulation fan 1 Connect the drive and the fan connector A Cooling Fan B Fan unit base Figure 7 45 Connect Connector 2 Align the pins on the fan unit base with the notches on the fan and use the screws to safety Tighten the M4 screws t...

Page 422: ...nit base Figure 7 46 Install the Cooling Fan Note When you install the cooling fan make sure that you do not pinch cables between the cooling fan and the fan unit base 3 Put the fan unit into the specified location and use screws to safety it to the drive Tighten the screws to a tightening torque of 0 98 N m to 1 33 N m 8 67 lb in to 11 77 lb in Figure 7 47 Install the Fan Unit ...

Page 423: ...0 Vdc When all indicators are OFF remove the covers before measuring for dangerous voltages to make sure that the drive is safe Failure to obey will cause death or serious injury CAUTION Burn Hazard Do not touch a hot drive heatsink De energize the drive wait 15 minutes minimum and make sure that the heatsink is cool to replace the cooling fans Failure to obey can cause minor to moderate injury NO...

Page 424: ...nical Manual 3 Loosen the fan unit screws and slide the slide panel to the left Note To remove the fan unit it is only necessary to loosen the Screws B A Screws A B Screws B C Slide panel Figure 7 49 Slide the Slide Panel 4 Remove the fan unit and the slide panel at the same time Figure 7 50 Remove the Fan Unit ...

Page 425: ...s A Cooling Fan B Relay connector C Fan unit base D Circulation Fans Figure 7 51 Remove the Cooling Fan Install a Fan Reverse the removal procedure to install a cooling fan 1 Connect the drive and the fan connector A Cooling Fan B Fan unit base C Circulation Fans Figure 7 52 Connect Connector 2 Align the pins on the fan unit base with the notches on the fan and use the screws to safety Tighten the...

Page 426: ... Fan unit base C Circulation Fans Figure 7 53 Install the Cooling Fan Note When you install the cooling fan make sure that you do not pinch cables between the cooling fan and the fan unit base 3 Put the cables in their initial locations Note Safety the relay cable to the hook A Cooling Fan B Cable hook C Relay connector D Circulation Fans ...

Page 427: ... to 22 39 lb in 5 Connect the fan cable to the fan connector A Fan unit B Fan connector C Fan cable Figure 7 54 Connect Cooling Fan Connectors 6 Reattach the drive cover 7 Energize the drive and set o4 03 0 Fan Operation Time Setting 0 h to reset the cooling fan operation time Remove the Circuit Board Cooling Fan Remove the drive cover CAUTION Crush Hazard Only loosen the cover screws Do not fully...

Page 428: ... cooling fan unit C Fan connector Figure 7 55 Circulation Fan Components 2 Loosen the circuit board cooling fan unit screws and slide the circuit board cooling fan unit up Note To remove the fan unit it is only necessary to loosen the screws A Screws Figure 7 56 Slide the Circuit Board Cooling Fan Unit 3 Remove the circuit board cooling fan unit Figure 7 57 Remove the Circuit Board Cooling Fan Uni...

Page 429: ...e notches on the fan and put the circuit board cooling fan in the fan unit then use the screws to safety the circuit board cooling fan to the fan unit base Tighten the M4 screws to a tightening torque of 0 98 N m to 1 33 N m 8 67 lb in to 11 77 lb in A Circuit Board Cooling Fans B Fan unit base C Alignment pin on fan unit base Figure 7 59 Attach the Circuit Board Cooling Fan Note When you install ...

Page 430: ...700 Technical Manual 3 Connect the fan cable to the fan connector A Fan cable B Circuit board cooling fan unit C Fan connector Figure 7 60 Connect Cooling Fan Connectors 4 Reattach the drive cover 5 Energize the drive and set o4 03 0 Fan Operation Time Setting 0 h to reset the cooling fan operation time ...

Page 431: ... to do so may result in serious electric shock WARNING Electrical Shock Hazard Only let authorized persons install wire maintain examine replace parts and repair the drive Failure to obey can cause death or serious injury WARNING Electrical Shock Hazard Do not examine connect or disconnect wiring on an energized drive Before servicing disconnect all power to the equipment and wait for the time spe...

Page 432: ...minal Use applicable tools as specified by the recommended conditions in the product manual If you use power tools to tighten the terminal screws use a low speed setting 300 to 400 r min Failure to obey can cause damage to the terminal screws Users can purchase wiring tools from Yaskawa Contact Yaskawa or your nearest sales representative for more information Wire gauges on existing drive models t...

Page 433: ...8 Hex socket cap WAF 6 mm Bit SF BIT HEX 6 50 PHOENIX CONTACT 8 12 N m 2 3 M10 Hex socket cap WAF 8 mm Bit SF BIT HEX 8 50 PHOENIX CONTACT 12 14 N m 2 3 1 When wiring drive models 2056 and 4089 and smaller select the correct tools for the wire gauge 2 Use 6 35 mm 0 25 in bit socket holder 3 Use a torque wrench that can apply this torque measurement range Remove the Control Circuit Terminal Block R...

Page 434: ...fully open the terminal block opening Note The terminal block openings ship from the factory as fully open Figure 7 68 Loosen Terminal Block Screws 3 Put a wire with prepared ends into the main circuit terminal block Figure 7 69 Install the Electrical Wire Note If there is a jumper between terminals 1 and 2 loosen the terminal block screws to remove the jumper before you wire to terminals 1 and 2 ...

Page 435: ...p its IP20 protective level Be careful when clipping the cutaway section of the wiring cover as the section may fly out in unpredictable directions Make sure that the clipped section does not cause damage to the wires If you use wires that are not specified by Yaskawa the protective enclosure could lose its IP20 protective level although the wiring cover is correct Contact Yaskawa or your nearest ...

Page 436: ...Safety the Terminal Block 3 Install the front cover and the keypad to their initial positions 4 Check o2 04 Drive Model KVA Selection Note When you save parameter information in a keypad that you installed before you replaced the terminal block make sure that you use that keypad to restore the parameter data To reset the performance life monitors for the components set o4 01 to o4 13 Maintenance P...

Page 437: ...ries bursting and igniting which could cause fire and injury NOTICE The battery remains in use even when power to the drive has been shut off Be sure to also remove the battery in the keypad when the drive will be shut off for long periods of time Replace the battery with a new one immediately after the expected lifespan has passed A dead battery left inside the keypad may leak and damage the keyp...

Page 438: ...s Corrosive Gas Do not keep the drive in locations with corrosive gas For example chemical plants refineries and sewage plants Salt Damage Do not keep the drive in salty locations For example locations near the ocean and salt damage designated locations Do not keep the drive in unsatisfactory locations Keep all drives in storage rooms that are safe from unsatisfactory elements Regluar Application ...

Page 439: ...YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710617 05F YASKAWA AC Drive GA700 Technical Manual 439 8 Disposal 8 1 Section Safety 440 8 2 Disposal Instructions 441 ...

Page 440: ...use fire and injury Do not disassemble batteries Do not expose batteries to heat or fire Improper handling may result in batteries bursting and igniting which could cause fire and injury Sudden Movement Hazard Do not do work on the drive without eye protection Wear eye protection before you start work on the drive Failure to obey could cause serious injury or death Crush Hazard Only approved perso...

Page 441: ... European Waste 16 02 14 Note Remove the battery and microSD card from the keypad before you discard the drive You cannot recycle the battery Discard used batteries as specified by the battery manufacturer Customers are responsible for microSD card data protection PC functions that format and delete the data may not be sufficient to fully erase the microSD card data Yaskawa recommends that custome...

Page 442: ...8 2 Disposal Instructions 442 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710617 05F YASKAWA AC Drive GA700 Technical Manual ...

Page 443: ...y Precautions 444 9 2 Drive Duty Modes 445 9 3 Model Specifications 200 V Class 446 9 4 Model Specifications 400 V Class 449 9 5 Drive Specifications 456 9 6 Drive Derating 460 9 7 Drive Exterior and Mounting Dimensions 465 9 8 Knock Out Hole Dimensions UL Type 1 485 9 9 Peripheral Devices and Options 490 ...

Page 444: ...Technical Manual 9 1 Safety Precautions DANGER Do not ignore the safety messages in this manual The operating company is responsible for injuries or equipment damage caused from ignoring the messages in this manual Failure to obey the safety messages will cause death or serious injury ...

Page 445: ...The rated output capacity The rated output current Refer to Table 9 1 for information about the differences between HD and ND ratings Table 9 1 Drive Duty Modes Duty Rating E1 01 Setting Input Voltage C6 01 Setting Application Default Carrier Frequency Overload Tolerance oL2 Drive Overload Heavy Duty Rating 1 HD1 200 Vand 240 V 380 Vand 460 V 0 Extruder Conveyor Constant torque or high overload ca...

Page 446: ... The maximum output voltage is proportional to the input voltage Maximum Output Frequency Advanced Open Loop Vector Control AOLV and EZ Open Loop Vector Control EZOLV 120 Hz Closed Loop V f Control CL V f Closed Loop Vector Control CLV Advanced Open Loop Vector Control for PM AOLV PM and Closed Loop Vector Control for PM CLV PM 400 Hz V f Control V f Open Loop Vector Control OLV and Open Loop Vect...

Page 447: ...the input voltage Maximum Output Frequency Advanced Open Loop Vector Control AOLV and EZ Open Loop Vector Control EZOLV 120 Hz Closed Loop V f Control CL V f Closed Loop Vector Control CLV Advanced Open Loop Vector Control for PM AOLV PM and Closed Loop Vector Control for PM CLV PM 400 Hz V f Control V f Open Loop Vector Control OLV and Open Loop Vector Control for PM OLV PM 590 Hz Measures for Ha...

Page 448: ...Control CL V f Closed Loop Vector Control CLV Advanced Open Loop Vector Control for PM AOLV PM and Closed Loop Vector Control for PM CLV PM 400 Hz V f Control V f Open Loop Vector Control OLV and Open Loop Vector Control for PM OLV PM 590 Hz Measures for Harmonics DC Reactor Standard internal characteristics Braking Device Braking Transistor External options EMC Filter EMC Filter IEC61800 3 C2 C3 ...

Page 449: ...460 V 2 HD2 0 55 0 75 1 5 2 2 3 3 7 5 5 7 5 ND2 0 75 1 5 2 2 3 3 7 5 5 7 5 11 Maximum Applicable Motor Output HP 460 V 1 HD1 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 7 1 2 10 ND1 1 2 3 4 5 7 1 2 10 15 460 V 2 HD2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 7 1 2 10 ND2 1 2 3 4 5 7 1 2 10 15 Input Rated Input Current A 3 460 V HD1 AC 1 9 3 5 4 7 6 7 8 9 11 7 15 8 21 2 HD1 DC 2 3 4 3 5 8 8 2 11 15 20 26 ND1 AC 2 5 4 7 6 7 8 9 11 7 15 8 21 2 30 6 ND1 DC 3 ...

Page 450: ...ntrol V f Open Loop Vector Control OLV and Open Loop Vector Control for PM OLV PM 590 Hz Measures for Harmon ics DC Reactor External options Braking Device Braking Transistor Standard internal characteristics EMC Filter EMC Filter IEC61800 3 C2 C3 Factory option Models 4xxxB There is a category C3 EMC filter in the drive Models 4xxxC There is a category C2 EMC filter in the drive Power Supply Rate...

Page 451: ... 41 52 61 ND2 22 27 32 41 52 61 76 Rated Output Current A 460 V HD1 24 31 39 45 60 75 91 ND1 31 38 44 59 6 74 9 89 2 103 460 V HD2 21 27 34 40 52 65 77 ND2 27 34 40 52 65 77 96 Overload Tolerance HD 150 of the rated output current for 60 seconds ND 110 of the rated output current for 60 seconds Note Derating may be necessary for applications that start and stop frequently Carrier Frequency HD 8 kH...

Page 452: ... The rated output current of the drive output amps must be equal to or more than the motor rated current 3 Assumes the value at the rated output current The input current rating changes when the power supply transformer input reactor wiring connections or power supply impedance change 4 The rated output capacity is calculated with a rated output voltage of 380 V 5 The rated output capacity is calc...

Page 453: ...Vector Control OLV and Open Loop Vector Control for PM OLV PM 590 Hz Measures for Harmonics DC Reactor Standard internal characteristics Braking Device Braking Transistor Standard internal characteristics External options EMC Filter EMC Filter IEC61800 3 C2 C3 Factory option Models 4xxxB There is a category C3 EMC filter in the drive Models 4xxxC There is a category C2 EMC filter in the drive Powe...

Page 454: ...D2 414 477 515 ND2 477 515 605 Overload Tolerance HD 150 of the rated output current for 60 seconds ND 110 of the rated output current for 60 seconds Note Derating may be necessary for applications that start and stop frequently Carrier Frequency HD 2 kHz without derating the drive capacity ND 2 kHz without derating the drive capacity Derate the drive capacity to use values to 5 kHz maximum Maximu...

Page 455: ...23 460 V HD2 335 382 429 ND2 468 526 584 1 The maximum applicable motor output complies with 380 V motor ratings as specified in Annex G of IEC 60947 4 1 The rated output current of the drive output amps must be equal to or more than the motor rated current 2 The maximum applicable motor output complies with 460 V motor ratings as specified in NEC Table 430 250 The rated output current of the driv...

Page 456: ... Hz Frequency Accuracy Temperature Fluctuation Digital inputs Within 0 01 of the maximum output frequency 10 C to 40 C 14 F to 104 F Analog inputs Within 0 1 of the maximum output frequency 25 C 10 C 77 F 18 F Frequency Setting Resolution Digital inputs 0 01 Hz Analog inputs 1 2048 of the maximum output frequency 11 bit signed Output Frequency Resolution 0 001 Hz Frequency Setting Signal Main spee...

Page 457: ...5 pre defined V f patterns or a user set V f pattern Main Control Functions Torque Control Droop Control Speed Torque Control Switching Feed Forward Control Zero Servo Function Restart After Momentary Power Loss Speed Search Overtorque Undertorque Detection Torque Limit 17 Step Speed max Accel Decel Switch S curve Acceleration Deceleration 3 wire Sequence Auto Tuning Rotational and Stationary Dwel...

Page 458: ...mbient Temperature Open chassis type IP20 10 C to 50 C 14 F to 122 F Enclosed wall mounted type UL Type 1 10 C to 40 C 14 F to 104 F Drive reliability is better in environments that do not have wide temperature fluctuations When installing the drive in an enclosure use a cooling fan or air conditioner to keep the internal air temperature in the permitted range Do not let the drive freeze To instal...

Page 459: ... 6 56 ft s2 Installation Orientation Install the drive vertically for sufficient airflow to cool the drive Table 9 12 Standard Item Specifications Harmonized Standard UL61800 5 1 EN61800 3 IEC EN61800 5 1 Two Safe Disable inputs and one EDM output according to ISO EN13849 1 Cat III PLe IEC EN61508 SIL3 Protection Design Open chassis type IP20 Enclosed wall mounted type UL Type 1 Note Install a UL ...

Page 460: ...1 2021 17 5 17 5 17 5 16 1 14 3 12 6 21 19 6 17 16 1 14 3 12 5 2030 25 0 25 0 25 0 23 0 20 5 18 0 30 28 0 25 23 0 20 5 18 0 2042 33 0 33 0 33 0 29 3 24 8 20 2 42 38 4 33 29 4 24 9 20 4 2056 47 0 47 0 47 0 43 4 38 9 34 4 56 52 4 47 43 4 38 9 34 4 2070 60 0 60 0 60 0 56 0 51 0 46 70 66 0 60 56 0 51 0 46 0 2082 75 0 75 0 75 0 68 6 60 5 53 82 82 0 75 68 8 61 0 53 1 2110 88 0 88 0 88 0 80 5 71 0 62 110...

Page 461: ...y Rating ND1 2 kHz 5 kHz 8 kHz 10 kHz 12 5 kHz 15 kHz 2 kHz 5 kHz 8 kHz 10 kHz 12 5 kHz 15 kHz 4002 1 8 1 8 1 8 1 6 1 3 1 0 2 1 2 0 1 8 1 7 1 5 1 4 4004 3 4 3 4 3 4 2 9 2 3 1 7 4 1 3 8 3 4 3 1 2 8 2 4 4005 4 8 4 8 4 8 4 3 3 7 3 0 5 4 5 2 4 8 4 6 4 3 3 9 4007 5 5 5 5 5 5 4 9 4 1 3 2 7 1 6 5 5 5 4 8 4 0 3 2 4009 7 2 7 2 7 2 6 5 5 6 4 8 8 9 8 2 7 2 6 5 5 6 4 8 4012 9 2 9 2 9 2 8 1 6 8 5 4 11 9 10 8 9...

Page 462: ...1 6 27 0 23 9 20 1 16 2 34 32 5 27 7 24 6 20 6 16 6 4044 34 0 34 0 34 0 30 1 25 3 20 4 40 39 6 34 1 30 5 25 9 21 3 4060 40 0 40 0 40 0 34 8 28 3 21 7 52 46 9 39 2 34 1 27 7 21 4075 52 0 52 0 52 0 46 1 38 6 31 2 65 64 1 54 6 48 3 40 4 33 4089 65 0 65 0 65 0 57 6 48 3 39 0 77 76 6 65 5 58 0 48 7 39 4103 77 0 77 0 77 0 68 2 57 2 46 2 96 96 0 84 1 74 6 62 8 51 4140 96 0 96 0 78 7 67 2 124 108 7 85 7 7...

Page 463: ...31 0 176 3 121 6 371 0 305 3 239 7 174 0 108 3 4389 371 0 348 7 282 0 215 2 148 4 389 0 327 5 265 7 203 8 142 0 4453 389 0 292 5 453 0 296 7 4568 453 0 340 7 568 0 372 0 4675 605 0 455 0 675 0 455 0 Table 9 18 AOLV PM Carrier Frequency and Rated Current Derating 460 V Model Rated Current A Heavy Duty Rating HD2 Normal Duty Rating ND2 2 kHz 4 kHz 6 kHz 8 kHz 10 kHz 12 kHz 2 kHz 4 kHz 6 kHz 8 kHz 10...

Page 464: ...89 361 0 339 3 274 4 209 4 144 4 414 0 347 6 281 1 214 7 148 3 4453 414 0 310 5 477 0 312 6 4568 477 0 357 8 515 0 337 5 4675 Altitude Derating Install the drive in a location that with an altitude of 1000 m 3281 ft or lower Derate the output current by 1 for each 100 m 328 ft to install the drive in altitudes between 1000 m to 3000 m 3281 ft to 9843 ft It is not necessary to derate the rated volt...

Page 465: ...odel Open Chassis enclosure IP20 Enclosed wall mounted type UL Type 1 2004 2042 466 476 2056 468 478 2070 2082 469 479 2110 470 480 2138 471 481 2169 2211 472 482 2257 2313 473 483 2360 474 484 2415 474 Table 9 20 Three Phase 400 V Model Open Chassis enclosure IP20 Enclosed wall mounted type UL Type 1 4002 4023 466 476 4031 4038 468 478 4044 4060 469 479 4075 470 480 4089 4103 471 481 4140 4168 47...

Page 466: ... 10 24 176 6 93 138 5 43 38 1 50 102 4 02 102 4 02 248 9 76 6 0 236 1 6 0 063 5 0 197 M5 3 5 7 72 2018 140 5 51 260 10 24 211 8 31 138 5 43 73 2 87 102 4 02 102 4 02 248 9 76 6 0 236 1 6 0 063 5 0 197 M5 3 9 8 60 2021 140 5 51 260 10 24 211 8 31 138 5 43 73 2 87 102 4 02 102 4 02 248 9 76 6 0 236 1 6 0 063 5 0 197 M5 3 9 8 60 2030 140 5 51 260 10 24 211 8 31 138 5 43 73 2 87 102 4 02 102 4 02 248 ...

Page 467: ... 24 211 8 31 138 5 43 73 2 87 102 4 02 102 4 02 248 9 76 6 0 236 1 6 0 063 5 0 197 M5 3 9 8 60 4009 140 5 51 260 10 24 211 8 31 138 5 43 73 2 87 102 4 02 102 4 02 248 9 76 6 0 236 1 6 0 063 5 0 197 M5 3 9 8 60 4012 140 5 51 260 10 24 211 8 31 138 5 43 73 2 87 102 4 02 102 4 02 248 9 76 6 0 236 1 6 0 063 5 0 197 M5 3 9 8 60 4018 140 5 51 260 10 24 211 8 31 138 5 43 73 2 87 102 4 02 102 4 02 248 9 7...

Page 468: ... W1 W2 H1 H2 t1 t2 d 2056 180 7 09 300 11 81 202 7 95 134 5 28 68 2 68 140 5 51 140 5 51 284 11 18 8 0 315 1 6 0 063 1 6 0 063 M5 6 13 23 Table 9 24 400 V class IP20 Model Dimensions mm in Estima ted Weight kg lb W H D D1 D2 W1 W2 H1 H2 t1 t2 d 4031 180 7 09 300 11 81 202 7 95 134 5 28 68 2 68 140 5 51 140 5 51 284 11 18 8 0 315 1 6 0 063 1 6 0 063 M5 6 13 23 4038 180 7 09 300 11 81 202 7 95 134 5...

Page 469: ...4 140 5 51 87 3 43 192 7 56 192 7 56 335 13 19 8 0 315 2 3 0 091 2 3 0 091 M6 8 5 18 74 2082 220 8 66 350 13 78 227 8 94 140 5 51 87 3 43 192 7 56 192 7 56 335 13 19 8 0 315 2 3 0 091 2 3 0 091 M6 9 0 19 84 Table 9 26 400 V class IP20 Model Dimensions mm in Estima ted Weight kg lb W H D D1 D2 W1 W2 H1 H2 t1 t2 d 4044 220 8 66 350 13 78 227 8 94 140 5 51 87 3 43 192 7 56 192 7 56 335 13 19 8 0 315 ...

Page 470: ... t kg lb W H D D1 D2 W1 W2 W5 max H1 H2 H4 t1 t2 d 2110 240 9 45 400 15 75 280 11 02 166 6 54 114 4 49 195 7 68 186 7 32 12 0 472 375 14 76 17 5 0 689 17 5 0 689 2 3 0 091 2 3 0 091 M6 22 48 50 Table 9 28 400 V class IP20 Model Dimensions mm in Esti mated Weigh t kg lb W H D D1 D2 W1 W2 W5 max H1 H2 H4 t1 t2 d 4075 240 9 45 400 15 75 280 11 02 166 6 54 114 4 49 195 7 68 186 7 32 12 0 472 375 14 76...

Page 471: ...0 17 72 280 11 02 166 6 54 114 4 49 170 6 69 165 6 50 12 0 472 424 16 69 16 0 630 29 1 14 21 0 827 2 3 0 091 2 3 0 091 M6 24 52 91 Table 9 30 400 V class IP20 Mod el Dimensions mm in Esti mat ed Weig ht kg lb W H D D1 D2 W1 W2 W5 ma x H1 H2 H3 H4 t1 t2 d 4089 255 10 04 450 17 72 280 11 02 166 6 54 114 4 49 170 6 69 165 6 50 12 0 472 424 16 69 16 0 630 29 1 14 21 0 827 2 3 0 091 2 3 0 091 M6 22 48 ...

Page 472: ...2 20 5 0 807 2 3 0 091 2 3 0 091 M8 39 85 98 2211 264 10 39 543 21 38 335 13 19 186 7 32 149 5 87 190 7 48 182 7 17 12 0 472 516 20 31 17 5 0 689 28 5 1 12 20 5 0 807 2 3 0 091 2 3 0 091 M8 40 88 18 Table 9 32 400 V class IP20 Mod el Dimensions mm in Esti mat ed Weig ht kg lb W H D D1 D2 W1 W2 W5 ma x H1 H2 H3 H4 t1 t2 d 4140 264 10 39 543 21 38 335 13 19 186 7 32 149 5 87 190 7 48 182 7 17 12 0 4...

Page 473: ...27 56 420 16 54 260 10 24 160 6 30 218 8 58 218 8 58 18 0 709 659 25 94 28 1 10 43 5 1 71 28 5 1 12 4 5 0 177 4 5 0 177 M10 67 147 7 Table 9 34 400 V class IP20 Mod el Dimensions mm in Esti mat ed Weig ht kg lb W H D D1 D2 W1 W2 W5 ma x H1 H2 H3 H4 t1 t2 d 4208 312 12 28 700 27 56 420 16 54 260 10 24 160 6 30 218 8 58 218 8 58 18 0 709 659 25 94 28 1 10 43 5 1 71 28 5 1 12 4 5 0 177 4 5 0 177 M10 ...

Page 474: ... 1 73 30 1 18 4 5 0 177 4 5 0 177 M12 104 229 3 2415 440 17 32 800 31 50 472 18 58 254 10 00 218 8 58 370 14 57 370 14 57 20 0 787 757 29 80 28 1 10 44 1 73 30 1 18 4 5 0 177 4 5 0 177 M12 119 262 3 Table 9 36 400 V class IP20 Mod el Dimensions mm in Esti mat ed Weig ht kg lb W H D D1 D2 W1 W2 W5 ma x H1 H2 H3 H4 t1 t2 d 4371 440 17 32 800 31 50 472 18 58 254 10 00 218 8 58 370 14 57 370 14 57 20 ...

Page 475: ...0 8 1140 44 8 8 480 18 9 0 260 10 2 4 220 8 66 450 17 7 2 450 17 7 2 225 8 86 225 8 86 20 0 78 7 1093 43 0 3 25 5 1 00 43 5 1 71 30 5 1 20 4 5 0 17 7 4 5 0 17 7 M12 198 436 5 4568 510 20 0 8 1140 44 8 8 480 18 9 0 260 10 2 4 220 8 66 450 17 7 2 450 17 7 2 225 8 86 225 8 86 20 0 78 7 1093 43 0 3 25 5 1 00 43 5 1 71 30 5 1 20 4 5 0 17 7 4 5 0 17 7 M12 198 436 5 4675 510 20 0 8 1140 44 8 8 480 18 9 0...

Page 476: ... 140 5 51 300 11 81 176 6 93 138 5 43 38 1 50 102 4 02 102 4 02 260 10 24 248 9 76 6 0 236 40 1 57 1 5 0 059 1 6 0 063 5 0 197 M5 4 1 9 04 2012 140 5 51 300 11 81 176 6 93 138 5 43 38 1 50 102 4 02 102 4 02 260 10 24 248 9 76 6 0 236 40 1 57 1 5 0 059 1 6 0 063 5 0 197 M5 4 1 9 04 2018 140 5 51 300 11 81 211 8 31 138 5 43 73 2 87 102 4 02 102 4 02 260 10 24 248 9 76 6 0 236 40 1 57 1 5 0 059 1 6 0...

Page 477: ... 02 102 4 02 260 10 24 248 9 76 6 0 236 40 1 57 1 5 0 059 1 6 0 063 5 0 197 M5 4 1 9 04 4007 140 5 51 300 11 81 211 8 31 138 5 43 73 2 87 102 4 02 102 4 02 260 10 24 248 9 76 6 0 236 40 1 57 1 5 0 059 1 6 0 063 5 0 197 M5 4 5 9 92 4009 140 5 51 300 11 81 211 8 31 138 5 43 73 2 87 102 4 02 102 4 02 260 10 24 248 9 76 6 0 236 40 1 57 1 5 0 059 1 6 0 063 5 0 197 M5 4 5 9 92 4012 140 5 51 300 11 81 21...

Page 478: ...39 202 7 95 134 5 28 68 2 68 140 5 51 140 5 51 300 11 81 284 11 18 8 0 315 40 1 57 1 5 0 059 1 6 0 063 1 6 0 063 M5 7 15 43 Table 9 41 400 V Class UL Type 1 Mod el Dimensions mm in Esti mat ed Weig ht kg lb W H D D1 D2 W1 W2 H0 H1 H2 H3 H4 t1 t2 d 4031 180 7 09 340 13 39 202 7 95 134 5 28 68 2 68 140 5 51 140 5 51 300 11 81 284 11 18 8 0 315 40 1 57 1 5 0 059 1 6 0 063 1 6 0 063 M5 7 15 43 4038 18...

Page 479: ...19 8 0 315 50 1 97 1 5 0 059 2 3 0 091 2 3 0 091 M6 9 19 84 2082 220 8 66 435 17 13 227 8 94 140 5 51 87 3 43 192 7 56 192 7 56 350 13 78 335 13 19 8 0 315 85 3 35 1 5 0 059 2 3 0 091 2 3 0 091 M6 10 22 05 Table 9 43 400 V Class UL Type 1 Mod el Dimensions mm in Esti mat ed Weig ht kg lb W H D D1 D2 W1 W2 H0 H1 H2 H3 H4 t1 t2 d 4044 220 8 66 400 15 75 227 8 94 140 5 51 87 3 43 192 7 56 192 7 56 35...

Page 480: ...W3 ma x H0 H1 H2 H3 H5 t1 t2 d 2110 244 9 61 500 19 69 280 11 02 166 6 54 114 4 49 195 7 68 186 7 32 10 0 394 400 15 75 375 14 76 17 5 0 689 100 3 94 17 5 0 689 2 3 0 091 2 3 0 091 M6 24 52 91 Table 9 45 400 V Class UL Type 1 Mod el Dimensions mm in Esti mat ed Weig ht kg lb W H D D1 D2 W1 W2 W3 ma x H0 H1 H2 H3 H5 t1 t2 d 4075 244 9 61 500 19 69 280 11 02 166 6 54 114 4 49 195 7 68 186 7 32 10 0 ...

Page 481: ...6 6 54 114 4 49 170 6 69 165 6 50 10 0 394 450 17 72 424 16 69 16 0 630 130 5 12 21 0 827 2 3 0 091 2 3 0 091 M6 27 59 52 Table 9 47 400 V Class UL Type 1 Mod el Dimensions mm in Esti mat ed Weig ht kg lb W H D D1 D2 W1 W2 W3 ma x H0 H1 H2 H3 H5 t1 t2 d 4089 259 10 2 0 580 22 83 280 11 02 166 6 54 114 4 49 170 6 69 165 6 50 10 0 39 4 450 17 72 424 16 69 16 0 630 130 5 12 21 0 82 7 2 3 0 09 1 2 3 0...

Page 482: ... 3 0 091 2 3 0 091 M8 44 97 00 2211 268 10 55 770 30 31 335 13 19 186 7 32 149 5 87 190 7 48 182 7 17 10 0 394 543 21 38 516 20 31 17 5 0 689 227 8 94 20 5 0 807 2 3 0 091 2 3 0 091 M8 46 101 4 1 Table 9 49 400 V Class UL Type 1 Mod el Dimensions mm in Esti mat ed Weig ht kg lb W H D D1 D2 W1 W2 W3 ma x H0 H1 H2 H3 H5 t1 t2 d 4140 268 10 5 5 700 27 56 335 13 19 186 7 32 149 5 87 190 7 48 182 7 17 ...

Page 483: ...24 160 6 30 218 8 58 218 8 58 16 0 630 700 27 5 6 659 25 94 28 1 102 215 8 46 28 5 1 122 4 5 0 177 4 5 0 177 M10 72 158 7 3 Table 9 51 400 V Class UL Type 1 Mod el Dimensions mm in Esti mat ed Weig ht kg lb W H D D1 D2 W1 W2 W3 ma x H0 H1 H2 H3 H5 t1 t2 d 4208 316 12 4 4 915 36 02 420 16 54 260 10 24 160 6 30 218 8 58 218 8 58 16 0 63 0 700 27 56 659 25 94 28 1 102 215 8 46 28 5 1 12 2 4 5 0 17 7 ...

Page 484: ...x H0 H1 H2 H3 H5 t1 t2 d 2360 444 17 48 1045 41 14 472 18 58 254 10 00 218 8 58 370 14 57 370 14 57 18 0 709 800 31 50 757 29 80 28 1 102 245 9 65 30 1 181 4 5 0 177 4 5 0 177 M12 113 249 1 2 Table 9 53 400 V Class UL Type 1 Mod el Dimensions mm in Esti mat ed Weig ht kg lb W H D D1 D2 W1 W2 W3 ma x H0 H1 H2 H3 H5 t1 t2 d 4371 444 17 4 8 1045 41 14 472 18 58 254 10 00 218 8 58 370 14 57 370 14 57 ...

Page 485: ... 4023 485 2056 4031 4038 486 2070 2082 4044 4060 486 2110 4075 487 2138 4089 4103 487 2169 4140 4168 488 2211 488 2257 2313 4208 4296 489 2360 4371 489 2004 to 2042 4002 to 4023 Figure 9 18 Knock Out Dimensions Diagram 1 Models 2004 to 2042 and 4002 to 4023 Model Dimensions mm in D D1 D2 D3 W φd4 2004 to 2012 4002 to 4005 39 1 54 85 3 35 57 5 2 26 30 1 18 38 2 1 50 35 1 38 2018 to 2042 4007 to 402...

Page 486: ... Dimensions mm in D D1 D2 D3 W W1 φd4 φd5 2056 4031 4038 67 5 2 66 86 5 3 41 60 2 36 34 1 34 54 2 13 46 5 1 83 35 1 38 44 1 73 2070 2082 4044 4060 Figure 9 20 Knock Out Dimensions Diagram 3 Models 2070 2082 4044 and 4060 Model Dimensions mm in D D1 D2 W W1 φd4 φd5 2070 2082 4044 87 2 3 43 84 3 3 32 36 8 1 45 68 2 68 35 1 38 35 1 38 50 1 97 4060 106 2 4 18 84 3 3 32 36 8 1 45 68 2 68 35 1 38 35 1 3...

Page 487: ...t Dimensions Diagram 4 Models 2110 and 4075 Model Dimensions mm in D D1 D2 W W1 φd4 φd5 2110 4075 112 5 4 43 96 3 78 48 5 1 91 73 2 87 38 1 50 35 1 38 50 1 97 2138 4089 4103 Figure 9 22 Knock Out Dimensions Diagram 5 Models 2138 4089 and 4103 Model Dimensions mm in D D1 D2 W W1 φd4 φd5 2138 4089 4103 112 4 4 43 112 8 4 44 55 8 2 20 73 5 2 89 35 1 38 35 1 38 62 2 44 ...

Page 488: ... Diagram 6 Models 2169 4140 and 4168 Model Dimensions mm in D D1 D2 W W1 φd4 φd5 φd6 2169 4140 4168 149 5 87 117 4 61 56 2 20 78 3 07 37 5 1 48 44 1 73 35 1 38 62 2 44 2211 Figure 9 24 Knock Out Dimensions Diagram 7 Models 2211 Model Dimensions mm in D D1 D2 D3 W W1 φd4 φd5 φd6 2211 149 5 87 124 8 4 91 117 3 4 62 61 8 2 43 96 3 78 61 5 2 42 50 1 97 35 1 38 75 2 95 ...

Page 489: ...iagram 8 Models 2257 2313 4208 4250 and 4296 Model Dimensions mm in D D1 D2 D3 W W1 φd4 φd5 2257 2313 4208 4250 4296 160 6 30 208 4 8 20 166 3 6 55 75 3 2 96 92 8 3 65 27 5 1 08 35 1 38 62 2 44 2360 4371 Figure 9 26 Knock Out Dimensions Diagram 9 Models 2360 and 4371 Model Dimensions mm in D D1 D2 W W1 W2 φd4 φd5 2360 4371 218 8 58 170 6 69 66 6 2 62 145 5 71 40 1 57 120 4 72 35 1 38 75 2 95 ...

Page 490: ...al overload relay Braking Unit CDBR series Use with a braking resistor unit to decrease motor deceleration times Molded Case Circuit Breaker MCCB NF series To prevent short circuit damage to the power supply system and provide overload protection for wiring Residual Current Monitor Detector RCM RCD NVand NS series To prevent short circuit damage to the power supply system provide overload protecti...

Page 491: ... option with the frequency setting potentiometer Potential Transformer UPN B To adjust the meter voltage Scale Plate NPJT41561 1 Use this option with the frequency setting potentiometer Table 9 56 Keypad Options Name Model Purpose LED Keypad JVOP KPLEA04xxx A replacement keypad that has an LED display Use connection cables that are 3 m 9 8 ft long maximum to connect this keypad for remote operatio...

Page 492: ...ncoder Type EnDat PG F3 This option is for use with CLV PM control method The drive detects motor rotation speed from the pulse generator as feedback The drive can then enable control of the output frequency keep a constant motor speed Supports EnDat 2 1 01 EnDat 2 2 01 EnDat 2 2 22 models from HEIDENHAIN Supports HIPERFACE models from SICK STEGMANN Maximum input frequency 20 kHz use for low speed...

Page 493: ...ated digital signals and monitor the operation status of the drive alarm signals and detecting zero speed Type of output Photocoupler relays 6 channels 48 V 50 mA maximum Relay contact output 2 channels 250 Vac at 1 A or less 30 Vdc at 1 A or less TOBPC73060081 PROFIBUS DP SI P3 This option uses the host controller over PROFIBUS DP communication to Operate and stop the drive Set and view parameter...

Page 494: ...n Operating and stopping the drive Set and view parameters Monitoring output frequency output current and similar 1 LONWORKS SI W3 This option uses the host controller over LONWORKS communication to Operate and stop the drive Set and view parameters Monitor output frequency output current and other statuses 1 PROFINET SI EP3 This option uses the host controller over PROFINET communication to Opera...

Page 495: ...al Functions 546 10 11 L Protection Functions 568 10 12 n Special Adjustment 579 10 13 o Keypad Related Settings 586 10 14 q DriveWorksEZ Parameters 593 10 15 r DWEZ Connection 1 20 594 10 16 T Motor Tuning 595 10 17 U Monitors 599 10 18 Parameters that Change from the Default Settings with A1 02 Control Method Selection 614 10 19 E3 01 Motor 2 Control Mode Dependent Parameters 620 10 20 Parameter...

Page 496: ...Technical Manual 10 1 Section Safety DANGER Do not ignore the safety messages in this manual The operating company is responsible for injuries or equipment damage caused from ignoring the messages in this manual Failure to obey the safety messages will cause death or serious injury ...

Page 497: ...Control The parameter is available when operating the drive with Open Loop Vector Control for PM The parameter is available when operating the drive with Advanced Open Loop Vector Control for PM The parameter is available when operating the drive with Closed Loop Vector Control for PM The parameter is available when operating the drive with EZ Open Loop Vector Control Hex Hexadecimal numbers that ...

Page 498: ...up Encoder F2 Analog Input Option F3 Digital Input Option F4 Analog Output Option F5 Digital Output Option F6 Communication Options F7 Ethernet Options H1 Digital Inputs H2 Digital Outputs Parameters Name H3 Analog Inputs H4 Analog Outputs H5 Modbus Communication H6 Pulse Train Input Output H7 Virtual Inputs Outputs L1 Motor Protection L2 Power Loss Ride Through L3 Stall Prevention L4 Speed Detect...

Page 499: ...arameter List 10 10 3 Parameter Groups YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710617 05F YASKAWA AC Drive GA700 Technical Manual 499 Parameters Name U6 Operation Status Monitors Parameters Name U8 DriveWorksEZ Monitors ...

Page 500: ...d Loop Vector 4 Advanced Open Loop Vector 5 PM Open Loop Vector 6 PM Advanced Open Loop Vector 7 PM Closed Loop Vector 8 EZ Vector Control 0 0 8 676 A1 03 0103 Initialize Parameters Sets parameters to default values 0 No Initialization 1110 User Initialization 2220 2 Wire Initialization 3330 3 Wire Initialization 0 0 3330 677 A1 04 0104 Password Entry point for the password set in A1 05 Password S...

Page 501: ...eters No Hex Name Description Default Range Ref A2 01 to A2 32 0106 0125 User Parameters 1 to 32 You can select a maximum of 32 parameters for the drive and set them to parameters A2 01 to A2 32 The User Parameters section of the keypad main menu shows the set parameters You can immediately access these set parameters Note Settings for A2 01 to A2 32 change when the A1 06 Application Preset value ...

Page 502: ...ation Below Minimum Freq Sets the drive operation when the frequency reference decreases to less than the value set in E1 09 Minimum Output Frequency 0 Operate at Frequency Reference 1 Baseblock Motor Coasts 2 Operate at Minimum Frequency 3 Operate at Zero Speed 0 0 3 703 b1 06 0185 Digital Input Reading Sets the number of times that the drive reads the sequence input command to prevent problems f...

Page 503: ...Accept RUN Command at Any Speed 0 0 1 709 b1 35 1117 Expert Digital Input Deadband Time Sets the deadband time for MFDIs 0 0 ms 0 0 to 100 0 ms 709 b2 DC Injection Braking and Short Circuit Braking No Hex Name Description Default Range Ref b2 01 0189 DC Injection Zero SpeedThreshold Sets the frequency to start DC Injection Braking Short Circuit Braking and Zero Servo Note This parameter is availab...

Page 504: ... that flows to the motor during Speed Estimation Speed Search as a coefficient of the motor rated current Usually it is not necessary to change this setting Determined by o2 04 0 0 2 0 717 b3 07 0197 Expert Speed Estimation Current Level 2 Sets the level of current that flows to the motor during Speed Estimation Speed Search as a coefficient of E2 03 Motor No Load Current or E4 03 Motor 2 Rated No...

Page 505: ...e drive will start Speed Search when the motor induced voltage level is the same as the setting value Usually it is not necessary to change this setting 10 0 10 720 b3 31 0BC0 Expert Spd Search Current Reference Lvl Sets the current level that decreases the output current during Current Detection Speed Search 1 50 1 50 3 50 720 b3 32 0BC1 Expert Spd Search Current Complete Lvl Sets the current lev...

Page 506: ... 65000 ms 722 b4 05 0B32 Expert Terminal M3 M4 ON Delay Time Sets the delay time to activate the contact after the function set in H2 02 activates 0 ms 0 65000 ms 722 b4 06 0B33 Expert Terminal M3 M4 OFF Delay Time Sets the delay time to deactivate the contact after the function set in H2 02 deactivates 0 ms 0 65000 ms 723 b4 07 0B34 Expert Terminal M5 M6 ON Delay Time Sets the delay time to activ...

Page 507: ...ID Offset Adjustment Sets the offset for the PID control output as a percentage of E1 04 Maximum Output Frequency 0 0 100 0 100 0 731 b5 08 01AC Expert PID Primary Delay Time Constant Sets the primary delay time constant for the PID control output Usually it is not necessary to change this setting 0 00 s 0 00 10 00 s 731 b5 09 01AD PID Output Level Selection Sets the polarity of the PID output 0 N...

Page 508: ... to set and show b5 19 PID Setpoint Value 0 0 01Hz units 1 0 01 units 2 min 1 3 User Units 1 0 3 734 b5 34 019F RUN PID Output Lower Limit Level Sets the output lower limit for the PID control as a percentage of E1 04 Maximum Output Frequency 0 0 100 0 100 0 734 b5 35 01A0 RUN PID Input Limit Level Sets the input upper limit for the PID control as a percentage of E1 04 Maximum Output Frequency 100...

Page 509: ...0 0 00 100 00 737 b5 61 119A PID Trim Mode Lower Limit Sel Sets the function that adjusts the PID output in relation to the frequency reference 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 0 0 1 737 b5 62 119B PID Trim Mode Lower Limit Value Sets the lower limit of the PID frequency reference trim as a percentage where E1 04 Maximum Output Frequency setting a setting value of 100 0 00 0 00 100 00 737 b5 63 119C PID Diffe...

Page 510: ...5 EZ Sleep Wake up Mode Sets the wake up mode to use when exiting Sleep Mode 0 Absolute 1 Setpoint Delta 0 0 1 740 b5 96 0B96 EZ Sleep Wake up Time Sets the EZ Wake up time 1 0 s 0 0 1000 0 s 740 b6 Dwell Function No Hex Name Description Default Range Ref b6 01 01B6 Dwell Reference at Start Sets the output frequency that the drive will hold momentarily when the motor starts 0 0 Determined by A1 02...

Page 511: ...3 b8 06 01D1 Expert Search Operation Voltage Limit Sets the voltage limit for Search Operation as a percentage where motor rated voltage is a setting value of 100 0 0 100 743 b8 16 01F8 Expert PM E Save Coefficient Ki Sets torque linearity This parameter uses the Ki value from the motor nameplate Usually it is not necessary to change this setting 1 00 0 00 3 00 744 b8 17 01F9 Expert PM E Save Coef...

Page 512: ...f drive response between changes to the load or Energy saving control 0 Priority Drive Response 1 Priority Energy Savings 0 0 1 746 b8 50 0B0D Standby Mode Selection Sets the Standby Mode function 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 0 0 1 746 b8 51 0B01 Standby Mode Wait Time Sets the delay time before turning off the electromagnetic contactor after the drive stops 600 s 0 6000 s 747 b9 Zero Servo No Hex Name De...

Page 513: ... motor to coasts to a stop Set a Fast Stop time in C1 09 that prevents motor coasting and makes sure that the motor stops quickly and safely When L2 29 0 Kinetic Energy Backup Method Single Drive KEB Ride Thru 1 and you do KEB Auto Tuning the drive will automatically set C1 09 If you must not change the Fast Stop time do not do KEB Auto Tuning 10 0 s 0 0 6000 0 s 752 C1 10 0209 Accel Decel Time Se...

Page 514: ...ip 200 0 250 756 C3 04 0212 Slip Compensation at Regen Sets the slip compensation function during regenerative operation 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Above 6Hz 2 Enabled Above C3 15 0 0 2 756 C3 05 0213 Output Voltage Limit Selection Sets the automatic reduction of motor magnetic flux when the output voltage is saturated 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 0 0 1 757 C3 16 0261 Expert Vout Modulation Limit Start Lvl Sets...

Page 515: ...ensation FWD Start Sets the amount of torque reference for forward start as a percentage of the motor rated torque 0 0 0 0 200 0 760 C4 04 0218 Torque Compensation REV Start Sets the amount of torque reference for reverse start as a percentage of the motor rated torque 0 0 200 0 0 0 760 C4 05 0219 Torque Compensation Time Sets the starting torque constant to use with C4 03 and C4 04 Torque Compens...

Page 516: ...ral Time 1 2 Determined by A1 02 Determined by A1 02 767 C5 08 0222 ASR Integral Limit Sets the upper limit for ASR as a percentage of the rated load 400 0 400 767 C5 12 0386 Integral Operation Accel Decel Sets integral operation during acceleration and deceleration 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 0 0 1 767 C5 17 0276 Expert Motor Inertia Sets the motor inertia Determined by o2 04 C6 01 and E5 01 0 0001 6 00...

Page 517: ...eceleration for motor 2 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 0 0 1 770 C5 37 0278 Expert Motor 2 Inertia Sets the motor inertia for motor 2 Determined by o2 04 and C6 01 0 0001 6 0000 kgm2 770 C5 38 0279 Expert Motor 2 Load Inertia Ratio Sets the load inertia ratio for the motor 2 inertia 1 0 0 0 6000 0 770 C5 39 030D ASR Primary Delay Time Const 2 Sets the filter time constant for the time from the speed loop to...

Page 518: ...arrier frequency Set C6 02 F Carrier Frequency Selection User Defined C6 03 to C6 05 to set this parameter Determined by C6 02 1 0 15 0 kHz 773 C6 04 0226 Carrier Frequency Lower Limit Sets the lower limit of the carrier frequency Set C6 02 F Carrier Frequency Selection User Defined C6 03 to C6 05 to set this parameter Determined by C6 02 1 0 15 0 kHz 773 C6 05 0227 Carrier Freq Proportional Gain ...

Page 519: ...nce 5 Sets the frequency reference in the units from o1 03 Frequency Display Unit Selection Note o1 03 1 0 01 100 E1 04 when A1 02 6 7 Control Method Selection PM Advanced Open Loop Vector PM Closed Loop Vector 0 00 Hz 0 00 590 00 Hz 778 d1 06 0285 RUN Reference 6 Sets the frequency reference in the units from o1 03 Frequency Display Unit Selection Note o1 03 1 0 01 100 E1 04 when A1 02 6 7 Contro...

Page 520: ...l Method Selection PM Advanced Open Loop Vector PM Closed Loop Vector 0 00 Hz 0 00 590 00 Hz 780 d1 13 028E RUN Reference 13 Sets the frequency reference in the units from o1 03 Frequency Display Unit Selection Note o1 03 1 0 01 100 E1 04 when A1 02 6 7 Control Method Selection PM Advanced Open Loop Vector PM Closed Loop Vector 0 00 Hz 0 00 590 00 Hz 780 d1 14 028F RUN Reference 14 Sets the freque...

Page 521: ...E1 04 Maximum Output Frequency 0 0 0 0 110 0 782 d2 03 0293 Analog Frequency Ref Lower Limit Sets the lower limit of the master frequency reference Multi Step Speed 1 as a percentage of E1 04 Maximum Output Frequency 0 0 0 0 110 0 782 d3 Jump Frequency No Hex Name Description Default Range Ref d3 01 0294 Jump Frequency 1 Sets the median value of the frequency band that the drive will avoid 0 0 Hz ...

Page 522: ...e Limit If the frequency reference changes for more than the level set to this parameter then the bias value will be held Parameter E1 04 Maximum Output Frequency is 100 1 0 0 1 100 0 787 d4 08 02AF RUN Up Down 2 Bias Upper Limit Sets the upper limit of the Up Down 2 bias as a percentage of E1 04 Maximum Output Frequency 100 0 0 0 100 0 788 d4 09 02B0 RUN Up Down 2 Bias Lower Limit Sets the lower ...

Page 523: ... which Speed Limit Bias d5 05 applies 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 1 0 1 795 d6 Field Weakening and Field Forcing No Hex Name Description Default Range Ref d6 01 02A0 Field Weakening Level Sets the drive output voltage as a percentage of E1 05 Maximum Output Voltage when H1 xx 63 Field Weakening is activated 80 0 100 795 d6 02 02A1 Field Weakening Frequency Limit Sets the minimum output frequency to start...

Page 524: ... Frequency 2 Sets the value to add to or subtract from the frequency reference when H1 xx 45 MFDI Function Select Add Offset Frequency 2 d7 02 as a percentage of E1 04 Maximum Output Frequency 0 0 100 0 100 0 797 d7 03 02B4 RUN Offset Frequency 3 Sets the value to add to or subtract from the frequency reference when H1 xx 46 MFDI Function Select Add Offset Frequency 3 d7 03 as a percentage of E1 0...

Page 525: ...A1 02 2 Control Method Selection Open Loop Vector settings 0 through E are not available Set the correct V f pattern for the application and operation area An incorrect V f pattern can decrease motor torque and increase current from overexcitation F Determined by A1 02 799 E1 04 0303 Maximum Output Frequency Sets the maximum output frequency for the V f pattern Determined by A1 02 and E5 01 Determ...

Page 526: ...les Note When A1 02 0 1 3 Control Method Selection V f CL V f CLV the maximum value is 120 When A1 02 2 4 OLV AOLV the maximum value is 48 4 2 120 807 E2 05 0312 Motor Line to Line Resistance Sets the line to line resistance for the motor stator windings Determined by o2 04 and C6 01 0 000 65 000 Ω 807 E2 06 0313 Motor Leakage Inductance Sets the voltage drop from motor leakage inductance when the...

Page 527: ...10 E3 07 031D Motor 2 Mid Point A Frequency Sets a middle output frequency for the motor 2 V f pattern Determined by E3 01 0 0 E3 04 810 E3 08 031E Motor 2 Mid Point AVoltage Sets a middle output voltage for the motor 2 V f pattern Determined by E3 01 200 V Class 0 0 255 0 V 400 V Class 0 0 510 0 V 810 E3 09 031F Motor 2 Minimum Output Frequency Sets the minimum output frequency for the motor 2 V ...

Page 528: ...Leakage Inductance Sets the voltage drop from motor 2 leakage inductance as a percentage of Motor Rated Voltage when motor 2 operates at the rated frequency and rated current Determined by o2 04 C6 01 0 0 60 0 813 E4 07 0343 Motor 2 Saturation Coefficient 1 Sets the motor 2 iron core saturation coefficient at 50 of the magnetic flux 0 50 0 00 0 50 813 E4 08 0344 Motor 2 Saturation Coefficient 2 Se...

Page 529: ...0 00 300 00 mH 815 E5 07 032F PM q axis Inductance mH phase Sets the PM motor q axis inductance Determined by E5 01 0 00 600 00 mH 816 E5 09 0331 PM Back EMF Vpeak mV rad s Sets the peak value of PM motor induced voltage Determined by E5 01 0 0 2000 0 mV rad s 816 E5 11 0333 Encoder Z Pulse Offset Sets the encoder Z pulse offset 0 0 degrees 180 0 180 0 degrees 816 E5 24 0353 PM Back EMF L L Vrms m...

Page 530: ... the drive rated current 277 E9 07 11EA Motor Rated Power kW Sets the motor rated power in 0 01 kW increments 1 HP 0 746 kW Determined by E9 02 and o2 04 0 00 650 00 kW 818 E9 08 11EB Motor Pole Count Sets the number of motor poles 4 2 120 818 E9 09 11EC Motor Rated Slip Sets the motor rated slip 0 0 Hz 0 0 20 0 Hz 818 E9 10 11ED Motor Line to Line Resistance Sets the line to line resistance for t...

Page 531: ...d and third digits set the denominator The dividing ratio 1 x yz when the setting value is a 3 digit value xyz 001 001 032 102 132 1 1 32 822 F1 08 0387 Overspeed Detection Level Sets the detection level of oS Overspeed as a percentage when the maximum output frequency is 100 115 0 120 823 F1 09 0388 Overspeed Detection Delay Time Sets the length of time that the speed feedback must be more than t...

Page 532: ... This parameter assumes that the motor is operating in the forward direction 0 Pulse A leads in FWD Direction 1 Pulse B leads in FWD Direction 0 0 1 825 F1 33 03B2 Encoder 2 Gear Teeth 1 Sets the number of gear teeth on the motor side for motor 2 This parameter and F1 34 Encoder 2 Gear Teeth 2 set the gear ratio between the motor and encoder 0 0 1000 825 F1 34 03B3 Encoder 2 Gear Teeth 2 Sets the ...

Page 533: ...e Description Default Range Ref F2 01 038F Analog Input Function Selection Sets the input method for the analog reference used with AI A3 0 3 Independent Channels 1 3 Channels Added Together 0 0 1 827 F2 02 0368 RUN Analog Input Option Card Gain Sets the analog reference gain as a percentage when the maximum output frequency is 100 Note Set F2 01 1 Analog Input Function Selection 3 Channels Added ...

Page 534: ... D4 Function Selection Sets the function for terminal D4 of the DI A3 when F3 01 8 Digital Input Function Selection Multi Function Digital Input F 1 19F 832 F3 15 0BE8 Expert Terminal D5 Function Selection Sets the function for terminal D5 of the DI A3 when F3 01 8 Digital Input Function Selection Multi Function Digital Input F 1 19F 832 F3 16 0BE9 Expert Terminal D6 Function Selection Sets the fu...

Page 535: ...unction Selection Sets the number for monitor item of output from terminal V2 103 000 999 835 F4 04 0394 RUN Terminal V2 Gain Sets the gain of the monitor signal that is sent from terminal V2 When an output for monitoring items is 0 this parameter sets the analog signal output level from the V2 terminal at 10 Vor 20 mA as 100 50 0 999 9 999 9 835 F4 05 0395 RUN Terminal V1 Bias Sets the bias of th...

Page 536: ... option Set F5 09 2 DO A3 Output Mode Selection Programmable F5 01 to F5 08 to enable this function F 0 1A7 839 F5 08 03A0 Terminal M3 M4 Function Select Sets the function of terminal M3 M4 on the DO A3 option Set F5 09 2 DO A3 Output Mode Selection Programmable F5 01 to F5 08 to enable this function F 0 1A7 839 F5 09 03A1 DO A3 Output Mode Selection Sets the output mode of signals from the DO A3 ...

Page 537: ...ed 1 Reset Back to Factory Default 0 0 1 842 F6 10 03B6 CC Link Node Address Sets the node address for CC Link communication Restart the drive after changing this setting Note Be sure to set a node address that is different than all other node addresses Do not set this parameter to 0 Incorrect parameter settings will cause AEr Station Address Setting Error errors and the L ERR LED on the option wi...

Page 538: ...ing 0000h 0000h FFFFh 848 F6 24 036F MECHATROLINK Monitor Select F Sets the MEMOBUS register used for the monitor functions of INV_CTL drive operation control command and INV_I O drive I O control command Restart the drive after you change this setting 0000h 0000h FFFFh 848 F6 25 03C9 MECHATROLINK Watchdog Error Sel Sets the method to stop the motor or let the motor continue operating when the dri...

Page 539: ...s 8 1 Mbps 0 0 8 850 F6 45 02FB BACnet Node Address Sets the node address for BACnet communication Note Set a node address that is unique Do not set this parameter to a value of 0 1 0 127 850 F6 46 02FC BACnet Baud Rate Sets the BACnet communications speed 0 1200 bps 1 2400 bps 2 4800 bps 3 9600 bps 4 19 2 kbps 5 38 4 kbps 6 57 6 kbps 7 76 8 kbps 8 115 2 kbps 3 0 8 850 F6 47 02FD Rx to Tx Wait Tim...

Page 540: ...eNet communication 0 15 15 852 F6 57 03D8 DeviceNet Current Scaling Sets the current scale of the DeviceNet communication master 0 15 15 852 F6 58 03D9 DeviceNet Torque Scaling Sets the torque scale of the DeviceNet communication master 0 15 15 852 F6 59 03DA DeviceNet Power Scaling Sets the power scale of the DeviceNet communication master 0 15 15 852 F6 60 03DB DeviceNet Voltage Scaling Sets the...

Page 541: ...e IP Address Be sure to set a different IP address for each drive on the network Also set parameters F7 01 to F7 12 168 0 255 854 F7 03 03E7 IP Address 3 Sets the third octet of the IP Address for the device that is connecting to the network Restart the drive after you change this parameter Note When F7 13 0 Address Mode at Startup Static Use parameters F7 01 to F7 04 IPAddress 4 to set the IP Add...

Page 542: ...F Gateway Address 3 Sets the third octet of the gateway address of the connected network Note Set this parameter when F7 13 0 Address Mode at Startup Static 1 0 255 855 F7 12 03F0 Gateway Address 4 Sets the fourth octet of the gateway address of the connected network Note Set this parameter when F7 13 0 Address Mode at Startup Static 1 0 255 856 F7 13 03F1 Address Mode at Startup Sets the method t...

Page 543: ...Param 1 to 10 for CommCard Sets Output Assembly 116 The drive writes the values from Output Assembly 116 to the MEMOBUS Modbus address register that is stored for each parameter The drive will not write the values from Output Assembly 116 to the registers when the MEMOBUS Modbus address is 0 0 858 F7 33 to F7 42 0375 037E Dynamic In Param 1 to 10 for CommCard Sets Input Assembly 166 The drive send...

Page 544: ...PO input functions as the HIW when F7 71 0 0 860 F7 72 078C PZD3 Read Sets the MEMOBUS Modbus address for PZD3 PPO Read A value of 0 will disable the PZD3 PPO input load operation from the MEMOBUS Modbus register 0 860 F7 73 078D PZD4 Read Sets the MEMOBUS Modbus address for PZD4 PPO Read A value of 0 will disable the PZD4 PPO input load operation from the MEMOBUS Modbus register 0 860 F7 74 078E ...

Page 545: ...for PZD9 PPO Read A value of 0 will disable the PZD9 PPO input load operation from the MEMOBUS Modbus register 0 861 F7 79 0793 PZD10 Read Sets the MEMOBUS Modbus address for PZD10 PPO Read A value of 0 will disable the PZD10 PPO input load operation from the MEMOBUS Modbus register 0 861 V f CL V f OLV CLV AOLV OLV PM OLV PM AOLV PM CLV PM EZOLV V f CL V f OLV CLV AOLV OLV PM OLV PM AOLV PM CLV P...

Page 546: ...the second function for MFDI terminal S2 F 1 19F 864 H1 23 0B72 Terminal S3 Function Select 2 Sets the second function for MFDI terminal S3 F 1 19F 865 H1 24 0B73 Terminal S4 Function Select 2 Sets the second function for MFDI terminal S4 F 1 19F 865 H1 25 0B74 Terminal S5 Function Select 2 Sets the second function for MFDI terminal S5 F 1 19F 865 H1 26 0B75 Terminal S6 Function Select 2 Sets the ...

Page 547: ... C1 03 C1 04 868 8 Baseblock Command N O Sets the command that stops drive output and coasts the motor to stop when the input is ON ON Baseblock drive output stop OFF Normal operation 868 9 Baseblock Command N C Sets the command that stops drive output and coasts the motor to stop when the input terminal is OFF ON Normal operation OFF Baseblock drive output stop 869 A Accel Decel Ramp Hold Momenta...

Page 548: ... input terminal is ON while the drive is operating 873 16 Motor 2 Selection Sets the command for the drive to operate motor 1 or motor 2 Stop the motors before switching ON Operate motor 2 OFF Operate motor 1 873 17 Fast Stop N C Sets the command to ramp to stop in the deceleration time set in C1 09 Fast Stop Time when the input terminal is ON while the drive is operating 874 18 Timer Function Set...

Page 549: ...77 35 PID Input Error Invert Sets the command to turn the terminal ON and OFF to switch the PID input level polarity 877 3E PID Setpoint Selection 1 Set this function and H1 xx 3F PID Setpoint Selection 2 together Sets the function to switch the PID setpoint to b5 58 to b5 60 PID Setpoint 2 to 4 878 3F PID Setpoint Selection 2 Set this function and H1 xx 3E PID Setpoint Selection 1 together Sets t...

Page 550: ...Offset Frequency 3 to the frequency reference when the terminal activates 879 47 Node Setup CANopen Sets the function in CANopen communications to start the Node Setup function to set the drive node address from the host controller 879 60 DC Injection Braking Command Sets the command to use DC Injection Braking to stop the motor Note When A1 02 8 Control Method Selection EZ Open Loop Vector Contro...

Page 551: ...2 Bias Upper Limit Lower Limit 884 77 ASR Gain C5 03 Select Sets the function to switch the ASR proportional gain set in C5 01 ASR Proportional Gain 1 and C5 03 ASR Proportional Gain 1 2 ON C5 03 OFF C5 01 884 78 Analog TorqueRef Polarity Invert Sets the rotation direction of the external torque reference ON External torque reference reverse direction OFF External torque reference forward directio...

Page 552: ...ion of the selected MFDI to operate inversely To select the function enter 1xx where the xx is the function setting value Note You cannot use inverse input for all functions Refer to Table 11 59 for more information 886 H2 Digital Outputs No Hex Name Description Default Range Ref H2 01 040B Term M1 M2 Function Selection Sets the function for MFDO terminal M1 M2 Note Set this parameter to F when th...

Page 553: ...lay time for comparator 1 0 0 s 0 0 600 0 s 891 H2 25 1545 Comparator 1 Off Delay Time Sets the off delay time for comparator 1 0 0 s 0 0 600 0 s 891 H2 26 1546 Comparator 2 Monitor Selection Sets the monitor number for comparator 2 Set the x xx part of the Ux xx Monitor For example set x xx to 102 to monitor U1 02 Output Frequency 103 000 999 892 H2 27 1547 Comparator 2 Lower Limit Sets the lower...

Page 554: ...7 894 H2 60 1B46 Expert Term M1 M2 Secondary Function Selects the second function for terminal M1 M2 The logical calculation results of the terminals assigned to functions by H2 01 Term M1 M2 Function Selection is output F 0 A7 895 H2 61 1B47 Expert Terminal M1 M2 Logical Operation Sets the logical operation for the functions set in H2 01 Term M1 M2 Function Selection and H2 60 Term M1 M2 Secondar...

Page 555: ...896 1 Zero Speed The terminal activates when the output frequency is less than the value of E1 09 Minimum Output Frequency or b2 01 DC Injection Zero SpeedThreshold Note A1 02 Control Method Selection selects which parameter is the reference A1 02 Setting Control Method Parameter Used as the Reference 0 V f E1 09 1 CL V f E1 09 2 OLV b2 01 3 CLV E1 09 4 AOLV E1 09 5 OLV PM E1 09 6 AOLV PM E1 09 7 ...

Page 556: ...05 Undervoltage Detect Level Uv1 The terminal also turns on when there is a fault with the DC bus voltage ON The DC bus voltage is less than the setting value of L2 05 OFF The DC bus voltage is more than the setting value of L2 05 899 8 During Baseblock N O The terminal turns on during baseblock When the drive is in baseblock the drive output transistor stops switching and the drive will not make ...

Page 557: ... stays off until the output frequency is at the value of L4 03 Note The detection level set with L4 03 is a signed value The drive will only detect in one direction The drive uses the motor speed as the reference in CLVand CLV PM ON The output frequency is less than the value of L4 03 or is not higher than the value of L4 03 L4 04 OFF The output frequency is higher than the value of L4 03 L4 04 90...

Page 558: ...fault or RUN READY 905 22 Mechanical Weakening Detection The terminal activates when the drive detects mechanical weakening 905 2F Maintenance Notification The terminal activates when drive components are at their estimated maintenance period Tells the user about the maintenance period for these items IGBT Cooling fan Capacitor Soft charge bypass relay 905 30 During Torque Limit The terminal activ...

Page 559: ...ing fan failure in the drive 909 61 Pole Position Detection Complete The terminal activates when drive receives a Run command and the drive detects the motor magnetic pole position of the PM motor 909 62 Modbus Reg 1 Status Satisfied The terminal activates when the bit specified by H2 08 Modbus Register 1 Bit Select for the MEMOBUS register address set with H2 07 Modbus Register 1 Address Select a...

Page 560: ... 0 to 10V Lower Limit at 0 1 10 to 10V Bipolar Reference 2 4 to 20 mA 3 0 to 20 mA 0 0 3 913 H3 02 0434 Terminal A1 Function Selection Sets a function for MFAI terminal A1 0 0 32 913 H3 03 0411 RUN Terminal A1 Gain Setting Sets the gain of the analog signal input to MFAI terminal A1 100 0 999 9 999 9 913 H3 04 0412 RUN Terminal A1 Bias Setting Sets the bias of the analog signal input to MFAI termi...

Page 561: ...g signals input to terminal A3 Usually it is not necessary to change this setting 0 500 500 917 H3 40 0B5C Mbus Reg 15C1h Input Function Sets the MEMOBUS AI1 function F 4 2F 917 H3 41 0B5F Mbus Reg 15C2h Input Function Sets the MEMOBUS AI2 function F 4 2F 917 H3 42 0B62 Mbus Reg 15C3h Input Function Sets the MEMOBUS AI3 function F 4 2F 917 H3 43 117F Mbus Reg Inputs FilterTime Const Sets the time ...

Page 562: ...or if the current value when the 10 V or 20 mA analog signal is input is 100 921 F Not Used Value for terminals that are not being used or terminals being used in through mode 921 10 Forward Torque Limit Enters the forward torque limit if the motor rated torque is 100 921 11 Reverse Torque Limit Enters the load torque limit if the motor rated torque is 100 922 12 Regenerative Torque Limit Enters t...

Page 563: ...ut Select Sets the monitoring number to be output from the MFAO terminal AM Set the x xx part of the Ux xx Monitor For example set H4 04 to 102 to monitor U1 02 Output Frequency 103 000 999 925 H4 05 0421 RUN Terminal AM Analog Output Gain Sets the gain of the monitor signal that is sent from MFAO terminal AM When an output for monitoring items is 0 this parameter sets the analog signal output lev...

Page 564: ... the parameter setting 0 1200 bps 1 2400 bps 2 4800 bps 3 9600 bps 4 19 2 kbps 5 38 4 kbps 6 57 6 kbps 7 76 8 kbps 8 115 2 kbps 3 0 8 927 H5 03 0427 Communication Parity Selection Sets the communications parity used for MEMOBUS Modbus communications Note Restart the drive after you change the parameter setting 0 No parity 1 Even parity 2 Odd parity 0 0 2 928 H5 04 0428 Communication Error Stop Met...

Page 565: ...otor speed during MEMOBUS Modbus communications or with a communication option 0 ms 0 100 ms 930 H5 20 0B57 Communication Parameters Reload Sets the function to immediately enable updated MEMOBUS Modbus communications parameters 0 Reload at Next Power Cycle 1 Reload Now 0 0 1 930 H5 25 1589 RUN Function 5A Register 1 Selection Returns the contents of the specified MEMOBUS Modbus communications reg...

Page 566: ...uency Sets the minimum frequency of the pulse train signal that terminal RP can detect 0 5 Hz 0 1 1000 0 Hz 934 H6 09 156E Voltage Phase Sync MP Selection Set whether to output the pulse synchronized with drive output voltage phase from the pulse train monitor output terminal MP This parameter is only enabled when H6 06 102 Terminal MP Monitor Selection Output Frequency and H6 07 0 Terminal MP Fre...

Page 567: ...37 H7 31 1178 RUN Expert Virtual Analog Input Gain Sets the virtual analog input gain 100 0 999 9 999 9 937 H7 32 1179 RUN Expert Virtual Analog Input Bias Sets the virtual analog input bias 0 0 999 9 999 9 937 H7 40 1163 Virtual Analog Out Signal Select Sets the signal level of the virtual analog output 0 0 to 100 Absolute Value 1 100 to 100 2 0 to 100 Lower Limit at 0 0 0 2 937 H7 41 1164 Virtua...

Page 568: ...PTC Input detection level 0 Ramp to Stop 1 Coast to Stop 2 Fast Stop Use C1 09 1 0 2 281 L1 05 0484 Motor Thermistor Filter Time Sets the primary delay time constant for the PTC input signal entered to the drive This parameter prevents accidental motor overheat faults 0 20 s 0 00 10 00 s 944 L1 08 1103 oL1 Current Level Sets the reference current for the motor 1 thermal overload detection Note Whe...

Page 569: ...y set this value 0 0 s 0 0 to 6000 0 s 953 L2 07 048B Expert Kinetic Energy Backup Accel Time Sets the acceleration time to return the frequency to the frequency reference before a power loss after canceling KEB operation 0 0 s 0 0 to 6000 0 s 953 L2 08 048C Expert Frequency Gain at KEB Start Sets the quantity of output frequency reduction used when KEB operation starts as a percentage of the moto...

Page 570: ...rive will use to prevent overvoltage faults when decelerating Note 1 To connect a dynamic braking option braking resistor or braking resistor unit to the drive set this parameter to 0 or 3 Parameter values 1 2 4 and 5 will enable Stall Prevention function during deceleration and the dynamic braking option will not function 2 The setting range changes when the A1 02 Control Method Selection value c...

Page 571: ...6 01 E2 11 and E5 01 0 001 10 000 s 962 L3 25 046F Expert Load Inertia Ratio Sets the ratio between motor inertia and machine inertia 1 0 1 0 1000 0 963 L3 26 0455 Expert Additional DC Bus Capacitors Sets the capacity for external main circuit capacitors Sets this parameter when you use the KEB Ride Thru function Usually it is not necessary to change this setting 0 μF 0 to 65000 μF 963 L3 27 0456 ...

Page 572: ... the level to detect speed agree or motor speed Sets the level to detect speed agree or motor speed when H2 01 to H2 03 13 14 15 16 MFDO Function Select Speed Agree 2 User set Speed Agree 2 Frequency Detection 3 Frequency Detection 4 Determined by A1 02 Determined by A1 02 966 L4 04 049C Speed Agree Detection Width Sets the width to detect speed agree or motor speed Sets the width to detect speed ...

Page 573: ...n for Uv1 ov oH1 and GF From left to right the digits set Uv1 ov oH1 and GF in order 0 Disabled 1 Enabled GF 1111 0000 1111 968 L6 Torque Detection No Hex Name Description Default Range Ref L6 01 04A1 Torque Detection Selection 1 Sets the speed range that detects overtorque and undertorque and the operation of drives operation status after detection 0 Disabled 1 oL Speed Agree Alarm only 2 oL RUN ...

Page 574: ...peed level as a percentage where the drive will operate the mechanical deterioration detection function with E1 04 Maximum Output Frequency is the 100 value 110 0 110 0 110 0 974 L6 10 046A Mech Fatigue Detect Delay Time Sets the time for mechanical deterioration detection 0 1 s 0 0 10 0 s 974 L6 11 046B Mech Fatigue Hold Off Time Sets the time that the drive will start mechanical deterioration de...

Page 575: ...arm Level Sets the oH detection level Determined by o2 04 and C6 01 50 150 C 978 L8 03 04AF Overheat Pre Alarm Selection Sets operation after the drive detects an oH alarm 0 Ramp to Stop 1 Coast to Stop 2 Fast Stop Use C1 09 3 Alarm Only 4 Operate at Reduced Speed L8 19 3 0 4 978 L8 05 04B1 Input Phase Loss Protection Sel Sets the function to enable and disable input phase loss detection 0 Disable...

Page 576: ...aused by too much current 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 0 0 1 981 L8 19 04BF Freq Reduction oH Pre Alarm Sets the ratio at which the drive derates the frequency reference when during an oH alarm 0 8 0 1 to 0 9 981 L8 20 04C0 Expert Control Fault Step Out Detect Sets operation after the drive detects a CF fault when A1 02 4 Control Method Selection Advanced Open Loop Vector 0 Disabled 1 CF STPo Detection En...

Page 577: ...tion for STPo Desynchronization Error 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 1 0 1 985 L8 55 045F Internal DB TransistorProtec tion Sets the protection function for the internal braking transistor 0 Disable 1 Protection Enabled 1 0 1 985 L8 56 047D Expert Stall P Accel Activation Time Sets the length time that the acceleration stall prevention function can continue to operate before the drive detects an STPo Desync...

Page 578: ...t Low Speed Pull out Amount Sets the average count of LSo Low Speed Motor Step Out detections 10 times 1 50 times 986 L9 Drive Protection 2 No Hex Name Description Default Range Ref L9 16 11DC Expert FAn1 Detect Time Sets the detection time for FAn1 Drive Cooling Fan Failure Yaskawa recommends that you do not change this parameter value 4 0 s 0 0 30 0 s 986 V f CL V f OLV CLV AOLV OLV PM OLV PM AO...

Page 579: ... Enabled 0 0 1 988 n1 14 1B5A Expert DC Bus Stabilization Time Sets a length of time for the drive to suppress oscillation in relation to the DC bus voltage Set n1 13 1 DC Bus Stabilization Control Enabled to enable this parameter 100 0 ms 50 0 500 0 ms 988 n1 15 0BF8 Expert PWM Voltage Offset Calibration Sets the calibration method that the drive uses to decrease torque current ripple 0 No Calibr...

Page 580: ...output frequency at the minimum output frequency set in E1 09 1 0 s 0 0 10 0 s 992 n3 04 058B Expert HSB Overload Time Sets the time used to detect oL7 High Slip Braking Overload which occurs when the output frequency does not change during high slip braking Usually it is not necessary to change this setting 40 s 30 1200 s 992 n3 13 0531 OverexcitationBrak ing OEB Gain Sets the gain value that the...

Page 581: ...stimation gain for these parameters n4 63 Speed EstimateResponse High Freq n4 64 Speed Estimate Response Low Freq n4 65 Flux Estimate Response High Freq n4 66 Flux Estimate Response Low Freq Usually it is not necessary to change this setting 6 00 Hz 0 00 E1 04 995 n4 68 1B88 Speed Estimation Filter Time Sets the primary delay time constant for the speed estimation value Usually it is not necessary...

Page 582: ...t necessary to change this setting 1 0 0 1 50 0 1000 n6 11 1B56 Expert Online Resistance Tuning Sets the responsiveness for online resistor tuning Set this parameter to approximately 1 000 to enable the function The function is disabled when the value is 0 000 0 000 0 000 1 000 1000 n7 EZ Drive No Hex Name Description Default Range Ref n7 01 3111 Expert Damping Gain for Low Frequency Sets the osci...

Page 583: ... Compensation Gain 3 Sets the gain for speed estimation Usually it is not necessary to change this setting 1 000 0 000 10 000 1003 n8 15 054E Expert Polarity Compensation Gain 4 Sets the gain for speed estimation Usually it is not necessary to change this setting 0 500 0 000 10 000 1003 n8 21 0554 Expert Motor Back EMF Ke Gain Sets the gain for speed estimation Usually it is not necessary to chang...

Page 584: ... Sets the time constant that the drive uses when adjusting for voltage errors 1 00 s 0 00 10 00 s 1005 n8 55 056E Motor to Load Inertia Ratio Sets the ratio between motor inertia and machine inertia 0 Below 1 10 1 Between 1 10 and 1 30 2 Between 1 30 and 1 50 3 Beyond 1 50 0 0 3 1006 n8 57 0574 HFI Overlap Selection Sets the function that detects motor speed with high frequency injection 0 Disable...

Page 585: ...drive will use the value set in n8 51 Pull in Current Acceleration 0 0 200 1008 n8 84 02D3 Expert Polarity Detection Current Sets the current that the drive uses to estimate the initial motor magnetic pole as a percentage where E5 03 PM Motor Rated Current FLA 100 100 0 150 1008 n8 94 012D Expert Flux Position Estimation Method Sets the criteria that the drive uses to find changes in speed or load...

Page 586: ...rast of the LCD display on the keypad 5 0 10 1013 o1 10 0520 User Units Maximum Value Sets the value that the drive shows as the maximum output frequency Determined by o1 03 1 60000 1013 o1 11 0521 User Units Decimal Position Sets the number of decimal places for frequency reference and monitor values 0 No Decimal Places XXXXX 1 One Decimal Places XXXX X 2 Two Decimal Places XXX XX 3 Three Decimal...

Page 587: ...onitor Area Selection Sets the horizontal axis used to show the monitor that was set in o1 26 as a bar graph This parameter is only available with an LCD keypad 0 Area o1 46 o1 46 1 Area 0 o1 46 2 Area o1 46 0 0 0 2 1016 o1 46 11C6 RUN 3rd Monitor Area Setting Sets the horizontal axis value used to display the monitor that was set in o1 26 Custom Monitor 3 as a bar graph This parameter is only ava...

Page 588: ... the drive with the button on the keypad when the Run command source for the drive is REMOTE external and not assigned to the keypad 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 1 0 1 1018 o2 03 0507 User Parameter Default Value Sets the function to keep the settings of changed parameters as user parameter defaults to use during initialization 0 No change 1 Set defaults 2 Clear all 0 0 2 1018 o2 04 0508 Drive Model KVA S...

Page 589: ...run when it is operating from one 24 V external power supply 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 0 0 1 1021 o2 27 1565 bCE Detection Selection Sets drive operation if the Bluetooth device is disconnected when you operate the drive in Bluetooth Mode 0 Ramp to Stop 1 Coast to Stop 2 Fast Stop Use C1 09 3 Alarm Only 4 No Alarm Display 3 0 4 1021 o3 Copy Function No Hex Name Description Default Range Ref o3 01 0515 ...

Page 590: ...eration time in 10 hour units 0 h 0 9999 h 1023 o4 02 050C Elapsed Operating Time Selection Sets the condition that counts the cumulative operation time 0 U4 01 Shows Total Power up Time 1 U4 01 Shows Total RUN Time 0 0 1 1023 o4 03 050E Fan Operation Time Setting Sets the value from which to start the cumulative drive cooling fan operation time in 10 hour units 0 h 0 9999 h 1023 o4 05 051D Capaci...

Page 591: ...nterval Sets the data log sampling cycle This parameter is only available on an LCD keypad 1000 ms 100 6000 ms 1029 o5 03 1553 RUN Log Monitor Data 1 Sets the data log monitor This parameter is only available on an LCD keypad 101 000 101 855 1029 o5 04 1554 RUN Log Monitor Data 2 Sets the data log monitor This parameter is only available on an LCD keypad 102 000 101 855 1029 o5 05 1555 RUN Log Mon...

Page 592: ...ts the data log monitor This parameter is only available on an LCD keypad 000 000 101 855 1031 o5 11 155B RUN Log Monitor Data 9 Sets the data log monitor This parameter is only available on an LCD keypad 000 000 101 855 1031 o5 12 155C RUN Log Monitor Data 10 Sets the data log monitor This parameter is only available on an LCD keypad 000 000 101 855 1031 V f CL V f OLV CLV AOLV OLV PM OLV PM AOLV...

Page 593: ...l 593 10 14 q DriveWorksEZ Parameters q1 01 to q8 40 Reserved for DriveWorksEZ No Hex Name Description Default Range q1 01 to q8 40 1600 to 17E7 Reserved for DriveWorksEZ These parameters are reserved for use with DriveWorksEZ Refer to DriveWorksEZ Operation Manual V f CL V f OLV CLV AOLV OLV PM OLV PM AOLV PM CLV PM EZOLV ...

Page 594: ...ection 1 20 r1 01 to r1 40 DriveWorksEZ Connection Parameters 1 to 20 Upper Lower No Hex Name Description Default Range r1 01 to r1 40 1840 to 1867 DriveWorksEZ Connection Parameters 1 to 20 Upper Lower DriveWorksEZ Connection Parameters 1 to 20 Upper Lower 0 0 FFFFH V f CL V f OLV CLV AOLV OLV PM OLV PM AOLV PM CLV PM EZOLV ...

Page 595: ...55 5 V 400 V Class 0 0 511 0 V 1033 T1 04 0704 Motor Rated Current Sets the rated current A of the motor Determined by o2 04 10 to 200 of the drive rated current 1033 T1 05 0705 Motor Base Frequency Sets the base frequency Hz of the motor 50 0 Hz 0 0 590 0 Hz 1033 T1 06 0706 Number of Motor Poles Sets the number of motor poles 4 2 48 1034 T1 07 0707 Motor Base Speed Sets the motor base speed for A...

Page 596: ... A1 02 1035 T2 02 0751 PM Motor Code Selection Sets the PM motor code for drives operating SMRA SSR1 or SST4 series Yaskawa PM motors Determined by A1 02 and o2 04 0000 FFFF 1036 T2 03 0752 PM Motor Type Sets the type of PM motor the drive will operate 0 IPM motor 1 SPM motor 1 0 1 1036 T2 04 0730 PM Motor Rated Power Sets the rated output power kW of a PM motor Determined by o2 04 and C6 01 0 00 ...

Page 597: ...pulse offset Δθ pulse generator encoder that is listed on the motor nameplate 0 0 180 0 180 0 1038 T3 ASR and Inertia Tuning No Hex Name Description Default Range Ref T3 00 1198 Control Loop Tuning Selection Sets the type of Control Auto Tuning 0 Inertia Tuning 1 ASR Speed Regulator 2 Deceleration Rate Tuning 3 KEB Tuning Note Settings 0 and 1 are available only when A1 02 3 7 Control Method Selec...

Page 598: ...4 05 3134 Motor Rated Frequency Sets the rated frequency Hz of the motor Determined by E9 01 and o2 04 40 0 120 0 Hz 1040 T4 06 3135 Motor Rated Voltage Sets the rated voltage V of the motor 200 V Class 200 0 V 400 V Class 400 0 V 200 V Class 0 0 255 0 V 400 V Class 0 0 510 0 V 1040 T4 07 3136 Motor Rated Current Sets the rated current A of the motor Determined by o2 04 and C6 01 10 to 200 of the ...

Page 599: ... Open Loop Vector 7 PM Closed Loop Vector 8 EZ Vector Control No signal output available U1 05 0044 Motor Speed Shows the actual detected motor speed Parameter o1 03 Frequency Display Unit Selection selects the units Unit 0 01 Hz 10 V Max frequency 10 V to 10 V U1 06 0045 Output Voltage Ref Shows the output voltage reference Unit 0 1 V 200 V class 10 V 200 Vrms 400 V class 10 V 400 Vrms U1 07 0046...

Page 600: ...e U1 12 shows 00000101 during run with the Reverse Run command bit 0 During run bit 1 During zero speed bit 2 During reverse bit 3 During fault reset signal input bit 4 During speed agreement bit 5 Drive ready bit 6 During minor fault detection bit 7 During fault detection No signal output available U1 13 004E Terminal A1 Level Shows the signal level of terminal A1 Unit 0 1 10 V 100 10 V to 10 V U...

Page 601: ...00 10 V to 10 V U1 24 007D Input Pulse Monitor Shows the frequency to pulse train input terminal RP Unit 1 Hz Determined by H6 02 U1 25 004D SoftwareNumber Flash Shows the FLASH ID No signal output available U1 26 005B SoftwareNumber ROM Shows the ROM ID No signal output available U1 50 1199 Expert Virtual Analog Input Shows the virtual analog input value Determined by H7 40 U1 91 154E Expert Outp...

Page 602: ...ed most recently Use U1 05 Motor Speed to monitor the actual motor speed Unit 0 01 Hz No signal output available U2 07 0086 Output Voltage Fault Shows the output voltage reference at the fault that occurred most recently Use U1 06 Output Voltage Ref to monitor the actual output voltage reference Unit 0 1 V No signal output available U2 08 0087 DC Bus Voltage Fault Shows the DC bus voltage at the f...

Page 603: ... relay MA MB MC No signal output available U2 13 008C Operation Status Fault Shows the operation status of the drive at the most recent fault where 1 ON and 0 OFF For example U2 13 shows 00000001 during run Use U1 12 Drive Status to monitor the actual drive status bit 0 During run bit 1 During zero speed bit 2 During reverse bit 3 During fault reset signal input bit 4 During speed agreement bit 5 ...

Page 604: ...essive current bit 1 Induced voltage deviation bit 2 d axis current deviation bit 3 Motor lock at startup bit 4 Acceleration stall continue bit 5 Acceleration stall repeat bit 6 Not used normal value of 0 bit 7 Not used normal value of 0 No signal output available U3 Fault History No Hex Name Description MFAO Signal Level Ref U3 01 to U3 10 0090 0093 0804 0809 1st to 10th MostRecent Fault Shows th...

Page 605: ...hen resets and starts counting again from 0 Unit 1 h Note The MEMOBUS Modbus communication data is shown in 10 h units Use register 009BH for data in 1 h units No signal output available U4 04 007E Cool Fan Maintenance Shows the cumulative operation time of the cooling fans as a percentage of the replacement life of the cooling fans Use parameter o4 03 Fan Operation Time Setting to reset this moni...

Page 606: ...e for 12345678 9 kWh U4 10 678 9 kWh U4 11 12345 MWh No signal output available U4 11 005D kWh Upper 5 Digits Shows the upper 5 digits of the watt hour value for the drive Unit 1 MWh Note Monitor U4 11 shows the upper 5 digits and U4 10 kWh Lower 4 Digits shows the lower 4 digits Example for 12345678 9 kWh U4 10 678 9 kWh U4 11 12345 MWh No signal output available U4 13 07CF Peak Hold Current Show...

Page 607: ...lection status 1 b1 01 Frequency Reference Selection 1 2 b1 15 Frequency Reference Selection 2 Y nn Frequency reference source 0 01 Keypad d1 01 Reference 1 1 00 Analog input unassigned 1 01 MFAI terminal A1 1 02 MFAI terminal A2 1 03 MFAI terminal A3 2 02 to 2 17 Multi step speed reference d1 02 to d1 17 Reference 2 to 16 Jog Reference 3 01 MEMOBUS Modbus communications 4 01 Communication option ...

Page 608: ...g the MFDI terminal Or the motor has ramped to stop by pressing the STOP key on the keypad 06 b1 17 0 Run Command at Power Up Disregard Existing RUN Command is set 07 During baseblock while coast to stop with timer 08 Frequency reference is below E1 09 Minimum Output Frequency during baseblock 09 Waiting for the Enter command from PLC No signal output The keypad shows the Run command source as XY ...

Page 609: ...4 24 Number of Runs Low shows the lower 4 digits No signal output available U4 52 1592 Torque Ref from Comm Displays the torque reference given to the drive via a serial communication option card or via MEMOBUS Modbus communications as a decimal number Unit 0 1 No signal output available U5 PID Monitors No Hex Name Description MFAO Signal Level Ref U5 01 0057 PID Feedback Shows the PID control fee...

Page 610: ...current 10 V to 10 V U6 02 0052 Id ExcitationCurrent Shows the value calculated for the motor excitation current as a percentage of the motor rated secondary current d axis Unit 0 1 10 V Motor secondary rated current 10 V to 10 V U6 03 0054 ASR Input Shows the ASR input value as a percentage of the maximum frequency Unit 0 01 10 V Maximum frequency 10 V to 10 V U6 04 0055 ASR Output Shows the ASR ...

Page 611: ...mber of pulses for speed detection PG2 Unit 1 pulse 10 V 65536 U6 20 07D4 UP DOWN 2 Bias Value Shows the bias value used to adjust the frequency reference Unit 0 1 10 V Maximum Frequency U6 21 07D5 Offset Frequency Shows the total value of d7 01 to d7 03 Offset Frequency 1 to 3 selected with Add Offset Frequency 1 to 3 H1 xx 44 to 46 Unit 0 1 10 V Maximum Frequency U6 22 0062 ZeroServo Pulse Move ...

Page 612: ...87 07B4 to 07B7 Online Subnets 1 to 4 Shows the currently available subnet mask U6 84 1st octet U6 85 2nd octet U6 86 3rd octet U6 87 4th octet No signal output available U6 88 to U6 91 07B8 07B9 07F0 07F1 Online Gateways 1 to 4 Shows the currently available gateway address U6 88 1st octet U6 89 2nd octet U6 90 3rd octet U6 91 4th octet No signal output available U6 92 07F2 Online Speed Shows the ...

Page 613: ...put available U8 21 to U8 25 1964 1968 DWEZ Monitors 21 to 25 Shows DriveWorksEZ User Monitors 21 to 25 0 01 10 V 100 U8 31 to U8 40 196E 1977 DWEZ Monitors 31 to 40 Shows DriveWorksEZ User Monitors 31 to 40 0 01 10 V 100 U8 51 to U8 55 1982 1986 DWEZ Monitors 51 to 55 Shows DriveWorksEZ User Monitors 51 to 55 0 01 10 V 100 V f CL V f OLV CLV AOLV OLV PM OLV PM AOLV PM CLV PM EZOLV V f CL V f OLV ...

Page 614: ...0 50 b3 01 Speed Search at Start Selection 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 b3 14 Bi directional Speed Search 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 b5 15 PID Sleep Function Start Level 0 0 400 0 0 1 Hz 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 b6 01 Dwell Reference at Start 0 0 400 0 0 1 Hz 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 b6 03 Dwell Reference at Stop 0 0 400 0 0 1 Hz 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 b8 02 Energy Saving Gain 0 0 10 0 0 1 0 7 1 0 1 0 b8 03 Energy Saving Filter Time ...

Page 615: ...0 0 0 1 Hz 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 d3 04 Jump Frequency Width 0 0 20 0 0 1 Hz 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 d5 02 Torque Reference Delay Time 0 1000 1 ms 0 0 E1 04 Maximum Output Frequency 40 0 400 0 3 4 0 1 Hz 60 0 5 60 0 5 60 0 60 0 60 0 E1 05 Maximum Output Voltage 0 0 255 0 6 0 1 V 200 0 5 200 0 5 200 0 200 0 200 0 E1 06 Base Frequency 0 0 400 0 4 0 1 Hz 60 0 5 60 0 5 60 0 60 0 60 0 E1 07 Mid Point A Freque...

Page 616: ...0 50 0 50 n1 15 PWM Voltage Offset Calibration 0 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 o1 03 Frequency Display Unit Selection 0 3 1 0 0 0 0 0 o1 04 V f Pattern Display Unit 0 1 1 0 0 1 Drive models 2211 to 2415 and 4103 to 4675 use these default settings when C6 01 1 Normal Heavy Duty Selection Normal Duty Rating Drive models 2257 to 2415 4140 to 4675 use these default settings when C6 01 0 Heavy Duty Rating A1 02 2 Open...

Page 617: ...nergy Saving Filter Time 0 00 10 00 0 01 s C1 11 Accel Decel Time Switchover Freq 0 0 400 0 1 0 1 0 0 Hz 0 0 0 0 0 0 C2 01 S Curve Time Start of Accel 0 00 10 00 0 01 s 1 00 0 20 0 20 1 00 C3 01 Slip Compensation Gain 0 0 2 5 0 1 Determined by E9 01 C3 02 Slip Compensation Delay Time 0 10000 1 ms 200 C4 01 Torque Compensation Gain 0 00 2 50 0 01 0 00 0 00 C4 02 Torque Compensation Delay Time 0 100...

Page 618: ... 0 0 E1 10 Minimum Output Voltage 0 0 255 0 4 0 1 V F1 01 Encoder 1 Pulse Count PPR 0 60000 1 ppr 1024 1024 1024 600 F1 05 Encoder 1 Rotation Selection 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 F1 09 Overspeed Detection Delay Time 0 0 2 0 0 1 s 0 0 H4 20 Analog Power Monitor 100 Level 0 00 650 00 0 01 Determined by E5 01 Determined by E5 01 Determined by E5 01 Determined by E9 07 L1 01 Motor Overload oL1 Protection 0 4 1 4 4...

Page 619: ...election 0 3 1 0 1 1 1 o1 04 V f Pattern Display Unit 0 1 1 1 1 1 The setting range is 0 0 to 100 0 when A1 02 6 or 7 PM Advanced Open Loop Vector or PM Closed Loop Vector 2 The setting range is 0 0 to 40 0 when A1 02 6 or 7 PM Advanced Open Loop Vector or PM Closed Loop Vector 3 The default setting varies depending on the setting of C6 01 Normal Heavy Duty Selection 4 This is the value for 200 V ...

Page 620: ... 02 20 00 C5 24 Motor 2 ASR Integral Time 2 I 0 000 to 10 000 0 001 s 0 050 0 500 C5 26 Motor 2 ASR Delay Time 0 000 to 0 500 0 001 s 0 004 E3 04 Motor 2 Maximum Output Frequency 40 0 to 590 0 0 1 Hz 60 0 60 0 60 0 60 0 E3 05 Motor 2 Maximum Output Voltage 0 0 to 255 0 1 0 1 V 200 0 200 0 200 0 200 0 E3 06 Motor 2 Base Frequency 0 0 to 590 0 0 1 Hz 60 0 60 0 60 0 60 0 E3 07 Motor 2 Mid Point A Fre...

Page 621: ...se values are the default settings for E1 04 through E1 10 and E3 04 through E3 10 V f Pattern for Motor 2 These settings are the same as those for the V f pattern when E1 03 1 Constant Trq_60Hz base_60Hz max 2 The default setting varies depending on the setting of E5 01 Motor Code Selection 3 This is the value for 200 V class drives Double the value for 400 V class drives Table 10 2 Parameters Ch...

Page 622: ...200 0 200 0 200 0 200 0 1 200 0 200 0 2 2 2 E1 06 Hz 50 0 60 0 50 0 60 0 50 0 50 0 60 0 60 0 50 0 50 0 60 0 60 0 60 0 60 0 60 0 50 0 1 50 0 50 0 2 2 2 E1 07 Hz 2 5 3 0 3 0 3 0 25 0 25 0 30 0 30 0 2 5 2 5 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 2 5 1 3 0 0 0 E1 08 3 V 12 0 12 0 12 0 12 0 35 0 50 0 35 0 50 0 15 0 20 0 15 0 20 0 12 0 12 0 12 0 12 0 1 13 2 0 0 E1 09 Hz 1 3 1 5 1 5 1 5 1 3 1 3 1 5 1 5 1 3 1 3 1 5 1 5 1 5 ...

Page 623: ... 06 Speed Estimation Current Level 1 1 1 0 5 0 5 0 5 0 5 b3 08 Speed Estimation ACR P Gain 0 5 0 5 0 5 0 5 0 5 0 5 b3 26 Direction Determina tion Level 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 b8 03 Energy Saving Filter Time s 0 50 0 50 0 50 0 50 0 50 0 50 b8 04 Energy Saving Coefficient Value 288 2 223 7 223 7 196 6 169 4 156 8 C5 17 C5 37 Motor Inertia kgm2 0 0015 0 0028 0 0028 0 0068 0 0068 0 0088 C6 02 C...

Page 624: ...Recovery Ramp Time s 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 L2 05 Undervoltage Detection Lvl Uv1 190 190 190 190 190 190 L3 24 Motor Accel Time Rated Torque s 0 178 0 142 0 142 0 142 0 166 0 145 L8 02 Overheat Alarm Level C 115 115 115 115 115 115 L8 09 Output Ground Fault Detection 1 1 1 1 1 1 L8 38 Carrier Frequency Reduction 2 2 2 2 2 2 n1 01 Hunting Prevention Selection 1 1 1 1 1 1 n1 03 Hunting Prevention T...

Page 625: ...vel 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 b8 03 Energy Saving Filter Time s 0 50 0 50 0 50 0 50 0 50 0 50 0 50 0 50 b8 04 Energy Saving Coefficient Value 156 8 136 4 136 4 122 9 122 9 94 75 94 75 72 69 C5 17 C5 37 Motor Inertia kgm2 0 0088 0 0158 0 0158 0 0158 0 0158 0 0255 0 026 0 037 C6 02 Carrier Frequency Selection 1 7 1 7 1 7 1 7 E2 01 E4 01 Motor Rated Current FLA A 8 5 11 4 11 4 14 14 19 ...

Page 626: ... 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 L2 05 Undervolt age Detection Lvl Uv1 190 190 190 190 190 190 190 190 L3 24 Motor Accel Time Rated Torque s 0 145 0 145 0 145 0 154 0 154 0 168 0 168 0 175 L8 02 Overheat Alarm Level C 124 124 110 110 110 110 110 110 L8 09 Output Ground Fault Detection 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 L8 38 Carrier Frequency Reduction 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 n1 01 Hunting Prevention Selection 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 n1 03...

Page 627: ... 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 b8 03 Energy Saving Filter Time s 0 50 0 50 0 50 0 50 0 50 0 50 0 50 0 50 b8 04 Energy Saving Coefficient Value 72 69 70 44 70 44 63 13 63 13 57 87 57 87 51 79 C5 17 C5 37 Motor Inertia kgm2 0 037 0 053 0 053 0 076 0 076 0 138 0 138 0 165 C6 02 Carrier Frequency Selection 1 7 1 7 1 7 1 7 E2 01 E4 01 Motor Rated Current FLA A 26 6 39 7 39 7 53 53 65 8 65 8 77 2 E...

Page 628: ...6 0 6 0 6 0 6 L2 05 Undervolt age Detection Lvl Uv1 190 190 190 190 190 190 190 190 L3 24 Motor Accel Time Rated Torque s 0 175 0 265 0 265 0 244 0 244 0 317 0 317 0 355 L8 02 Overheat Alarm Level C 110 110 115 115 120 120 133 130 L8 09 Output Ground Fault Detection 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 L8 38 Carrier Frequency Reduction 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 n1 01 Hunting Prevention Selection 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 n1 03 Hunting Pr...

Page 629: ...0 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 b8 03 Energy Saving Filter Time s 0 50 0 50 0 50 0 50 0 50 0 50 0 50 2 00 b8 04 Energy Saving Coefficient Value 51 79 46 27 46 27 38 16 38 16 35 78 35 78 31 35 C5 17 C5 37 Motor Inertia kgm2 0 165 0 220 0 220 0 273 0 273 0 333 0 333 0 490 C6 02 Carrier Frequency Selection 1 7 1 7 1 7 1 7 E2 01 E4 01 Motor Rated Current FLA A 77 2 105 105 131 131 160 160 190 E2 02 E4...

Page 630: ... 0 6 0 6 1 1 1 L2 05 Undervolt age Detection Lvl Uv1 190 190 190 190 190 190 190 190 L3 24 Motor Accel Time Rated Torque s 0 355 0 323 0 323 0 32 0 32 0 387 0 387 0 317 L8 02 Overheat Alarm Level C 105 105 115 115 105 105 105 105 L8 09 Output Ground Fault Detection 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 L8 38 Carrier Frequency Reduction 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 n1 01 Hunting Prevention Selection 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 n1 03 Hunting Pre...

Page 631: ...el 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 b8 03 Energy Saving Filter Time s 2 00 2 00 2 00 2 00 2 00 2 00 2 00 2 00 b8 04 Energy Saving Coefficient Value 31 35 23 1 23 1 20 65 20 65 18 12 18 12 18 12 C5 17 C5 37 Motor Inertia kgm2 0 49 0 90 0 90 1 10 1 10 1 90 1 90 1 90 C6 02 Carrier Frequency Selection 1 7 1 7 1 7 1 7 E2 01 E4 01 Motor Rated Current FLA A 190 260 260 260 260 260 260 260 E2 02 E4...

Page 632: ...1 1 1 1 L2 05 Undervolt age Detection Lvl Uv1 190 190 190 190 190 190 190 190 L3 24 Motor Accel Time Rated Torque s 0 317 0 533 0 533 0 592 0 592 0 646 0 646 0 646 L8 02 Overheat Alarm Level C 105 105 105 105 120 120 120 120 L8 09 Output Ground Fault Detection 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 L8 38 Carrier Frequency Reduction 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 n1 01 Hunting Prevention Selection 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 n1 03 Hunting Preventi...

Page 633: ...mina tion Level 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 b8 03 Energy Saving Filter Time s 0 50 0 50 0 50 0 50 0 50 0 50 0 50 0 50 b8 04 Energy Saving Coefficient Value 576 4 447 4 447 4 338 8 338 8 313 6 313 6 265 7 C5 17 C5 37 Motor Inertia kgm2 0 0015 0 0028 0 0028 0 0068 0 0068 0 0088 0 0088 0 0158 C6 02 Carrier Frequency Selection 1 7 1 7 1 7 1 7 E2 01 E4 01 Motor Rated Current A 1 1 6 1 6 3 1...

Page 634: ...0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 L2 05 Undervolt age Detection Lvl Uv1 380 380 380 380 380 380 380 380 L3 24 Motor Accel Time Rated Torque s 0 178 0 142 0 142 0 166 0 166 0 145 0 145 0 145 L8 02 Overheat Alarm Level C 100 100 105 105 112 112 110 110 L8 09 Output Ground Fault Detection 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 L8 38 Carrier Frequency Reduction 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 n1 01 Hunting Prevention Selection 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 ...

Page 635: ...vel 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 b8 03 Energy Saving Filter Time s 0 50 0 50 0 50 0 50 0 50 0 50 0 50 0 50 b8 04 Energy Saving Coefficient Value 265 7 245 8 245 8 189 5 189 5 145 38 145 38 140 88 C5 17 C5 37 Motor Inertia kgm2 0 0158 0 0158 0 0158 0 0255 0 026 0 037 0 037 0 053 C6 02 Carrier Frequency Selection 1 7 1 7 1 7 1 7 E2 01 E4 01 Motor Rated Current FLA A 5 7 7 7 9 8 9 8 13 3 1...

Page 636: ... 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 L2 05 Undervolt age Detection Lvl Uv1 380 380 380 380 380 380 380 380 L3 24 Motor Accel Time Rated Torque s 0 145 0 154 0 154 0 168 0 168 0 175 0 175 0 265 L8 02 Overheat Alarm Level C 100 100 100 100 105 105 105 105 L8 09 Output Ground Fault Detection 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 L8 38 Carrier Frequency Reduction 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 n1 01 Hunting Prevention Selection 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 n...

Page 637: ... 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 b8 03 Energy Saving Filter Time s 0 50 0 50 0 50 0 50 0 50 0 50 0 50 0 50 b8 04 Energy Saving Coefficient Value 140 88 126 26 126 26 115 74 115 74 103 58 103 58 92 54 C5 17 C5 37 Motor Inertia kgm2 0 053 0 076 0 076 0 138 0 138 0 165 0 165 0 220 C6 02 Carrier Frequency Selection 1 7 1 7 1 7 1 7 E2 01 E4 01 Motor Rated Current FLA A 19 9 26 5 26 5 32 9 32 9 38 6 ...

Page 638: ... 0 6 0 6 0 6 0 6 L2 05 Undervolt age Detection Lvl Uv1 380 380 380 380 380 380 380 380 L3 24 Motor Accel Time Rated Torque s 0 265 0 244 0 244 0 317 0 317 0 355 0 355 0 323 L8 02 Overheat Alarm Level C 100 100 120 120 120 120 130 137 L8 09 Output Ground Fault Detection 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 L8 38 Carrier Frequency Reduction 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 n1 01 Hunting Prevention Selection 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 n1 03 Hunting...

Page 639: ... 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 b8 03 Energy Saving Filter Time s 0 50 0 50 0 50 0 50 0 50 2 00 2 00 2 00 b8 04 Energy Saving Coefficient Value 92 54 76 32 76 32 71 56 71 56 67 2 67 2 46 2 C5 17 C5 37 Motor Inertia kgm2 0 220 0 273 0 273 0 333 0 333 0 490 0 49 0 90 C6 02 Carrier Frequency Selection 1 7 1 7 1 7 1 7 E2 01 E4 01 Motor Rated Current FLA A 52 3 65 6 65 6 79 7 79 7 95 95 130 E2...

Page 640: ...6 0 6 0 6 0 6 1 1 1 L2 05 Undervolt age Detection Lvl Uv1 380 380 380 380 380 380 380 380 L3 24 Motor Accel Time Rated Torque s 0 323 0 32 0 32 0 387 0 387 0 317 0 317 0 533 L8 02 Overheat Alarm Level C 120 120 115 115 126 131 120 120 L8 09 Output Ground Fault Detection 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 L8 38 Carrier Frequency Reduction 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 n1 01 Hunting Prevention Selection 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 n1 03 Huntin...

Page 641: ...tion Level 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 b8 03 Energy Saving Filter Time s 2 00 2 00 2 00 2 00 2 00 2 00 2 00 2 00 b8 04 Energy Saving Coefficient Value 46 2 38 91 38 91 36 23 36 23 32 79 32 79 30 13 C5 17 C5 37 Motor Inertia kgm2 0 90 1 10 1 10 1 90 1 90 2 10 2 10 3 30 C6 02 Carrier Frequency Selection 1 7 1 7 1 7 1 7 E2 01 E4 01 Motor Rated Current FLA A 130 156 156 190 190 223 223 270...

Page 642: ... 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 L2 05 Undervolt age Detection Lvl Uv1 380 380 380 380 380 380 380 380 L3 24 Motor Accel Time Rated Torque s 0 533 0 592 0 592 0 646 0 646 0 673 0 673 0 777 L8 02 Overheat Alarm Level C 110 110 105 105 120 120 120 120 L8 09 Output Ground Fault Detection 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 L8 38 Carrier Frequency Reduction 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 n1 01 Hunting Prevention Selection 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 n1 03 Hunting P...

Page 643: ...tion Level 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 b8 03 Energy Saving Filter Time s 2 00 2 00 2 00 2 00 2 00 2 00 2 00 2 00 b8 04 Energy Saving Coefficient Value 30 13 30 57 30 57 27 13 27 13 21 76 21 76 21 76 C5 17 C5 37 Motor Inertia kgm2 3 30 3 60 3 60 4 10 4 10 6 50 6 50 11 00 C6 02 Carrier Frequency Selection 1 7 1 7 1 7 1 7 E2 01 E4 01 Motor Rated Current FLA A 270 310 310 370 370 500 500 5...

Page 644: ... 8 1 8 1 8 2 2 2 L2 05 Undervolt age Detection Lvl Uv1 380 380 380 380 380 380 380 380 L3 24 Motor Accel Time Rated Torque s 0 777 0 864 0 864 0 91 0 91 1 392 1 392 1 392 L8 02 Overheat Alarm Level C 130 130 140 140 140 140 140 140 L8 09 Output Ground Fault Detection 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 L8 38 Carrier Frequency Reduction 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 n1 01 Hunting Prevention Selection 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 n1 03 Hunting P...

Page 645: ...21 76 23 84 C5 17 C5 37 Motor Inertia kgm2 11 00 12 00 C6 02 Carrier Frequency Selection 1 7 E2 01 E4 01 Motor Rated Current FLA A 500 650 E2 02 E4 02 Motor Rated Slip Hz 1 25 1 E2 03 E4 03 Motor No Load Current A 130 130 E2 05 E4 05 Motor Line to Line Resistance Ω 0 014 0 012 E2 06 E4 06 Motor Leakage Inductance 20 20 E2 10 E4 10 Motor Iron Loss W 4700 5560 E5 01 PM Motor Code Selection FFFF FFFF...

Page 646: ... C6 01 Normal Heavy Duty Selection HD1 ND1 0 1 o2 04 Drive Model KVA Selection Hex AE E2 11 E4 11 Motor Rated Power kW kW 315 355 n1 03 Hunting Prevention Time Constant ms 100 100 n1 16 Hunting Prevention High Fc Gain 0 50 0 50 n5 02 Motor Inertia Acceleration Time s 1 392 1 667 n8 11 Observer Calculation Gain 2 50 0 50 0 1 Parameters within parentheses are for motor 2 ...

Page 647: ...E5 06 PM d axis Inductance mH phase mH 12 7 4 8 3 9 3 6 2 5 E5 07 PM q axis Inductance mH phase mH 12 7 4 8 3 9 3 6 2 5 E5 09 PM Back EMF Vpeak mV rad s mVs rad 0 0 0 0 0 E5 24 PM Motor Induced Voltage Constant 2 Ke mV r min 62 0 64 1 73 4 69 6 72 2 E1 04 Maximum Output Frequency Hz 120 120 120 120 120 E1 05 Maximum Output Voltage V 200 0 200 0 200 0 200 0 200 0 E1 06 Base Frequency Hz 120 120 120...

Page 648: ...tor Accel Time for Inertia Cal s 0 137 0 132 0 132 0 122 n5 02 Motor Acceleration Time s 0 137 0 132 0 132 0 122 n8 49 d Axis Cur forHighEfficiency Cont 0 0 0 0 Yaskawa SSR1 Series IPM Motors Derated Torque Table 10 6 SSR1 Series Motor Code Setting for Specification of 200 V at 1750 min 1 r min No Name Unit Motor Code setting value of E5 01 E5 01 PM Motor Code Selection 1202 1203 1205 1206 1208 12...

Page 649: ...g of o2 04 Drive Model Selection Table 10 7 SSR1 Series Motor Code Setting for Specification of 200 V at 1750 min 1 r min No Name Unit Motor Code setting value of E5 01 E5 01 PM Motor Code Selection 120E 120F 1210 1212 1213 1214 1215 1216 Voltage Class V 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 Capacity kW 15 18 22 30 37 45 55 75 Motor Rotation Speed min 1 1750 1750 1750 1750 1750 1750 1750 1750 E5 02 PM M...

Page 650: ...or Rated Power kW kW 0 4 0 75 1 5 2 2 3 7 5 5 7 5 11 0 E5 03 PM Motor Rated Current FLA A 0 89 1 56 2 81 4 27 7 08 10 31 13 65 20 7 E5 04 PM Motor Pole Count 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 E5 05 PM Motor Resistance ohms phase Ω 25 370 9 136 6 010 3 297 1 798 0 982 0 786 0 349 E5 06 PM d axis Inductance mH phase mH 169 00 92 08 67 71 34 40 32 93 22 7 16 49 13 17 E5 07 PM q axis Inductance mH phase mH 197 50 119 5...

Page 651: ...eak mV rad s mVs rad 498 8 509 5 503 9 561 7 528 5 558 1 623 8 594 5 E5 24 PM Motor Induced Voltage Constant 2 Ke mV r min 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 E1 04 Maximum Output Frequency Hz 87 5 87 5 87 5 87 5 87 5 87 5 87 5 87 5 E1 05 Maximum Output Voltage V 380 0 380 0 380 0 380 0 380 0 380 0 380 0 380 0 E1 06 Base Frequency Hz 87 5 87 5 87 5 87 5 87 5 87 5 87 5 87 5 E1 09 Minimum Output Frequen...

Page 652: ...7 10 9 13 2 1 Default settings vary depending on the setting of o2 04 Drive Model Selection Table 10 11 SSR1 Series Motor Code Setting for Specification of 200 V at 1450 min 1 r min No Name Unit Motor Code setting value of E5 01 E5 01 PM Motor Code Selection 1302 1303 1305 1306 1308 130A 130B 130D Voltage Class V 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 Capacity kW 0 4 0 75 1 5 2 2 3 7 5 5 7 5 11 Motor Rot...

Page 653: ...on 130E 130F 1310 1312 1313 1314 1315 Voltage Class V 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 Capacity kW 15 18 22 30 37 45 55 Motor Rotation Speed min 1 1450 1450 1450 1450 1450 1450 1450 E5 02 PM Motor Rated Power kW kW 15 00 18 50 22 00 30 00 37 00 45 00 55 00 E5 03 PM Motor Rated Current FLA A 55 5 65 6 75 1 105 2 126 0 153 1 186 5 E5 04 PM Motor Pole Count 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 E5 05 PM Motor Resistance ohms pha...

Page 654: ... 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 E5 05 PM Motor Resistance ohms phase Ω 12 760 7 421 4 825 2 656 1 353 0 999 0 713 0 393 E5 06 PM d axis Inductance mH phase mH 128 60 85 11 58 87 46 42 31 73 26 20 27 06 15 51 E5 07 PM q axis Inductance mH phase mH 166 96 113 19 80 59 60 32 40 45 30 94 33 45 19 63 E5 09 PM Back EMF Vpeak mV rad s mVs rad 528 6 544 2 568 5 572 8 562 9 587 6 670 1 612 7 E5 24 PM Motor Induced Voltage ...

Page 655: ...03 0 747 1 E5 24 PM Motor Induced Voltage Constant 2 Ke mV r min 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 E1 04 Maximum Output Frequency Hz 72 5 72 5 72 5 72 5 72 5 72 5 72 5 E1 05 Maximum Output Voltage V 380 0 380 0 380 0 380 0 380 0 380 0 380 0 E1 06 Base Frequency Hz 72 5 72 5 72 5 72 5 72 5 72 5 72 5 E1 09 Minimum Output Frequency Hz 3 6 3 6 3 6 3 6 3 6 3 6 3 6 C5 17 Motor Inertia kgm2 0 055 0 064 0 116 0...

Page 656: ...ng of o2 04 Drive Model Selection Table 10 16 SSR1 Series Motor Code Setting for Specification of 200 V at 1150 min 1 r min No Name Unit Motor Code setting value of E5 01 E5 01 PM Motor Code Selection 1402 1403 1405 1406 1408 140A 140B 140D Voltage Class V 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 Capacity kW 0 4 0 75 1 5 2 2 3 7 5 5 7 5 11 Motor Rotation Speed min 1 1150 1150 1150 1150 1150 1150 1150 1150 ...

Page 657: ...5 Motor Rotation Speed min 1 1150 1150 1150 1150 1150 1150 E5 02 PM Motor Rated Power kW kW 15 18 50 22 00 30 00 37 00 45 00 E5 03 PM Motor Rated Current FLA A 55 6 63 5 74 4 104 2 129 6 154 2 E5 04 PM Motor Pole Count 6 6 6 6 6 6 E5 05 PM Motor Resistance ohms phase Ω 0 084 0 066 0 048 0 035 0 023 0 016 E5 06 PM d axis Inductance mH phase mH 3 83 3 33 2 38 2 04 1 53 1 16 E5 07 PM q axis Inductanc...

Page 658: ...62 2 E5 24 PM Motor Induced Voltage Constant 2 Ke mV r min 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 E1 04 Maximum Output Frequency Hz 57 5 57 5 57 5 57 5 57 5 57 5 57 5 57 5 E1 05 Maximum Output Voltage V 380 0 380 0 380 0 380 0 380 0 380 0 380 0 380 0 E1 06 Base Frequency Hz 57 5 57 5 57 5 57 5 57 5 57 5 57 5 57 5 E1 09 Minimum Output Frequency Hz 2 9 2 9 2 9 2 9 2 9 2 9 2 9 2 9 C5 17 Motor Inertia kgm2 0...

Page 659: ... for Inertia Cal s 0 062 0 091 0 092 0 125 0 122 0 135 n5 02 Motor Acceleration Time s 0 062 0 091 0 092 0 125 0 122 0 135 n8 49 d Axis Cur forHighEfficiencyCont 14 9 17 9 15 9 17 7 20 1 13 8 1 Default settings vary depending on the setting of o2 04 Drive Model Selection Table 10 20 SSR1 Series Motor Code Setting for Specification of 400 V at 1150 min 1 r min No Name Unit Motor Code setting value ...

Page 660: ...tor Rotation Speed min 1 1750 1750 1750 1750 1750 1750 1750 1750 E5 02 PM Motor Rated Power kW kW 0 4 0 75 1 5 2 2 3 7 5 5 7 5 11 0 E5 03 PM Motor Rated Current FLA A 1 77 3 54 6 56 8 96 14 79 20 94 29 58 41 1 E5 04 PM Motor Pole Count 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 E5 05 PM Motor Resistance ohms phase Ω 2 247 1 132 0 774 0 479 0 242 0 275 0 161 0 111 E5 06 PM d axis Inductance mH phase mH 22 32 12 38 8 90 7 39 ...

Page 661: ... E5 04 PM Motor Pole Count 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 E5 05 PM Motor Resistance ohms phase Ω 0 071 0 049 0 040 0 030 0 020 0 013 0 009 0 006 E5 06 PM d axis Inductance mH phase mH 2 67 1 98 1 69 1 31 0 88 0 77 0 55 0 40 E5 07 PM q axis Inductance mH phase mH 3 10 2 41 2 12 1 61 1 14 1 04 0 69 0 50 E5 09 PM Back EMF Vpeak mV rad s mVs rad 253 7 244 6 256 3 283 1 266 3 260 0 261 5 259 3 E5 24 PM Motor Induced ...

Page 662: ...8 470 4 513 4 E5 24 PM Motor Induced Voltage Constant 2 Ke mV r min 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 E1 04 Maximum Output Frequency Hz 87 5 87 5 87 5 87 5 87 5 87 5 87 5 87 5 E1 05 Maximum Output Voltage V 380 0 380 0 380 0 380 0 380 0 380 0 380 0 380 0 E1 06 Base Frequency Hz 87 5 87 5 87 5 87 5 87 5 87 5 87 5 87 5 E1 09 Minimum Output Frequency Hz 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 C5 17 Motor Inert...

Page 663: ...inimum Output Frequency Hz 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 C5 17 Motor Inertia kgm2 0 044 0 054 0 063 0 113 0 137 0 252 0 30 0 41 L3 24 1 Motor Accel Time for Inertia Cal s 0 099 0 098 0 096 0 126 0 124 0 188 0 186 0 184 n5 02 Motor Acceleration Time s 0 099 0 098 0 096 0 126 0 124 0 188 0 186 0 184 n8 49 d Axis Cur forHighEfficiency Cont 15 1 14 3 15 3 11 3 14 5 13 2 22 6 11 9 1 Default settings ...

Page 664: ... 12 5 14 7 5 1 16 3 1 Default settings vary depending on the setting of o2 04 Drive Model Selection Table 10 26 SST4 Series Motor Code Setting for Specification of 200 V at 1450 min 1 r min No Name Unit Motor Code setting value of E5 01 E5 01 PM Motor Code Selection 2302 2303 2305 2306 2308 230A 230B 230D Voltage Class V 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 Capacity kW 0 4 0 75 1 5 2 2 3 7 5 5 7 5 11 M...

Page 665: ... Voltage Class V 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 Capacity kW 15 18 22 30 37 45 55 75 Motor Rotation Speed min 1 1450 1450 1450 1450 1450 1450 1450 1450 E5 02 PM Motor Rated Power kW kW 15 0 18 50 22 00 30 00 37 00 45 00 55 00 75 00 E5 03 PM Motor Rated Current FLA A 54 2 68 3 75 2 102 0 131 3 160 4 191 7 257 3 E5 04 PM Motor Pole Count 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 E5 05 PM Motor Resistance ohms phase Ω 0 073 0...

Page 666: ...ount 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 E5 05 PM Motor Resistance ohms phase Ω 12 616 7 340 2 724 1 232 1 509 1 112 0 720 0 393 E5 06 PM d axis Inductance mH phase mH 113 84 77 84 40 00 27 52 31 73 23 09 25 28 13 36 E5 07 PM q axis Inductance mH phase mH 157 16 103 56 60 80 37 00 40 88 34 39 35 20 18 44 E5 09 PM Back EMF Vpeak mV rad s mVs rad 490 8 513 8 543 7 520 3 580 8 602 7 601 5 584 6 E5 24 PM Motor Induced Vo...

Page 667: ...1 6 710 8 652 7 604 8 669 1 646 8 E5 24 PM Motor Induced Voltage Constant 2 Ke mV r min 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 E1 04 Maximum Output Frequency Hz 72 5 72 5 72 5 72 5 72 5 72 5 72 5 72 5 E1 05 Maximum Output Voltage V 380 0 380 0 380 0 380 0 380 0 380 0 380 0 380 0 E1 06 Base Frequency Hz 72 5 72 5 72 5 72 5 72 5 72 5 72 5 72 5 E1 09 Minimum Output Frequency Hz 3 6 3 6 3 6 3 6 3 6 3 6 3 6 3...

Page 668: ... 6 3 6 3 6 C5 17 Motor Inertia kgm2 0 82 0 96 1 60 1 95 2 82 3 70 L3 24 1 Motor Accel Time for Inertia Cal s 0 210 0 201 0 279 0 281 0 325 0 341 n5 02 Motor Acceleration Time s 0 210 0 201 0 279 0 281 0 325 0 341 n8 49 d Axis Cur forHighEfficiency Cont 19 6 24 1 15 1 17 0 19 8 19 3 1 Default settings vary depending on the setting of o2 04 Drive Model Selection Table 10 31 SST4 Series Motor Code Se...

Page 669: ...is Cur forHighEfficiency Cont 8 4 11 0 10 7 10 7 9 4 22 5 22 2 16 7 1 Default settings vary depending on the setting of o2 04 Drive Model Selection Table 10 32 SST4 Series Motor Code Setting for Specification of 200 V at 1150 min 1 r min No Name Unit Motor Code setting value of E5 01 E5 01 PM Motor Code Selection 240E 240F 2410 2412 2413 2414 2415 2416 Voltage Class V 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 2...

Page 670: ...436 2438 243A 243B Voltage Class V 400 400 400 400 400 400 400 Capacity kW 0 4 0 75 1 5 2 2 3 7 5 5 7 5 Motor Rotation Speed min 1 1150 1150 1150 1150 1150 1150 1150 E5 02 PM Motor Rated Power kW kW 0 4 0 75 1 5 2 2 3 7 5 5 7 5 E5 03 PM Motor Rated Current FLA A 0 89 1 72 3 02 4 58 7 40 10 21 13 75 E5 04 PM Motor Pole Count 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 E5 05 PM Motor Resistance ohms phase Ω 10 720 6 080 4 336 2 ...

Page 671: ...63 0 76 6 E5 04 PM Motor Pole Count 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 E5 05 PM Motor Resistance ohms phase Ω 0 460 0 325 0 260 0 209 0 140 0 106 0 076 E5 06 PM d axis Inductance mH phase mH 17 76 12 83 11 68 10 09 8 12 6 43 4 96 E5 07 PM q axis Inductance mH phase mH 22 72 17 19 15 16 16 25 9 84 7 71 6 56 E5 09 PM Back EMF Vpeak mV rad s mVs rad 740 4 716 6 809 1 786 2 888 8 857 7 941 6 E5 24 PM Motor Induced Voltage...

Page 672: ...7 E5 06 PM d axis Inductance mH phase mH 3 99 2 97 2 44 1 87 1 49 1 41 1 22 E5 07 PM q axis Inductance mH phase mH 5 39 3 90 3 23 2 46 2 08 1 88 1 51 E5 09 PM Back EMF Vpeak mV rad s mVs rad 853 8 829 6 835 6 833 4 848 6 889 1 915 0 E5 24 PM Motor Induced Voltage Constant 2 Ke mV r min 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 E1 04 Maximum Output Frequency Hz 57 5 57 5 57 5 57 5 57 5 57 5 57 5 E1 05 Maximum Ou...

Page 673: ...ecautions 674 11 2 A Initialization Parameters 675 11 3 b Application 697 11 4 C Tuning 749 11 5 d References 775 11 6 E Motor Parameters 798 11 7 F Options 820 11 8 H Terminal Functions 862 11 9 L Protection Functions 939 11 10 n Special Adjustment 987 11 11 o Keypad Related Settings 1010 11 12 T Auto Tuning 1032 ...

Page 674: ...Technical Manual 11 1 Safety Precautions DANGER Do not ignore the safety messages in this manual The operating company is responsible for injuries or equipment damage caused from ignoring the messages in this manual Failure to obey the safety messages will cause death or serious injury ...

Page 675: ... drive will not reset this parameter 0 English 1 Japanese 2 German 3 French 4 Italian 5 Spanish 6 Portuguese 7 Chinese 8 Czech 9 Russian 10 Turkish 11 Polish 12 Greek A1 01 Access Level Selection No Hex Name Description Default Range A1 01 0101 RUN Access Level Selection Sets user access to parameters The access level controls which parameters the keypad will display and which parameters the user ...

Page 676: ...o which H1 xx 16 MFDI Function Select Motor 2 Selection is set then change the A1 02 setting An incorrect procedure will trigger oPE08 Parameter Selection Error Selects the control method for the drive application and the motor 0 V f Control Use this control method in these applications and conditions For general variable speed control applications in which a high level of responsiveness or high p...

Page 677: ...method This control method uses an easier procedure to operate motors with more efficiency Use this control method for derating torque applications For example fans and pumps A1 03 Initialize Parameters No Hex Name Description Default Range A1 03 0103 Initialize Parameters Sets parameters to default values 0 0 3330 Note After you initialize the drive the drive automatically sets A1 03 0 User Param...

Page 678: ...k to Factory Default to initialize communication option card parameters L8 35 Installation Method Selection o2 04 Drive Model KVA Selection q1 xx q8 xx DriveWorksEZ Parameters r1 xx DWEZ Connection 1 20 Note Set A1 06 Application Preset to let the drive automatically set the best parameter settings for the selected application The drive does not initialize A1 02 when A1 03 2220 3330 When A1 03 222...

Page 679: ...tion A1 03 Initialize Parameters A1 06 Application Preset A1 07 DriveWorksEZ Function Selection A2 01 to A2 32 User Parameter 1 to 32 Note Usually the keypad will not show A1 05 To show and set A1 05 show A1 04 Password and then push and on the keypad at the same time After you set A1 05 the keypad will not show it again until you enter the correct password in A1 04 Make sure that you remember the...

Page 680: ...1 User Parameter Auto Selection Enabled Auto Save Recent Parms to set parameters to A2 17 to A2 32 User Parameters 17 to 32 automatically the drive will reset these parameters when you change the A1 06 setting 0 General purpose The drive saves the parameters in Table 11 3 as user parameters Table 11 3 Parameters Saved as User Parameters with the General purpose Preset User Parameter No Parameter N...

Page 681: ...aved Name A2 01 b1 01 Frequency Reference Selection 1 A2 02 b1 02 Run Command Selection 1 A2 03 b1 04 Reverse Operation Selection A2 04 C1 01 Acceleration Time 1 A2 05 C1 02 Deceleration Time 1 A2 06 E1 03 V f Pattern Selection A2 07 E1 07 Mid Point A Frequency A2 08 E1 08 Mid Point AVoltage A2 09 E2 01 Motor Rated Current FLA A2 10 H1 05 Terminal S5 Function Selection A2 11 H1 06 Terminal S6 Func...

Page 682: ...ose Parameters in Table 11 9 as user parameters Table 11 9 Parameters Saved as User Parameters with the Exhaust Fan Preset User Parameter No Parameter No Saved Name A2 01 b1 01 Frequency Reference Selection 1 A2 02 b1 02 Run Command Selection 1 A2 03 b1 04 Reverse Operation Selection A2 04 b3 01 Speed Search at Start Selection A2 05 C1 01 Acceleration Time 1 A2 06 C1 02 Deceleration Time 1 A2 07 E...

Page 683: ...r Limit A2 10 E1 03 V f Pattern Selection A2 11 E1 04 Maximum Output Frequency A2 12 E2 01 Motor Rated Current FLA A2 13 H3 11 Terminal A2 Gain Setting A2 14 H3 12 Terminal A2 Bias Setting A2 15 L2 01 Power Loss Ride Through Select A2 16 o4 12 kWh Monitor Initialization 5 Air Compressor The drive automatically sets the parameters in Table 11 12 for an air compressor application Table 11 12 Best Pa...

Page 684: ... Heavy Duty Selection 0 Heavy Duty Rating C6 02 Carrier Frequency Selection 2 5 0 kHz 4 0 kHz for AOLV PM d1 01 Reference 1 6 00 Hz d1 02 Reference 2 30 00 Hz d1 03 Reference 3 50 00 Hz E1 03 V f Pattern Selection F Custom H2 01 Term M1 M2 Function Selection 5 Frequency Detection 2 H2 02 Term M3 M4 Function Selection 37 During Frequency Output H3 06 Terminal A3 Function Selection F Not Used L2 03 ...

Page 685: ...0 Keypad C1 01 Acceleration Time 1 3 0 s C1 02 Deceleration Time 1 3 0 s C6 01 Normal Heavy Duty Selection 0 Heavy Duty Rating C6 02 Carrier Frequency Selection 2 5 0 kHz 4 0 kHz for AOLV PM d1 01 Reference 1 6 00 Hz d1 02 Reference 2 30 00 Hz d1 03 Reference 3 50 00 Hz H1 05 Terminal S5 Function Selection 3 Multi Step Speed Reference 1 H1 06 Terminal S6 Function Selection 4 Multi Step Speed Refer...

Page 686: ...nal Name Parameter Settings Signal Name Parameter Settings V f 0 OLV 2 CLV 3 CLV PM 7 1 Frequency FOUT Detection 2 L4 07 0 Speed Agree Detection Level L4 01 1 0 Hz to 3 0 Hz 2 x x H2 01 5 Speed Agree Detection Width L4 02 0 0 Hz to 0 5 Hz 3 During Frequency Output H2 01 37 DC Injection Zero Speed Threshold b2 01 0 1 Hz to 0 5 Hz x x 1 When A1 02 7 PM Closed Loop Vector make sure that the motor can...

Page 687: ...tion during Baseblock or During Frequency Output Time Chart Figure 11 3 shows the open close sequence of the holding brake Figure 11 3 Holding Brake Open and Close Sequence Time Chart V f CL V f OLV 1 Start braking from the higher set frequency between b2 01 DC Injection Zero SpeedThreshold or E1 09 Minimum Output Frequency Figure 11 4 Holding Brake Open and Close Sequence Time Chart CLV CLV PM 1 ...

Page 688: ... 01 The drive will automatically set E5 and other related motor parameters to the best values When you use a non Yaskawa PM motor Do Auto Tuning When the motor nameplate or motor test report is available enter the PM motor parameters directly with PM Motor Parameter Settings If the motor nameplate or motor test report is not available and the motor cannot rotate do PM Stationary Auto Tuning If the...

Page 689: ...ck when it stops In these conditions use Dwell Reference at Start Time and DC Injection Braking at Stop to adjust the holding brake timing Electromagnetic contactor on the drive output side Usually you must not install the electromagnetic contactor between the drive and motor When you must install an electromagnetic contactor to use one drive to switchover more than one motor follow these precauti...

Page 690: ...is a large shock during start up decrease the setting value 15 0 V 2 3 13 0 V to 16 0 V 3 E1 10 Minimum Output Voltage 9 0 V 2 3 7 0 V to 10 0 V 3 1 The default setting changes when the settings for C6 01 Normal Heavy Duty Selection and o2 04 Drive Model KVA Selection change 2 The default setting changes when the settings for A1 02 Control Method Selection and E1 03 V f Pattern Selection change 3 ...

Page 691: ...ion and o2 04 Drive Model Selection change 3 This is the setting for 200 V class drives Multiply the voltage by 2 for 400 V class drives Closed Loop Vector Control Method Table 11 21 Adjustment of Drive Control Closed Loop Vector Control Method Adjustment Description Parameter Number Solution Default Setting Suggested Setting Torque increase speed response Prevent hunting and oscillation C5 01 ASR...

Page 692: ...celeration deceleration The default setting is disabled When the Output Frequency C1 11 operate at the acceleration and deceleration times set in C1 01 and C1 02 When the Output Frequency C1 11 operate at the acceleration and deceleration times set in C1 07 and C1 08 During low speed operation if the Output Frequency E1 09 Minimum Output Frequency in the S Curve Time Start of Decel the drive will ...

Page 693: ...requency Detection 2 Figure 11 7 DC Injection Braking at Stop Zero Speed Control Function Note If the mechanical operation of the holding brake is slow use DC Injection Braking zero speed control when set to closed loop vector until the brake is fully closed to prevent rollback If you cannot hold the load with DC Injection Braking when it is stopped in V f Control and Open Loop Vector Control mode...

Page 694: ...ue bias signal as specified by the load quantity before drive operation until drive operation completes The default setting is 10 V 100 torque Enter a negative polarity during a motoring load and enter a positive polarity during a regenerative load Note Holds through an external source to not change the torque compensation signal during run If you change the torque compensation signal during run t...

Page 695: ...th a regenerative load If the overvoltage suppression function is enabled the regeneration torque reference within the drive is automatically controlled during regeneration Note When using the drive for applications such as high speed elevators with a speed of 2 ms or more and direct drive elevators or when you need drives designed for cranes contact Yaskawa or your Yaskawa sales representative A1...

Page 696: ...drive saves these parameters to A2 01 to A2 32 The drive saves a maximum of 32 parameters Note Set A1 01 2 Advanced Level or A1 01 3 Expert Level to register the necessary parameters The drive automatically saves changed parameters to A2 17 to A2 32 Note Set A2 33 1 User Parameter Auto Selection Enabled A2 33 User Parameter Auto Selection No Hex Name Description Default Range A2 33 0126 User Param...

Page 697: ... on the keypad will flash Check the setting for the frequency reference input and enter a value more than or equal to the E1 09 value 0 Keypad Use the keypad to enter the frequency reference Use and on the keypad to change the frequency reference 1 Analog Input Use MFAI terminals A1 A2 and A3 to input an analog frequency reference with a voltage or current input signal Voltage Input Refer to Table...

Page 698: ...20 mA H3 09 2 H3 10 0 Frequency Reference H3 11 H3 12 Set DIP switch S1 2 to I for current input 0 20 mA H3 09 3 A3 4 mA to 20 mA H3 05 2 H3 06 0 Frequency Reference H3 07 H3 08 Set DIP switch S1 3 to I for current input Set DIP switch S4 to AI for analog input 0 20 mA H3 05 3 Figure 11 9 Example of Setting the Frequency Reference with a Current Signal to Terminal A2 Note You can also use this dia...

Page 699: ...e Sequence Run Command 2 Wire Sequence The default setting is 2 wire sequence 1 2 wire Sequence 1 This sequence has two input types FWD Stop and REV Stop Set A1 03 2220 Initialize Parameters 2 Wire Initialization to initialize the drive and set terminals S1 and S2 for a 2 wire sequence 2 wire Sequence 2 This sequence has two input types Run Stop and FWD REV 3 Wire Sequence This sequence has three ...

Page 700: ... time set in b2 04 DC Inject Braking Time at Stop Figure 11 10 Ramp to Stop with V f AOLV CL V f and OLV Control Methods Note When b2 01 E1 09 Minimum Output Frequency the drive will start DC Injection Braking from the frequency set in E1 09 Ramp to Stop with CLV PM AOLV PM and EZOLV Control Methods Parameter b2 01 sets the frequency to start Short Circuit Braking When the output frequency is less...

Page 701: ...command until the motor comes to a complete stop Use DC Injection or Speed Search to restart the motor before it stops 2 DC Injection Braking to Stop Enter the Stop command or turn OFF the Run command and turn OFF drive output for the time set in L2 03 The drive waits for the minimum baseblock time and then injects the amount of DC current into the motor set in b2 02 DC Injection Braking Current t...

Page 702: ...tive deceleration time and the output frequency when drive receives the Stop command determine the length of Run wait time t Figure 11 17 Run Wait Time and Output Frequency 9 Stop with Constant Distance Enter the Stop command or turn OFF the Run command for the drive to always decelerate for the same distance The drive uses the active deceleration time and the value set in E1 04 Maximum Output Fre...

Page 703: ...dangerous 0 0 1 When reverse operation is prohibited the drive will not accept a Reverse operation command 0 Reverse Enabled The drive will accept a Reverse operation command 1 Reverse Disabled The drive will not accept a Reverse operation command b1 05 Operation Below Minimum Freq No Hex Name Description Default Range b1 05 0184 Operation Below Minimum Freq Sets the drive operation when the frequ...

Page 704: ... set in E1 09 The drive performs Zero Speed Control again for the time set in b2 04 when the Stop command is entered or when the Run command is switched OFF Figure 11 22 Operate at Zero Speed b1 06 Digital Input Reading No Hex Name Description Default Range b1 06 0185 Digital Input Reading Sets the number of times that the drive reads the sequence input command to prevent problems from electrical ...

Page 705: ...nd Wire the drive for 3 Wire sequence If these three conditions are correct the motor can rotate in reverse when energizing the drive The drive is wired for 3 Wire sequence The drive is set for a 2 Wire sequence default b1 17 1 Accept Existing RUN Command Failure to obey can cause death or serious injury from moving equipment b1 08 Run Command Select in PRG Mode No Hex Name Description Default Ran...

Page 706: ...ut mode to LOCAL and enter the frequency reference from the keypad When the drive receives a Run command when the frequency reference is 0 Hz or less than the E1 09 Minimum Output Frequency value the on the keypad will flash Check the setting for the frequency reference input and enter a value more than or equal to the E1 09 value 0 Keypad Use the keypad to enter the frequency reference Use and on...

Page 707: ...Set DIP switch S1 1 to I for current input 0 20 mA H3 01 3 A2 4 20 mA H3 09 2 H3 10 0 Frequency Bias H3 11 H3 12 Set DIP switch S1 2 to I for current input 0 20 mA H3 09 3 A3 4 20 mA H3 05 2 H3 06 0 Frequency Bias H3 07 H3 08 Set DIP switch S1 3 to I for current input Set DIP switch S4 to AI for analog input 0 20 mA H3 05 3 Figure 11 24 Example of Setting the Frequency Reference with a Current Sig...

Page 708: ...Reference 1 2 Selection is activated 0 Keypad Use the keypad to enter the Run command You can use the JOG operation or the FWD REV commands from the keypad Note will illuminate when the keypad is the Run command source 1 Digital Input Use the control circuit terminals to enter the Run command Select the input method for the Run command with an H1 xx parameter Set H1 xx 0 40 to 43 3 Wire Sequence R...

Page 709: ...otor can rotate in reverse when energizing the drive The drive is wired for 3 Wire sequence The drive is set for a 2 Wire sequence default b1 17 1 Accept Existing RUN Command Failure to obey can cause death or serious injury from moving equipment b1 21 CLV Start Selection No Hex Name Description Default Range b1 21 0748 Expert CLV Start Selection Sets drive response to a Run command when A1 02 3 o...

Page 710: ...on Braking Current into the motor for the time set in b2 04 DC Inject Braking Time at Stop Figure 11 25 DC Injection Braking at Stop Note When b2 01 E1 09 Minimum Output Frequency the drive will start DC Injection Braking from the frequency set in E1 09 A1 02 5 6 or 8 OLV PM AOLV PM or EZOLV In these control methods b2 01 sets the starting frequency for Short Circuit Braking at Stop When the outpu...

Page 711: ...ameter to 0 00 to disable the function Note To restart a coasting motor use DC Injection Braking to stop and then restart the motor or enable Speed Search DC Injection Braking can trigger ov Overvoltage or oC Overcurrent b2 04 DC Inject Braking Time at Stop No Hex Name Description Default Range b2 04 018C DC Inject Braking Time at Stop Sets the DC Injection Braking Time at stop Sets the zero speed...

Page 712: ... Range b2 13 01BB Short Circuit Brake Time Stop Sets the Short Circuit Braking time at stop A1 02 8 0 00 s Other than A1 02 8 0 50 s 0 00 25 50 s This function fully stops a PM motor with a large inertia during deceleration and will not let the inertia continue to rotate the motor Short Circuit Braking operates for the time set in b2 13 when output frequency is less than the value set in b2 01 DC ...

Page 713: ...2 x b3 08 Speed Estimation ACR P Gain x b3 09 Speed Estimation ACR I Time x b3 10 Speed Estimation Detection Gain x b3 14 Bi directional Speed Search x b3 17 Speed Est Retry Current Level x x b3 18 Speed Est Retry Detection Time x x b3 19 Speed Search Restart Attempts x x b3 24 Speed Search Method Selection x 2 x 1 b3 25 Speed Search Wait Time x x b3 26 Direction Determination Level x b3 27 Speed ...

Page 714: ... Detection Speed Search with PM motors If the motor is rotating in reverse you cannot do Speed Search If the drive detects oL1 Motor Overload during Current Detection Speed Search decrease the value set in b3 03 If the drive detects oC Overcurrent or ov Overvoltage during Current Detection Speed Search after the drive recovers from a momentary power loss increase the value set in L2 03 Speed Estim...

Page 715: ...jection The drive injects the quantity of DC current set in b3 06 Speed Estimation Current Level 1 into the motor windings to estimate the motor speed and direction of rotation The drive outputs the estimated motor speed as frequency then uses the deceleration rate set in L2 04 to increase the voltage When the output voltage aligns with the V f pattern the drive accelerates or decelerates the moto...

Page 716: ... command Determined by A1 02 0 1 0 Disabled Enter a Run command to start to operate the drive at the minimum output frequency When the Run command is enabled and the Speed Search from Fmax or Fref H1 xx 61 62 is input from a multi function input terminal the drive will do Speed Search and start to operate the motor 1 Enabled Enter the Run command to do Speed Search The drive completes Speed Search...

Page 717: ...this when the motor coasts at a high speed while the drive estimates the speed during Speed Estimation Speed Search The limit of the output current during speed search is automatically the drive rated current Note When the drive cannot accurately estimate the speed after you adjust this parameter use Current Detection Speed Search b3 07 Speed Estimation Current Level 2 No Hex Name Description Defa...

Page 718: ...n Default Range b3 17 01F0 Expert Speed Est Retry Current Level Sets the current level for the search retry function in Speed Estimation Speed Search as a percentage where drive rated current is a setting value of 100 150 0 200 When a large quantity of current flows during Speed Estimation Speed Search the drive temporarily stops operation to prevent overvoltage and overcurrent When the current is...

Page 719: ...stimate motor speed b3 25 Speed Search Wait Time No Hex Name Description Default Range b3 25 01C8 Expert Speed Search Wait Time Sets the length of time the drive will wait to start the Speed Search Retry function 0 5 s 0 0 30 0 s If the drive detects these faults during speed search increase the setting value oC Overcurrent ov Overvoltage SEr Speed Search Retries Exceeded b3 26 Direction Determina...

Page 720: ...frequency to search for the motor speed when the output current is equal to or less than Speed Search Current Complete Level Set this parameter as a ratio of E2 03 Motor No Load Current Sets a current level given that E2 03 is 30 of the motor rated current when E2 03 Motor Rated Current 0 3 b3 33 Speed Search during Uv Selection No Hex Name Description Default Range b3 33 0B3F Expert Speed Search ...

Page 721: ... Description Default Range b3 55 3124 Expert Current Increment Time Sets the length of time that the drive will increase the current from zero current to the setting value of b3 06 Speed Estimation Current Level 1 10 ms 10 2000 ms Gradually increase the setting value when a large quantity of current flows after speed search starts If you set this value too high speed search will not operate correc...

Page 722: ...ion OFF Delay Time Sets the OFF delay time for the timer input 0 0 s 0 0 3000 0 s b4 03 Terminal M1 M2 ON Delay Time No Hex Name Description Default Range b4 03 0B30 Expert Terminal M1 M2 ON Delay Time Sets the delay time to activate the contact after the function set in H2 01 activates 0 ms 0 65000 ms b4 04 Terminal M1 M2 OFF Delay Time No Hex Name Description Default Range b4 04 0B31 Expert Term...

Page 723: ...ombination of these controls to increase the performance P control P control has a proportional effect on the deviation It outputs the product the controlled output proportional to the deviation You cannot use only the offset from P control to get to zero deviation I control I control is the integral of the deviation It uses an integral value of the deviation to output the product the controlled o...

Page 724: ...he drive When b5 01 1 or 2 PID Mode Setting Standard or Standard D on feedback the frequency reference set in b1 01 Frequency Reference Selection 1 or b1 15 Frequency Reference Selection 2 will be the PID setpoint or the one of the values shown in Table 11 29 will be the PID setpoint When b5 01 3 or 4 PID Mode Setting Fref PID Trim or Fref PID Trim D on feedback one of the inputs in Table 11 29 wi...

Page 725: ...log input terminal A3 Set H3 06 B Pulse train input terminal RP Set H6 01 1 PID Feedback Value The drive uses two feedback signals and the difference between those signals becomes the deviation Use Table 11 31 to select how the second feedback signal is input to the drive The drive calculates the deviation of the second feedback value Set H3 02 H3 06 or H3 10 16 Terminal A1 A3 A2 Function Selectio...

Page 726: ...for the PID feedback loss detection function The drive detects feedback loss when the feedback value is less than the value in b5 13 for longer than the time in b5 14 b5 12 Feedback Loss Detection Select b5 13 PID Feedback Loss Detection Lvl b5 14 PID Feedback Loss Detection Time Excessive PID Feedback FbH Set these parameters to set how the drive detects a feedback level that is too high The driv...

Page 727: ...art the motor when the PID output or the frequency reference is more than the b5 15 value for the time set in b5 16 PID Sleep Delay Time Figure 11 38 shows the PID Sleep function Figure 11 38 PID Sleep Time Chart Note The PID Sleep function is enabled when PID control is disabled When the PID Sleep function is triggered the drive will stop the motor as specified by b1 03 Stopping Method Selection ...

Page 728: ...ionality Set b5 89 1 Sleep Method Selection EZ Sleep Wake up to enable the EZ Sleep Wake up function Note When b5 89 0 Sleep Mode Selection Standard the EZ Sleep function and related parameters are disabled Parameter b5 91 EZ Minimum Speed is not included in this rule Set b5 89 1 to disable b5 15 PID Sleep Function Start Level Configuration Parameter Description b5 90 EZ Sleep Unit Sets the unit o...

Page 729: ... default setting of 0 0 Hz b5 91 is the EZ sleep level b5 01 PID Mode Setting No Hex Name Description Default Range b5 01 01A5 PID Mode Setting Sets the type of PID control 0 0 8 0 Disabled 1 Standard The drive does D control on the difference between the feedback value and the PID setpoint output through U5 02 PID Input 2 Standard D on feedback The drive does D control on the feedback output thro...

Page 730: ...l Limit No Hex Name Description Default Range b5 04 01A8 RUN Integral Limit Sets the upper limit for I control as a percentage of E1 04 Maximum Output Frequency 100 0 0 0 100 0 Applications with loads that quickly change will cause the output of the PID function to oscillate Set this parameter to a low value to prevent oscillation mechanical loss and motor speed loss b5 05 Derivative Time D No Hex...

Page 731: ...me Description Default Range b5 09 01AD PID Output Level Selection Sets the polarity of the PID output 0 0 1 Use this parameter in applications that decrease the drive output frequency when you increase the PID setpoint 0 Normal Output Direct Acting A positive PID input increases the PID output direct acting 1 Reverse Output Reverse Acting A positive PID input decreases the PID output reverse acti...

Page 732: ...ck Low or PID Feedback High H2 01 to H2 03 3E 3F activates The output terminal set for Alarm H2 01 to H2 03 10 activates and the drive continues operation When the feedback signal is less than the level set in b5 13 for longer than the time set in b5 14 the MFDO terminal set for a PID Feedback Low activates When the feedback signal is more than the level set in b5 36 for longer than the time set i...

Page 733: ...B4 PID Sleep Delay Time Sets a delay time to start or stop the PID Sleep function 0 0 s 0 0 25 5 s b5 17 PID Accel Decel Time No Hex Name Description Default Range b5 17 01B5 PID Accel Decel Time Raises or lowers the PID setpoint using the acceleration and deceleration times set to the drive This is a soft starter for the PID setpoint 0 0 s 0 0 6000 0 s The drive usually uses the acceleration and ...

Page 734: ... limit for the PID control as a percentage of E1 04 Maximum Output Frequency 0 0 100 0 100 0 Use a lower limit to keep PID control output from dropping below a fixed level Set this parameter to 0 0 to disable this function b5 35 PID Input Limit Level No Hex Name Description Default Range b5 35 01A0 RUN PID Input Limit Level Sets the input upper limit for the PID control as a percentage of E1 04 Ma...

Page 735: ...3 PID Unit Selection User Units the drive applies user set PID setpoint and display units to U5 01 PID Feedback and U5 04 PID Setpoint 0 No Decimal Places XXXXX 1 One Decimal Places XXXX X 2 Two Decimal Places XXX XX 3 Three Decimal Places XX XXX b5 40 Frequency Reference Monitor PID No Hex Name Description Default Range b5 40 017F Frequency Reference Monitor PID Sets the contents for monitor U1 0...

Page 736: ...put Output frequency Soft Starter 2 Soft Starter Output Output frequency Frequency Reference PID Frequency Reference Input 0 Disabled The soft starter process occurs downstream from the PID function The PID function input functions as the frequency reference the PID function output functions as the soft starter input and the soft starter output functions as the output frequency 1 Enabled The soft ...

Page 737: ...imit Sel Sets the function that adjusts the PID output in relation to the frequency reference 0 0 1 0 Disabled Does not adjust the PID output with the frequency reference 1 Enabled Adjusts the PID output in relation to the frequency reference The setting value of b5 62 PID Trim Mode Lower Limit Value sets the lower limit of the post adjustment value The maximum output frequency sets the upper limi...

Page 738: ...t b5 18 1 b5 19 PID Setpoint Selection Enabled to enable this parameter b5 66 PID Feedback Monitor Level No Hex Name Description Default Range b5 66 11DE PID Feedback Monitor Level Sets the signal level for the monitor specified in b5 55 PID Feedback Monitor Selection 0 0 1 0 Absolute 1 Bi directional b5 67 PID Differential FB Monitor Lvl No Hex Name Description Default Range b5 67 11DF PID Differ...

Page 739: ...escription Default Range b5 93 0B93 RUN EZ Sleep Time Sets the length of time that the output frequency or motor speed must be less than b5 92 EZ Sleep Level to enter Sleep Mode 5 0 s 0 0 1000 0 s b5 94 EZ Sleep Wake up Level No Hex Name Description Default Range b5 94 0B94 RUN EZ Sleep Wake up Level Sets the level at which the drive resumes operation when exiting Sleep Mode 0 00 0 00 600 00 Note ...

Page 740: ... the machine side causes sudden movement at the start of acceleration and deceleration At the start of acceleration the drive uses the output frequency and acceleration time set for the Dwell function to automatically operate at low speed to minimize the effects of backlash Then the drive can accelerate again The Dwell function operates the same for deceleration For conveyor applications the Dwell...

Page 741: ...ween two motors that operate the same load Droop control decreases motor speed as the load changes You must enable the Droop control function for each motor it is operating To decrease motor speed the Droop control function decreases the speed reference when an increase in the load increases the torque reference To increase motor speed the Droop control function increases the speed reference when ...

Page 742: ... motor Set parameters b8 04 b8 05 and b8 06 when using V f Control or Closed Loop V f Control Set parameters b8 02 b8 03 when using vector control with an induction motor Set parameters b8 16 b8 17 when using a PM motor Note Energy saving control is not appropriate for applications with sudden changes in the load or applications driving heavy loads such as a traverse car application Energy saving ...

Page 743: ...ue it decreases the output voltage and decreases power consumption If the setting value is too low the motor will stall Note When you do Rotational Auto Tuning the drive will automatically set the energy saving coefficient b8 05 Power Detection Filter Time No Hex Name Description Default Range b8 05 01D0 Expert Power Detection Filter Time Sets the time constant to measure output power 20 ms 0 2000...

Page 744: ...hat it aligns with the Kt value on the motor nameplate 2 If the numbers are different set b8 17 to the Kt value on the motor nameplate b8 18 E Save d axis Current FilterTime No Hex Name Description Default Range b8 18 01FA Expert E Save d axis Current FilterTime Sets the d axis current reference filter time constant 0 100 s 0 000 5 000 s b8 19 E Save Search Injection Freq No Hex Name Description D...

Page 745: ... 23 0B44 Expert PM E Save Search Limit Sets the search operations output limit Usually it is not necessary to change this setting 15 0 degrees 0 0 30 0 degrees When the motor characteristics are correct increase this value to make the motor more efficient b8 24 PM E Save High Freq ACR Gain No Hex Name Description Default Range b8 24 0B45 Expert PM E Save High Freq ACR Gain Sets the gain for high f...

Page 746: ... Default Range b8 50 0B0D Standby Mode Selection Sets the Standby Mode function 0 0 1 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Standby Mode decreases how much power the drive consumes when it is in standby Standby Mode waits for the drive to stop then uses the relay output of an MFDO terminal to shut off the input side electromagnetic contactor MC and then shut off the main circuit power supply Note These conditions ...

Page 747: ...rt position when Zero Servo is enabled To find the difference divide the number of pulses shown in U6 22 by 4 When the position of the motor shaft is in the range of Zero Servo start position b9 02 Zero Servo Completion Window the drive will activate the MFDO set for Zero Servo Complete H2 xx 33 NOTICE Do not let the Zero Servo function hold 100 load for long periods of time When the application m...

Page 748: ...ion Window Sets the range to trigger an output terminal set for Zero Servo Complete during Zero Servo operation Be sure to set the deviation from the Zero Servo start position 10 0 16383 When the position of the motor shaft is in the range of Zero Servo start position b9 02 the drive will activate a MFDO set for Zero Servo Complete H2 xx 33 V f CL V f OLV CLV AOLV OLV PM OLV PM AOLV PM CLV PM EZOL...

Page 749: ... C1 01 Acceleration Time 1 0 0 to 6000 0 s C1 02 Deceleration Time 1 C1 03 Acceleration Time 2 C1 04 Deceleration Time 2 C1 05 Acceleration Time 3 C1 06 Deceleration Time 3 C1 07 Acceleration Time 4 C1 08 Deceleration Time 4 Note When C1 10 0 Accel Decel Time Setting Units 0 01 s 0 00 to 600 00 s the setting range for acceleration and deceleration times is 0 00 s to 600 00 s Use MFDIs to Switch Ac...

Page 750: ... Level to Switch Acceleration and Deceleration Times The drive can use output frequency to automatically switch between different acceleration and deceleration times The acceleration and deceleration times for the drive are switched automatically When the output frequency C1 11 Accel Decel Time Switchover Freq the drive automatically switches the acceleration and deceleration times Set C1 11 0 0 H...

Page 751: ...e setting range is 0 00 to 600 00 s C1 04 Deceleration Time 2 No Hex Name Description Default Range C1 04 0203 RUN Deceleration Time 2 Sets the length of time to decelerate from maximum output frequency to zero 10 0 s 0 0 6000 0 s Note When C1 10 0 Accel Decel Time Setting Units 0 01 s 0 00 to 600 00 s the setting range is 0 00 to 600 00 s C1 05 Acceleration Time 3 No Hex Name Description Default ...

Page 752: ...nput of the Fast Stop command via the multi function digital input terminal The Fast Stop operation is will be triggered when by the input of the Fast Stop command is input via the multi function digital input terminal Set H1 xx 15 17 MFDI Function Select Fast Stop N O Fast Stop N C When the Fast Stop command is input the Fast Stop operation will be triggered at the deceleration time set to C1 09 ...

Page 753: ...the Motor 2 Selection function Table 11 36 Motor and Acceleration and Deceleration Time Combination C1 11 Motor 1 Motor 2 Acceleration Time Deceleration Time Acceleration Time Deceleration Time Less than the setting value C1 07 Acceleration Time 4 C1 08 Deceleration Time 4 C1 07 Acceleration Time 4 C1 08 Deceleration Time 4 Equal to or more than the setting value C1 01 Acceleration Time 1 C1 02 De...

Page 754: ...z E1 04 60 Hz and the Frequency Reference is 60 Hz Note Figure 11 48 to Figure 11 50 show the accel decel times when C2 01 to C2 04 S Curve Times Start End of Accel Decel 0 00 s When L3 01 0 Stall Prevention during Accel Disabled Stall Prevention could cause the acceleration time to be longer than the set value When L3 04 0 Stall Prevention during Decel Disabled Stall Prevention could cause the de...

Page 755: ...t start 0 20 s 0 00 10 00 s C2 04 S Curve Time End of Decel No Hex Name Description Default Range C2 04 020E S Curve Time End of Decel Sets the S curve deceleration time at completion 0 00 s 0 00 10 00 s C3 Slip Compensation The Slip Compensation function improves the speed accuracy of an induction motor As loads on induction motors increase motor slip increases and motor speed decreases By adjust...

Page 756: ... Usually it is not necessary to change this setting Determined by A1 02 0 10000 ms It can be necessary to adjust the parameter in these conditions If the speed is not stable increase this parameter If the slip compensation response is too slow decrease the setting C3 03 Slip Compensation Limit No Hex Name Description Default Range C3 03 0211 Slip Compensation Limit Sets the upper limit for the sli...

Page 757: ...eases the output current to a maximum of 10 when the motor is running at constant speed The drive will also decrease flux and increase current to compensate torque Enable this parameter to increase speed precision when you move heavy loads at high speeds in these conditions Power supply voltage is low Motor rated voltage is high Do not enable this parameter in these conditions Operating a motor in...

Page 758: ... 2 when speed is unstable or when the slip compensation response is too slow Usually it is not necessary to change this setting Determined by E3 01 0 10000 ms It can be necessary to adjust this parameter in these conditions When the speed is not stable increase the setting When the slip compensation response is too slow decrease the setting C3 23 Motor 2 Slip Compensation Limit No Hex Name Descrip...

Page 759: ... slip compensation function during regenerative operation Slip compensation is enabled at frequencies as low as 2 Hz C3 28 Adaptive Slip Control Mode No Hex Name Description Default Range C3 28 1B5B Expert Adaptive Slip Control Mode Sets the slip compensation function mode 0 0 1 0 Normal 1 Advanced Note Set C3 28 0 for better torque precision If the torque precision does is not better set C3 28 1 ...

Page 760: ...can be necessary to adjust this parameter in these conditions If there is vibration in the motor increase the setting If the motor speed or motor torque response is too slow decrease the setting C4 03 Torque Compensation FWD Start No Hex Name Description Default Range C4 03 0217 Torque Compensation FWD Start Sets the amount of torque reference for forward start as a percentage of the motor rated t...

Page 761: ... drive with a light load decrease the setting value When you use a long motor cable increase the setting value Note Adjust C4 07 to make sure that the output current is not more than the drive rated current when operating the drive with a light load In usual conditions do not change this parameter in OLV Control It can have a negative effect on torque precision Setting this value too high can caus...

Page 762: ... for PM CLV PM PM Advanced Open Loop Vector AOLV PM EZ Vector Control EZOLV Torque Reference Figure 11 54 is a speed control block diagram of each control method Figure 11 54 Speed Control Block Diagram for Closed Loop V f Control CL V f Figure 11 55 Speed Control Block Diagram for CLV AOLV CLV PM AOLV PM and EZOLV Note The detected speed is the speed estimation value when configured such that A1 ...

Page 763: ...decrease the value set in C5 05 ASR Limit to decrease the upper limit of the frequency reference compensation ASR Adjustment Procedure for CLV AOLV AOLV PM CLV PM and EZOLV Do this procedure to adjust ASR parameters 1 Run the motor at zero speed or low speed and increase C5 01 ASR Proportional Gain 1 until immediately before vibration starts to occur 2 Run the motor at zero speed or low speed and ...

Page 764: ...gs of MFAO Terminals to Monitor Speed Waveforms No Name Setting Value Description H4 01 Terminal FM Analog Output Select 116 Lets you use terminal FM to monitor U1 16 SFS Output Frequency H4 02 Terminal FM Analog Output Gain 100 0 H4 03 Terminal FM Analog Output Bias 0 0 H4 04 Terminal AM Analog Output Select 105 Lets you use the terminal AM to monitor U1 05 Motor Speed H4 05 Terminal AM Analog Ou...

Page 765: ...ease the value set to C5 05 Oscillation at low speed and response is too slow at high speed Oscillation at high speed and response is too slow at low speed Closed Loop V f Control Mode Use C5 03 and C5 04 at maximum speed and C5 01 and C5 02 at minimum speed to set different ASR settings Closed Loop Vector Control PM Advanced Open Loop Vector Control and PM Closed Loop Vector Control Use C5 01 to ...

Page 766: ...gral time that is too short can cause oscillation C5 05 ASR Limit No Hex Name Description Default Range C5 05 021F ASR Limit Sets the ASR output limit as a percentage of E1 04 Maximum Output Frequency 5 0 0 0 20 0 If the motor rated slip is high it could be necessary to increase the setting to provide correct motor speed control Use U6 04 ASR Output to make sure that ASR is operating at the limit ...

Page 767: ... you are driving a heavy load or a high inertia load it could cause problems with overshoot or undershoot at the end of acceleration and deceleration If there are problems with overshooting and undershooting set this parameter to 0 Disabled Integral operation is not enabled during acceleration or deceleration Integral operation is always enabled during constant speed 1 Enabled Integral operation i...

Page 768: ...ASR with C5 21 Motor 2 ASR Proportional Gain 1 and C5 22 You can also use C5 24 Motor 2 ASR Integral Time 2 as an alternative to C5 22 when the speed is less than or equal to the frequency set in C5 27 Motor 2 ASR Gain Switchover Freq C5 23 Motor 2 ASR Proportional Gain 2 No Hex Name Description Default Range C5 23 0358 RUN Motor 2 ASR Proportional Gain 2 Sets the gain to adjust ASR response for m...

Page 769: ...or 2 ASR Gain Switchover Freq Sets the frequency where the drive will switch between these parameters C5 21 and C5 23 Motor 2 ASR Proportional Gain 1 2 C5 22 and C5 24 Motor 2 ASR Integral Time 1 2 0 0 0 0 400 0 Switching the proportional gain and integral time in the low or high speed range can help operation become stable A good switching point is 80 of the frequency where oscillation occurs or ...

Page 770: ... Inertia Ratio Sets the load inertia ratio for the motor 2 inertia 1 0 0 0 6000 0 The drive automatically sets C5 38 to the value of Load Inertia Ratio when you do Inertia Tuning or ASR Tuning C5 39 ASR Primary Delay Time Const 2 No Hex Name Description Default Range C5 39 030D ASR Primary Delay Time Const 2 Sets the filter time constant for the time from the speed loop to the torque command outpu...

Page 771: ...g ND The drive rated output current overload tolerance and acceleration stall prevention level change when the duty rating changes Set the drive to agree with the duty rating of the selected drive capacity In HD the tolerance is 150 overload for 60 seconds In ND the tolerance is 110 overload for 60 seconds The rated output current for ND drives is higher than the rated output current for HD drives...

Page 772: ... Selection Sets the carrier frequency for the transistors in the drive Determined by A1 02 C6 01 and o2 04 Determined by A1 02 Changes to the switching frequency will decrease audible noise and decrease leakage current Note Increasing the carrier frequency to more than the default setting will automatically decrease the drive current rating 1 2 0 kHz 2 5 0 kHz 4 0 kHz for AOLV PM 3 8 0 kHz 6 0 kHz...

Page 773: ...parameter Determined by C6 02 1 0 15 0 kHz Setting a Fixed User Defined Carrier Frequency When you cannot use C6 02 to set a carrier frequency between set selectable values you can set the value in C6 03 The carrier frequency will be fixed to the value set to C6 03 When A1 02 0 1 Control Method Selection V f Control V f Control with Encoder set C6 03 C6 04 Carrier Frequency Lower Limit to fix the ...

Page 774: ...ier Freq at Rotational Tune No Hex Name Description Default Range C6 09 022B Carrier Freq at Rotational Tune Sets the Auto Tuning carrier frequency Usually it is not necessary to change this setting 0 0 1 If you do Auto Tuning to a high frequency motor or low impedance motor and set a low carrier frequency oC Overcurrent can occur To prevent oC you can set the carrier frequency to a high value the...

Page 775: ...ive has a multi step speed operation function that can set many frequency references in advance Set frequency references in d1 xx parameters You can select the set frequency references with MFDI signals from an external source Activate and deactivate the digital input to select the frequency reference to change the motor speed in steps You can use the 16 step frequency reference and one Jog Freque...

Page 776: ...1 Set b1 01 0 Frequency Reference Selection 1 Keypad 2 Sets the value of d1 01 Reference 1 2 Reference 2 1 Sets H3 06 F Terminal A3 Function Selection Not Used and disables the analog reference 2 Set d1 02 Reference 2 3 Reference 3 1 Sets H3 10 F Terminal A2 Function Selection Not Used and disables the analog reference 2 Set d1 03 Reference 3 4 Reference 4 Set d1 04 Reference 4 5 Reference 5 to 16...

Page 777: ... 10 d1 10 ON OFF OFF ON OFF Reference 11 d1 11 OFF ON OFF ON OFF Reference 12 d1 12 ON ON OFF ON OFF Reference 13 d1 13 OFF OFF ON ON OFF Reference 14 d1 14 ON OFF ON ON OFF Reference 15 d1 15 OFF ON ON ON OFF Reference 16 d1 16 ON ON ON ON OFF Jog Reference d1 17 1 ON 1 Jog Reference JOG command is more important than all other frequency references Figure 11 61 Time Chart for Multi step Speed Ref...

Page 778: ... Default Range d1 03 0282 RUN Reference 3 Sets the frequency reference in the units from o1 03 Keypad Display Selection 0 00 Hz 0 00 590 00 Hz Note The upper limit value changes when the E1 04 Maximum Output Frequency and d2 01 Frequency Reference Upper Limit values change When A1 02 6 7 Control Method Selection PM Advanced Open Loop Vector PM Closed Loop Vector the drive changes o1 03 1 0 01 100 ...

Page 779: ... change When A1 02 6 7 Control Method Selection PM Advanced Open Loop Vector PM Closed Loop Vector the drive changes o1 03 1 0 01 100 E1 04 This parameter sets the frequency reference of Multi Step Speed 7 d1 08 Reference 8 No Hex Name Description Default Range d1 08 0287 RUN Reference 8 Sets the frequency reference in the units from o1 03 Frequency Display Unit Selection 0 00 Hz 0 00 590 00 Hz No...

Page 780: ...ference of Multi Step Speed 11 d1 12 Reference 12 No Hex Name Description Default Range d1 12 028D RUN Reference 12 Sets the frequency reference in the units from o1 03 Frequency Display Unit Selection 0 00 Hz 0 00 590 00 Hz Note The upper limit value changes when the E1 04 Maximum Output Frequency and d2 01 Frequency Reference Upper Limit values change When A1 02 6 7 Control Method Selection PM A...

Page 781: ...rom o1 03 Frequency Display Unit Selection 0 00 Hz 0 00 590 00 Hz Note The upper limit value changes when the E1 04 Maximum Output Frequency and d2 01 Frequency Reference Upper Limit values change When A1 02 6 7 Control Method Selection PM Advanced Open Loop Vector PM Closed Loop Vector the drive changes o1 03 1 0 01 100 E1 04 This parameter sets the frequency reference of Multi Step Speed 16 d1 1...

Page 782: ... 0293 Analog Frequency Ref Lower Limit Sets the lower limit of the master frequency reference Multi Step Speed 1 as a percentage of E1 04 Maximum Output Frequency 0 0 0 0 110 0 This parameter does not change the lower limit of Jog reference frequency reference for multi step speed operation or the auxiliary frequency reference The drive operates at the value set in d2 03 when the frequency referen...

Page 783: ...eration Time 1 and C1 02 Deceleration Time 1 d3 01 Jump Frequency 1 No Hex Name Description Default Range d3 01 0294 Jump Frequency 1 Sets the median value of the frequency band that the drive will avoid 0 0 Hz Determined by A1 02 Note Set this parameter to 0 0 Hz to disable the Jump frequency d3 02 Jump Frequency 2 No Hex Name Description Default Range d3 02 0295 Jump Frequency 2 Sets the median ...

Page 784: ...p Down command is a function to activate and deactivate an MFDI to increase and decrease the frequency reference The Up Down command overrides frequency references from the analog input terminal pulse train input terminal and keypad Up Down 2 command The Up Down 2 command is a function that adds a set bias value to the frequency reference to accelerate or decelerate The Up Down 2 command activates...

Page 785: ... frequency reference value to which the bias value was added The drive will use the new value as the frequency reference when it restarts Figure 11 65 Up Down 2 Example with Reference from Keypad and d4 01 1 Up Down 2 Command with Frequency Reference from Input Sources Other Than the Keypad When a Run command is active and you release the Up Down 2 command for longer than 5 s the drive will save t...

Page 786: ...is active the drive uses the accel decel times set in d4 04 Up Down 2 Ramp Selection to increase or decrease the bias value Figure 11 67 Up Down 2 Bias when d4 03 0 00 Hz Setting d4 03 0 00 Hz When the Up Down 2 Command H1 xx 75 76 is active the drive increases or decreases the bias in steps for the value set in d4 03 The drive uses the acceleration and deceleration times set in d4 04 Figure 11 68...

Page 787: ... sets the frequency reference the drive will store the bias value adjusted with the Up Down 2 command in d4 06 5 seconds after you release the Up Down 2 command The drive adds or subtracts the value set in d4 06 to the frequency reference Conditions that Reset or Disable d4 06 The drive resets and disables the bias value in these conditions d4 01 0 and the Run command was cleared H1 xx 75 76 MFDI ...

Page 788: ... the drive will reset the value to 0 If you increase the bias with the Up 2 command and d4 09 0 you cannot use a Down 2 command to decrease the frequency reference To decrease speed in this condition set a negative lower limit in d4 09 d4 10 Up Down Freq Lower Limit Select No Hex Name Description Default Range d4 10 02B6 Up Down Freq Lower Limit Select Sets the lower frequency limit for the Up Dow...

Page 789: ...ted When the frequency reference is 0 to 50 the drive reverses the motor in the set direction When the frequency reference is 50 to 100 the drive operates the motor in the set direction Figure 11 69 shows the frequency reference change at this time This is an example of operation when the Forward Run command is input Figure 11 69 Frequency Reference Transition when PID Control is Disabled or PID D...

Page 790: ... and A1 02 4 use a motor designed for winding applications Use one of these methods to enable Torque Control Set d5 01 1 Torque Control Selection Torque Control Set H1 xx 71 Torque Control ON Torque Control Operation Figure 11 71 shows the operation principle of Torque Control Figure 11 71 Torque Control Block Diagram The externally input torque reference is the target value for the motor output t...

Page 791: ... 1 Speed Limit Selection Active Frequency Reference The drive gets the speed limit from the frequency reference source input in b1 01 or b1 15 Frequency Reference Selection 2 1 The drive applies the settings in C1 01 to C1 08 Acceleration Deceleration Times and C2 01 to C2 04 S Curve Time Start End of Accel Decel to the speed limit d5 04 Speed Limit d5 03 2 d5 04 Setting Torque Compensation Drive ...

Page 792: ...the positive or negative signed torque reference When the level of the analog signal input is 0 V to 10 Vor 4 mA to 20 mA the torque reference is the forward direction To reverse the polarity of the torque reference use one of these two methods Use a 10 V to 10 V voltage input Set H1 xx 78 MFDI Function Select Analog TorqueRef Polarity Invert Speed Limit and Speed Limit Bias The drive reads the sp...

Page 793: ...mit becomes the torque reference and the speed reference becomes the speed limit When you switch from Torque Control to Speed Control the torque reference becomes the torque limit and the speed limit becomes the speed reference When you must use a delay time to switch between Speed Control and Torque Control set d5 06 Speed Torque Changeover Time During this switch delay time the drive keeps the r...

Page 794: ...it Selection No Hex Name Description Default Range d5 03 029C Speed Limit Selection Sets the torque control speed limit method 1 1 2 1 Active Frequency Reference The enabled frequency reference set in b1 01 Frequency Reference Selection 1 or b1 15 Frequency Reference Selection 2 will be the speed limit The drive applies the values set in C1 01 to C1 08 Acceleration Deceleration Times 1 to 4 and C2...

Page 795: ...ly proportional to speed in a constant output range and does not let the induced voltage of the motor become more than the power supply voltage To enable this function set Field Weakening H1 xx 63 ON Note Use the Field Weakening function in constant light load applications To control the energy consumption of the motor for other load conditions use the b8 parameters Energy Saving The Field Forcing...

Page 796: ...igital signal inputs to add or subtract the set frequency Offset frequency to from the frequency reference and correct the speed The drive uses the terminal set in H1 xx 44 to 46 MFDI Function Select Add Offset Frequency 1 to 3 to set the Offset frequency When you close more than one input at the same time the drive adds the selected offset values together Figure 11 73 shows the Offset frequency f...

Page 797: ...elect Add Offset Frequency 2 d7 02 as a percentage of E1 04 Maximum Output Frequency 0 0 100 0 100 0 d7 03 Offset Frequency 3 No Hex Name Description Default Range d7 03 02B4 RUN Offset Frequency 3 Sets the value to add to or subtract from the frequency reference when H1 xx 46 MFDI Function Select Add Offset Frequency 3 d7 03 as a percentage of E1 04 Maximum Output Frequency 0 0 100 0 100 0 V f CL...

Page 798: ...neral purpose applications This pattern is used when the load torque is constant without any rotation speed such as that used for linear conveyor systems 1 Const Trq 60Hz base 60Hz max 2 Const Trq 50Hz base 60Hz max 3 Const Trq 60Hz base 72Hz max 4 VT 50Hz 65 Vmid reduction Variable torque This pattern is used for torque loads proportional to 2 or 3 times the rotation speed such as is the case wit...

Page 799: ...to obey will cause incorrect drive operation Values Related to the Drive Input Voltage The value set in E1 01 is the base value used for the motor protective functions in Table 11 48 With a 400 V class drive the detection level changes for some motor protective functions Table 11 48 Values Related to the Drive Input Voltage Voltage E1 01 Setting Approximate Values ov Detection Level BTR Operation ...

Page 800: ...q 60Hz base 60Hz max Use this constant torque pattern for general applications Use this pattern when the load torque is constant and there is no rotation speed For example linear conveyor systems Note The voltage values in the figures are for 200 V class drives Multiply the values by 2 for 400 V class drives HD 2004 2021 4002 4012 ND 2004 2018 4002 4009 HD 2030 2211 4018 4103 ND 2021 2169 4012 408...

Page 801: ...400 V class drives HD 2004 2021 4002 4012 ND 2004 2018 4002 4009 HD 2030 2211 4018 4103 ND 2021 2169 4012 4089 HD 2257 2415 4140 4675 ND 2211 2415 4103 4675 5 VT 50Hz 50 Vmid reduction Use this derated torque pattern for torque loads proportional to two times the rotation speed For example fans and pumps Note The voltage values in the figures are for 200 V class drives Multiply the values by 2 for...

Page 802: ...t Use this pattern when moderate torque is necessary during start up Select this pattern only in these conditions The wiring distance between the drive and motor is 150 m 492 1 ft minimum There is an AC reactor connected to the drive output Note The voltage values in the figures are for 200 V class drives Multiply the values by 2 for 400 V class drives HD 2004 2021 4002 4012 ND 2004 2018 4002 4009...

Page 803: ...9 HD 2030 2211 4018 4103 ND 2021 2169 4012 4089 HD 2257 2415 4140 4675 ND 2211 2415 4103 4675 B High Trq 60 Hz 65 Vmin boost Use this pattern when high torque is necessary during start up Select this pattern only in these conditions The wiring distance between the drive and motor is 150 m 492 1 ft minimum There is an AC reactor connected to the drive output Note The voltage values in the figures a...

Page 804: ... Freq 60 Hz base 180 Hz max Use this constant output pattern to rotate motors at more than 60 Hz Output voltage is constant when you operate at more than 60 Hz Note The voltage values in the figures are for 200 V class drives Multiply the values by 2 for 400 V class drives HD 2004 2021 4002 4012 ND 2004 2018 4002 4009 HD 2030 2211 4018 4103 ND 2021 2169 4012 4089 HD 2257 2415 4140 4675 ND 2211 241...

Page 805: ...attern Determined by A1 02 C6 01 and o2 04 200 V Class 0 0 to 255 0 V 400 V Class 0 0 to 510 0 V Note Default setting is determined by A1 02 Control Method Selection C6 01 Normal Heavy Duty Selection and o2 04 Drive Model Selection E1 09 Minimum Output Frequency No Hex Name Description Default Range E1 09 0308 Minimum Output Frequency Sets the minimum output frequency for the V f pattern Determine...

Page 806: ...Parameters are used to set induction motor data To switch drive operation from one motor to another motor configure the first motor motor 1 Performing Auto Tuning automatically sets the E2 parameters to the optimal values If Auto Tuning cannot be performed set the E2 parameters manually Note If A1 02 Control Method Selection is set to the following control modes the keypad does not display E2 xx 5...

Page 807: ... drive automatically sets this parameter during Auto Tuning When you cannot do Auto Tuning you can also use the motor no load current on the motor test report to enter this value manually Contact the motor manufacturer to receive a copy of the motor test report Note The default setting of the no load current is for operation with a 4 pole motor recommended by Yaskawa E2 04 Motor Pole Count No Hex ...

Page 808: ... this parameter The drive uses this coefficient when it operates with constant output E2 08 Motor Saturation Coefficient 2 No Hex Name Description Default Range E2 08 0315 Motor Saturation Coefficient 2 Sets the motor iron core saturation coefficient at 75 of the magnetic flux 0 75 E2 07 0 75 Rotational Auto Tuning automatically sets this parameter The drive uses this coefficient when it operates ...

Page 809: ...n E3 06 Motor 2 Base Frequency set E3 07 E3 09 Motor 2 Mid Point A Frequency Motor 2 Minimum Output Frequency In this application the drive ignores E1 08 Mid Point A Voltage Set the five frequencies as specified by these rules E3 09 E3 07 E3 06 E3 11 E3 04 Motor 2 Minimum Output Frequency Motor 2 Mid Point A Frequency Motor 2 Base Frequency Motor 2 Mid Point B Frequency Motor 2 Maximum Output Freq...

Page 810: ...rn Determined by E3 01 0 0 E3 04 E3 08 Motor 2 Mid Point A Voltage No Hex Name Description Default Range E3 08 031E Motor 2 Mid Point A Voltage Sets a middle output voltage for the motor 2 V f pattern Determined by E3 01 200 V Class 0 0 255 0 V 400 V Class 0 0 510 0 V E3 09 Motor 2 Minimum Output Frequency No Hex Name Description Default Range E3 09 031F Motor 2 Minimum Output Frequency Sets the m...

Page 811: ...ge for the motor 2 V f pattern Set this parameter to adjust the V f pattern for the constant output range Usually it is not necessary to change this setting 0 0 V 200 V Class 0 0 255 0 V 400 V Class 0 0 510 0 V Note When you initialize the drive this parameter is reset to the default value The setting value changes automatically when you do Auto Tuning rotational and stationary 1 or 2 E4 Motor 2 P...

Page 812: ...he drive sets this parameter during Rotational Auto Tuning and Stationary Auto Tuning You can also enter the motor no load current shown on the motor test report to E4 03 manually Contact the motor manufacturer to receive a copy of the motor test report Note The default setting of the no load current is for a 4 pole motor recommended by Yaskawa E4 04 Motor 2 Motor Poles No Hex Name Description Def...

Page 813: ...cient when it operates with constant output E4 08 Motor 2 Saturation Coefficient 2 No Hex Name Description Default Range E4 08 0344 Motor 2 Saturation Coefficient 2 Sets the motor 2 iron core saturation coefficient at 75 of the magnetic flux 0 75 E4 07 0 75 The drive sets this parameter during Rotational Auto Tuning The drive uses this value to operate the motor at constant output E4 09 Motor 2 Me...

Page 814: ...x only when A1 02 5 6 7 Control Method Selection OLV PM AOLV PM CLV PM E5 xx parameters are not reset when the drive is initialized using parameter A1 03 Initialize Parameters E5 01 PM Motor Code Selection No Hex Name Description Default Range E5 01 0329 PM Motor Code Selection Sets the motor code for Yaskawa PM motors The drive uses the motor code to set some parameters to their correct settings ...

Page 815: ... 48 These types of Auto Tuning will automatically set this parameter to the value of Number of Motor Poles PM Motor Parameter Settings PM Stationary Auto Tuning PM Rotational Auto Tuning E5 05 PM Motor Resistance ohms phase No Hex Name Description Default Range E5 05 032D PM Motor Resistance ohms phase Sets the resistance per phase of the PM motors Set 50 of the line to line resistance Determined ...

Page 816: ... E5 09 0 0 and E5 24 0 0 E5 09 0 0 and E5 24 0 0 E5 11 Encoder Z Pulse Offset No Hex Name Description Default Range E5 11 0333 Encoder Z Pulse Offset Sets the encoder Z pulse offset 0 0 degrees 180 0 180 0 degrees The drive uses the PM motor parameter settings and PM Stationary Auto Tuning to set E5 11 to the value input for Encoder Z Pulse Offset automatically The drive uses Z Pulse Offset Tuning...

Page 817: ... type of motor 0 0 2 EZ Tuning automatically sets this parameter to the value of Motor Type Selection 0 Induction IM 1 Permanent Magnet PM 2 Synchronous Reluctance SynRM E9 02 Maximum Speed No Hex Name Description Default Range E9 02 11E5 Maximum Speed Sets the maximum speed of the motor Determined by E9 01 40 0 120 0 Hz Note The unit of measure changes when the setting of o1 04 V f Pattern Displa...

Page 818: ...nt E9 07 Motor Rated Power kW No Hex Name Description Default Range E9 07 11EA Motor Rated Power kW Sets the motor rated power in 0 01 kW increments 1 HP 0 746 kW Determined by E9 02 and o2 04 0 00 650 00 kW Auto Tuning automatically sets this parameter to the value of Motor Rated Power kW Note When the maximum applicable motor output larger than 300 kW the parameter value is in 0 1 kW units E9 08...

Page 819: ...is value is the motor line to line resistance Do not set this parameter with the single phase resistance Stationary Auto Tuning automatically sets this parameter If you cannot do Stationary Auto Tuning use the test report from the motor manufacturer You can calculate the motor line to line resistance with one of these formulas E type insulation the resistance value Ω shown on the test report at 75...

Page 820: ...and references are configured correctly If you set the command reference incorrectly it can cause death serious injury or equipment damage from unwanted motor rotation WARNING Sudden Movement Hazard Conduct proper host controller safety design to prevent motors from running uncontrolled when there is a loss of speed feedback The motor has a potential to run uncontrolled Table 11 49 Encoder Option ...

Page 821: ... C1 09 Fast Stop Time Fault relay output terminal MA MC activates and terminal MB MC deactivates 3 Alarm Only The keypad shows PGo and the drive continues operation Only use this setting in special conditions to prevent damage to the motor and machinery The output terminal set for Alarm H2 01 to H2 03 10 activates 4 No Alarm Display The drive continues operation and does not show PGo on the keypad...

Page 822: ...tes 2 Fast Stop Use C1 09 The drive stops the motor in the deceleration time set in C1 09 Fast Stop Time Fault relay output terminal MA MC activates and terminal MB MC deactivates 3 Alarm Only The keypad shows dEv and the drive continues operation Only use this setting in special conditions to prevent damage to the motor and machinery The output terminal set for Alarm H2 01 to H2 03 10 activates F...

Page 823: ...and the actual motor speed is more than the value set in F1 10 for longer than the time set in F1 11 Speed Deviation Detect DelayTime the drive will detect dEv F1 11 Speed Deviation Detect DelayTime No Hex Name Description Default Range F1 11 038A Speed Deviation Detect DelayTime Sets the length of time that the difference between the frequency reference and speed feedback must be more than the le...

Page 824: ...nditions at the same time for the number of times set in F1 18 the drive will detect dv3 The torque reference and acceleration are in opposite directions For example torque reference is in forward run and the acceleration is in a negative direction The difference between the speed reference and the actual motor speed is more than 30 Note Reference the setting value for E5 11 Encoder Z Pulse Offset...

Page 825: ...t Range F1 31 03B0 Encoder 2 Pulse Count PPR Sets the number of output pulses for each motor revolution for motor 2 1024 ppr 1 60000 ppr F1 32 Encoder 2 Rotation Selection No Hex Name Description Default Range F1 32 03B1 Encoder 2 Rotation Selection Sets the output sequence for the A and B pulses from the encoder for motor 2 This parameter assumes that the motor is operating in the forward directi...

Page 826: ...st digit is the numerator and the second and third digits set the denominator 001 001 032 102 132 1 1 32 When the setting value is a 3 digit value xyz the dividing ratio is 1 x yz For example when F1 35 032 the dividing ratio is 1 32 Note For a single pulse encoder the dividing ratio for the monitor signal is 1 1 F1 36 Encoder 2 PCB Disconnect Detect No Hex Name Description Default Range F1 36 03B...

Page 827: ...function 0 1M 9600bps 1 500k 19200bps 2 1M 38400bps F2 Analog Input Option F2 parameters set the operation of the drive when you use analog input option card AI A3 The AI A3 card has 3 input terminals that accept voltages of 10 V to 10 V 20 kΩ or currents of 4 mA to 20 mA 250 Ω Install the AI A3 card to enable setting very accurate analog references with high resolution Refer to the AI A3 card man...

Page 828: ...t the frequency reference directly The sum value when you add the input from terminals V1 to V3 becomes the frequency reference Set F2 01 1 to use the AI A3 card as addition input Figure 11 78 shows addition input Use F2 02 Analog Input Option Card Gain and F2 03 Analog Input Option Card Bias to adjust the analog reference gain and bias for addition input Figure 11 78 Analog Input Reference Additi...

Page 829: ...et the frequency reference when you install the DI A3 card in a drive Set b1 01 3 Frequency Reference Selection 1 Option PCB to use this card as the frequency reference input The input signal is isolated input of 24 Vdc and 8 mA Binary 16 bit BCD 4 digit input Binary 12 bit BCD 3 digit input Binary 8 bit BCD 2 digit input You can also use the DI A3 card as an MFDI if the setting of F3 01 is correc...

Page 830: ...its 3 BCD 1 Hz units 4 BCD 0 1 Hz units 5 BCD 0 01 Hz units 6 BCD 5 digit 0 01 Hz 7 Binary input The setting unit and setting range vary depending on the value set in F3 03 Digital Input Data Length Select F3 03 0 8 bit 100 255 255 to 255 F3 03 1 12 bit 100 4095 4095 to 4095 F3 03 2 16 bit 100 30000 33000 to 33000 8 Multi Function Digital Input The DI A3 card is also used as a multi function digit...

Page 831: ...Loads the value set for D0 to DF and SI SP Internal power supply 24 V 5 SC Input signal common SN Internal power supply common 0 V SD Cable sheath connection terminal ungrounded FE Cable sheath connection terminal grounded 1 Setting F3 03 2 Digital Input Data Length Select 16 bit enables F3 01 6 Digital Input Function Selection BCD 5 digit 0 01 Hz and a frequency between 0 00 Hz to 399 8 Hz can be...

Page 832: ...gital Input Function Selection Multi Function Digital Input F 1 19F F3 15 Terminal D5 Function Selection No Hex Name Description Default Range F3 15 0BE8 Expert Terminal D5 Function Selection Sets the function for terminal D5 of the DI A3 when F3 01 8 Digital Input Function Selection Multi Function Digital Input F 1 19F F3 16 Terminal D6 Function Selection No Hex Name Description Default Range F3 ...

Page 833: ... F3 01 8 Digital Input Function Selection Multi Function Digital Input F 1 19F F3 22 Terminal DC Function Selection No Hex Name Description Default Range F3 22 0BEF Expert Terminal DC Function Selection Sets the function for terminal DC of the DI A3 when F3 01 8 Digital Input Function Selection Multi Function Digital Input F 1 19F F3 23 Terminal DD Function Selection No Hex Name Description Defaul...

Page 834: ...just F4 05 Use Gain and Bias to Adjust the Output Signal Level of Terminal V2 You must stop the drive to adjust the output signal Use this procedure to calibrate the drive 1 View the F4 04 Terminal V2 Gain value on the keypad Terminal V2 will output a voltage 100 of the monitor set in F4 03 Terminal V2 Function Selection 2 View the monitor connected to terminal V2 and adjust F4 04 3 View the F4 06...

Page 835: ...nications option F4 04 Terminal V2 Gain No Hex Name Description Default Range F4 04 0394 RUN Terminal V2 Gain Sets the gain of the monitor signal that is sent from terminal V2 50 0 999 9 999 9 The maximum output voltage output from terminal V2 is 10 V Use F4 08 Terminal V2 Signal Level to set the signal level Example settings When you use these settings and the monitored output voltage is at 100 d...

Page 836: ...el No Hex Name Description Default Range F4 08 0398 Terminal V2 Signal Level Sets the output signal level for terminal V2 0 0 1 0 0 to 10 V 1 10 to 10 V F5 Digital Output Option F5 parameters set the output mode and function of output signals when you use digital output option card DO A3 When you install a DO A3 to the drive you can output isolated digital signals to monitor the drive operation st...

Page 837: ...t Depending on the setting of F5 03 Terminal P3 PC Function Select P4 PC Not used Depending on the setting of F5 04 Terminal P4 PC Function Select P5 PC oS Overspeed Zero speed detection in progress Depending on the setting of F5 05 Terminal P5 PC Function Select P6 PC oH oH1 Heatsink Overheat or oL1 Motor Overload During speed agreement Depending on the setting of F5 06 Terminal P6 PC Function Se...

Page 838: ...unction Select No Hex Name Description Default Range F5 01 0399 Terminal P1 PC Function Select Sets the function of terminal P1 PC on the DO A3 option Set F5 09 2 DO A3 Output Mode Selection Programmable F5 01 to F5 08 to enable this function 0 0 1A7 F5 02 Terminal P2 PC Function Select No Hex Name Description Default Range F5 02 039A Terminal P2 PC Function Select Sets the function of terminal P2...

Page 839: ...0 1A7 F5 09 DO A3 Output Mode Selection No Hex Name Description Default Range F5 09 03A1 DO A3 Output Mode Selection Sets the output mode of signals from the DO A3 option 0 0 2 Refer to Table 11 51 for more information 0 Predefined Individual Outputs 1 Binary Output 2 Programmable F5 01 to F5 08 F6 F7 Communication Options F6 and F7 parameters are used to set the basic communication settings and m...

Page 840: ... F6 20 and F6 21 x x F6 22 x F6 23 to F6 26 x x F6 30 to F6 32 x F6 35 and F6 36 x F6 45 to F6 49 F6 50 to F6 71 F7 01 to F7 15 F7 16 F7 17 to F7 42 F7 60 to F7 79 x Table 11 54 Correspondence Between Communication Protocols and Parameters SI CB SI N3 SI W3 SI EM3 SI EP3 and SI EN3 Parameters DeviceNet SI N3 LonWorks SI W3 Modbus TCP IP SI EM3 PROFINET SI EP3 EtherNet IP SI EN3 F6 01 to F6 03 x x ...

Page 841: ...drive continues operation at the speed set in d1 04 Reference 4 Note Separately prepare safety protection equipment and systems for example fast stop switches 5 Alarm Ramp Stop The drive stops the motor during the deceleration time set in C1 02 Deceleration Time 1 After you remove the bUS alarm the motor will accelerate to the previous frequency reference F6 02 Comm External Fault EF0 Detect No He...

Page 842: ... 03A8 Multi Step Ref NetRef ComRef Sets the function that enables and disables the multi step speed reference when the freqency reference source is NetRef or ComRef communication option card or MEMOBUS Modbus communications 0 0 1 0 Disable Multi Step References When NetRef or ComRef are the frequency reference source the multi step speed reference 2 step speed to 16 step speed references and the J...

Page 843: ...cription Default Range F6 11 03B7 CC Link Communication Speed Sets the communication speed for CC Link communication Restart the drive after you change this setting 0 0 4 0 156 kbps 1 625 kbps 2 2 5 Mbps 3 5 Mbps 4 10 Mbps F6 14 BUS Error Auto Reset No Hex Name Description Default Range F6 14 03BB BUS Error Auto Reset Sets the automatic reset function for bUS Option Communication Errors 0 0 1 0 Di...

Page 844: ...e0 Master Drive 1 4 1F Default 2 2 5 ms 3 2 0 s minimum 4 3 Option PCB 3 Option PCB Drive1 Slave Drive 1 0 01 2 2 5 ms 3 0 9 s minimum 4 2 MEMOBUS Modbus Communica tions 5 2 MEMOBUS Modbus Communica tions 5 Drive2 Slave Drive 2 0 02 2 2 5 ms 3 0 9 s minimum 4 2 MEMOBUS Modbus Communica tions 5 2 MEMOBUS Modbus Communica tions 5 Drive3 Slave Drive 3 0 03 2 2 5 ms 3 0 9 s minimum 4 2 MEMOBUS Modbus ...

Page 845: ...top 1 Run bit 1 H5 12 0 REV Stop 0 Stop 1 Reverse run H5 12 1 FWD REV 0 Forward run 1 Reverse run bit 2 External Fault bit 3 Fault Reset bit 4 ComRef bit 5 ComCtrl bit 6 F Reserved 3 Frequency Reference Drive 1 15C7H The unit of measure changes when o1 03 changes 4 Run Command Drive 2 15C8H 5 Frequency Reference Drive 2 15C9H 6 Run Command Drive 3 15CAH 7 Frequency Reference Drive 3 15CBH 8 Run Co...

Page 846: ...has occurred from a slave 10 consecutive times bit 9 Receive broadcast command while drive is running 1 Drive operates in as specified by the broadcast message command bit A Communication error with master drive 1 The slave cannot communicate with the master because of a communication error bit B D Reserved bit E ComRef status bit F ComCtrl status 2 Output frequency or frequency reference Drive St...

Page 847: ...EFh Note The setting range changes if using MECHATROLINK II or MECHATROLINK III MECHATROLINK II SI T3 range 20 to 3F MECHATROLINK III SI ET3 range 03 to EF Be sure to set a node address that is different than all other node addresses Incorrect parameter settings will cause AEr Station Address Setting Error errors and the L ERR LED on the option will come on The drive detects AEr errors when the st...

Page 848: ... Name Description Default Range F6 25 03C9 MECHATROLINK Watchdog Error Sel Sets the method to stop the motor or let the motor continue operating when the drive detects an E5 MECHATROLINK Watchdog Timer Err 1 0 3 0 Ramp to Stop The drive ramps to stop in the set deceleration time Fault relay output terminal MA MC will activate and MB MC will deactivate 1 Coast to Stop The drive output shuts off and...

Page 849: ...d Mode setting makes the RAM enter command necessary or not necessary to write parameters over network communication When F6 32 0 1 or 2 the H5 11 setting does not have an effect The RAM enter command is always necessary to write parameters 0 PPO Type 1 Conventional 2 PPO bit0 This function operates when bit 0 and bit 4 in the register STW have values of 1 operate Refer to the PROFIBUS DP communic...

Page 850: ...No Hex Name Description Default Range F6 46 02FC BACnet Baud Rate Sets the BACnet communications speed 3 0 8 0 1200 bps 1 2400 bps 2 4800 bps 3 9600 bps 4 19 2 kbps 5 38 4 kbps 6 57 6 kbps 7 76 8 kbps 8 115 2 kbps F6 47 Rx to Tx Wait Time No Hex Name Description Default Range F6 47 02FD Rx to Tx Wait Time Sets the wait time for the drive to receive and send BACnet communication 5 ms 5 65 ms F6 48 ...

Page 851: ... kbps 1 250 kbps 2 500 kbps 3 Adjustable from Network The controller sets the communications speed 4 Detect Automatically The drive detects the network communication speed and automatically adjusts the communications speed F6 52 DeviceNet PCA Setting No Hex Name Description Default Range F6 52 03C3 DeviceNet PCA Setting Sets the format of data that the DeviceNet communication master sends to the d...

Page 852: ...on Default Range F6 56 03D7 DeviceNet Speed Scaling Sets the speed scale for DeviceNet communication 0 15 15 F6 57 DeviceNet Current Scaling No Hex Name Description Default Range F6 57 03D8 DeviceNet Current Scaling Sets the current scale of the DeviceNet communication master 0 15 15 F6 58 DeviceNet Torque Scaling No Hex Name Description Default Range F6 58 03D9 DeviceNet Torque Scaling Sets the t...

Page 853: ...ctions as a monitor only 0 0 63 F6 64 to F6 67 Dynamic Out Assembly 109 Param1 to 4 No Hex Name Description Default Range F6 64 to F6 67 03DF 03E2 Dynamic Out Assembly 109 Param 1 to 4 Sets Configurable Outputs 1 to 4 written to the MEMOBUS register 0000h 0000h FFFFh F6 68 to F6 71 Dynamic In Assembly 159 Param 1 to 4 No Hex Name Description Default Range F6 68 to F6 71 03E3 03E4 03C7 and 03C8 Dyn...

Page 854: ... Address for the device that is connecting to the network Restart the drive after you change this parameter 1 0 255 Note When F7 13 0 Address Mode at Startup Static Use parameters F7 01 to F7 04 IPAddress 4 to set the IP Address Be sure to set a different IP address for each drive on the network Also set parameters F7 01 to F7 12 F7 04 IP Address 4 No Hex Name Description Default Range F7 04 03E8 ...

Page 855: ...Description Default Range F7 09 03ED Gateway Address 1 Sets the first octet of the gateway address of the connected network 192 0 255 Note Set this parameter when F7 13 0 Address Mode at Startup Static F7 10 Gateway Address 2 No Hex Name Description Default Range F7 10 03EE Gateway Address 2 Sets the second octet of the gateway address of the connected network 168 0 255 Note Set this parameter whe...

Page 856: ...or each drive on the network F7 14 Duplex Mode Selection No Hex Name Description Default Range F7 14 03F2 Duplex Mode Selection Sets the duplex mode setting method 1 0 8 0 Half Half 1 Auto Auto 2 Full Full 3 Half Auto Port 1 is set to Half and port 2 is set to Auto 4 Half Full Port 1 is set to Half and port 2 is set to Full 5 Auto Half Port 1 is set to Auto and port 2 is set to Half 6 Auto Full Po...

Page 857: ...7 EtherNet IP Torque Scale Factor Sets the scaling factor for the torque monitor in the EtherNet IP Class ID 2AH Object 0 15 15 F7 20 EtherNet IP Power Scaling Factor No Hex Name Description Default Range F7 20 03F8 EtherNet IP Power Scaling Factor Sets the scaling factor for the power monitor in the EtherNet IP Class ID 2AH Object 0 15 15 F7 21 EtherNet IP Voltage Scale Factor No Hex Name Descrip...

Page 858: ... No Hex Name Description Default Range F7 60 0780 PZD1 Write Control Word Sets the MEMOBUS Modbus address for PZD1 PPO output PZD1 PPO output functions as the STW when F7 60 0 1 or 2 0 F7 61 PZD2 Write Frequency Reference No Hex Name Description Default Range F7 61 0781 PZD2 Write Frequency Reference Sets the MEMOBUS Modbus address for PZD2 PPO output PZD2 PPO output functions as the HSW when F7 6...

Page 859: ...ill disable the PZD8 PPO output write operation to the MEMOBUS Modbus register 0 F7 68 PZD9 Write No Hex Name Description Default Range F7 68 0788 PZD9 Write Sets the MEMOBUS Modbus address for PZD9 PPO output A value of 0 1 or 2 will disable the PZD9 PPO output write operation to the MEMOBUS Modbus register 0 F7 69 PZD10 Write No Hex Name Description Default Range F7 69 0789 PZD10 Write Sets the ...

Page 860: ... operation from the MEMOBUS Modbus register 0 F7 75 PZD6 Read No Hex Name Description Default Range F7 75 078F PZD6 Read Sets the MEMOBUS Modbus address for PZD6 PPO Read A value of 0 will disable the PZD6 PPO input load operation from the MEMOBUS Modbus register 0 F7 76 PZD7 Read No Hex Name Description Default Range F7 76 0790 PZD7 Read Sets the MEMOBUS Modbus address for PZD7 PPO Read A value o...

Page 861: ...d A value of 0 will disable the PZD9 PPO input load operation from the MEMOBUS Modbus register 0 F7 79 PZD10 Read No Hex Name Description Default Range F7 79 0793 PZD10 Read Sets the MEMOBUS Modbus address for PZD10 PPO Read A value of 0 will disable the PZD10 PPO input load operation from the MEMOBUS Modbus register 0 V f CL V f OLV CLV AOLV OLV PM OLV PM AOLV PM CLV PM EZOLV V f CL V f OLV CLV A...

Page 862: ...0 Initialize Parameters 3 Wire Initialization Refer to Table 11 59 the and use H1 xx MFDI Function Select to set the function Table 11 59 MFDI Setting Values Setting Function 0 1 3 Wire Sequence 1 LOCAL REMOTE Selection 2 External Reference 1 2 Selection 3 Multi Step Speed Reference 1 4 Multi Step Speed Reference 2 5 Multi Step Speed Reference 3 6 Jog Reference Selection 7 Accel Decel Time Selecti...

Page 863: ...ts 01 to 9F for the xx in 1xx 1 Inverse input is not available H1 01 Terminal S1 Function Selection No Hex Name Description Default Range H1 01 0438 Terminal S1 Function Selection Sets the function for MFDI terminal S1 40 1 19F Note The default setting is F when the drive is initialized for 3 Wire Initialization A1 03 3330 H1 02 Terminal S2 Function Selection No Hex Name Description Default Range ...

Page 864: ...rminal S8 Function Selection Sets the function for MFDI terminal S8 8 0 19F H1 21 Terminal S1 Function Select 2 No Hex Name Description Default Range H1 21 0B70 Terminal S1 Function Select 2 Sets the second function for MFDI terminal S1 F 1 19F When MFDI terminal S1 activates it will operate the function set to H1 01 Terminal S1 Function Selection and the function set to H1 21 at the same time Whe...

Page 865: ...ction set to H1 25 at the same time When the setting value is F the function is disabled H1 26 Terminal S6 Function Select 2 No Hex Name Description Default Range H1 26 0B75 Terminal S6 Function Select 2 Sets the second function for MFDI terminal S6 F 1 19F When MFDI terminal S6 activates it will operate the function set to H1 06 Terminal S6 Function Selection and the function set to H1 26 at the ...

Page 866: ... 1 19F H1 42 Mbus Reg 15C0h bit2 Input Func No Hex Name Description Default Range H1 42 0B56 Mbus Reg 15C0h bit2 Input Func Sets the MFDI function for bit 2 of MEMOBUS Modbus register 15C0 Hex F 1 19F Multi Function Digital Input Setting Values Selects a function set with H1 01 to H1 08 0 3 Wire Sequence Setting Function Description 0 3 Wire Sequence Sets the direction of motor rotation for 3 wire...

Page 867: ...imum The default setting for b1 17 Run Command at Power Up is 0 Disregard Existing RUN Command If you enable the Run command when the drive is energized the protective function will activate and the will flash quickly If Run is permitted in the application set b1 17 1 Accept Existing RUN Command 1 LOCAL REMOTE Selection Setting Function Description 1 LOCAL REMOTE Selection Sets drive control for t...

Page 868: ... 3 Setting Function Description 5 Multi Step Speed Reference 3 Uses speed references d1 01 to d1 08 Multi Step Speed Reference to set a multi step speed reference Note Refer to Setting Procedures for Multi step Speed Operation in d Reference Settings for more information 6 Jog Reference Selection Setting Function Description 6 Jog Reference Selection Sets the drive to use the JOG Frequency Referen...

Page 869: ...ist applications make sure that you close the holding brake when you input the Baseblock command and the drive shuts off its output Failure to do obey can cause death or serious injury if the load moves or falls when motor suddenly coasts after you input the Baseblock command A Accel Decel Ramp Hold Setting Function Description A Accel Decel Ramp Hold Momentarily pauses motor acceleration and dece...

Page 870: ...nication option or MEMOBUS Modbus communications This input signal does not have an effect on drive operation 10 Up Command Setting Function Description 10 Up Command Sets the command to use a button to increase the drive frequency reference You must also set Setting 11 Down Command ON Raises the frequency reference OFF Holds the current frequency reference Note If you only set the Up command or o...

Page 871: ... the Up Down Commands Set the upper limit value of the frequency reference to d2 01 Frequency Reference Upper Limit Use an analog input or d2 02 Frequency Reference Lower Limit to set the lower limit value of the frequency reference The configurable values change when the setting for d4 10 Up Down Freq Lower Limit Select changes When you input a Run command these are the lower limits of the freque...

Page 872: ...1 xx 2 to switch to parameter b1 15 Frequency Reference Selection 2 the Up Down command will not function When you input the Up command the frequency reference will increase When you input the Down command the frequency reference will decrease The Up and Down commands have priority over all other frequency references When you enable the Up Down command the drive will ignore these frequency referen...

Page 873: ...set command when the Run command is active Remove the Run command before trying to reset a fault 15 Fast Stop N O Setting Function Description 15 Fast Stop N O Sets the command to ramp to stop in the deceleration time set in C1 09 Fast Stop Time when the input terminal is ON while the drive is operating If you cancel the fast stop input the drive will not restart the motor until you meet these con...

Page 874: ...ection Select to motor 1 and motor 2 You cannot switch between motors 1 and 2 during run If you try to switch motors when they are running it will cause a rUn error After you switch between encoder motors you must wait 500 ms minimum to input a Run command You must wait 200 ms minimum for other control methods 17 Fast Stop N C Setting Function Description 17 Fast Stop N C Sets the command to ramp ...

Page 875: ...Description 1B Programming Lockout Sets the command to prevent parameter changes when the terminal is OFF You can continue to view parameter setting values when the terminal is OFF Parameters Cannot be Edited ON Program Lockout OFF Parameter Write Prohibit 1E Reference Sample Hold Setting Function Description 1E Reference Sample Hold Sets the command to sample the frequency reference at terminals ...

Page 876: ...x External Fault Terminal Sx where x is the number of the terminal terminal Sx to which the external fault signal is assigned For example when an external fault signal is input to terminal S3 the keypad will show EF3 Use these conditions to select the value to set in H1 xx Signal input method from peripheral devices External fault detection method Motor stopping method operation after external fau...

Page 877: ...he input terminal PID control restarts the integral Note Refer to PID control block diagram for more information 32 Multi Step Speed Reference 4 Setting Function Description 32 Multi Step Speed Reference 4 Sets the command to switch d1 09 to d1 16 Reference 9 to 16 with multi step speed references 1 2 and 3 Note Refer to Setting procedure for the multi step speed operation for more information 34 ...

Page 878: ...the Reverse Run command terminal will cause alarm EF FWD REV Run Command Input Error and the motor will ramp to stop Initialize the drive with a 2 wire sequence to set the Forward Run command to terminal S1 This function will not operate at the same time as H1 xx 42 43 Run Command FWD REV Command 2 Wire Seq 2 Figure 11 86 2 Wire Sequence Wiring Example 41 Reverse RUN 2 Wire Setting Function Descri...

Page 879: ...the frequency reference when the terminal activates Note Refer to d7 Offset Frequency for more information 45 Add Offset Frequency 2 d7 02 Setting Function Description 45 Add Offset Frequency 2 d7 02 Sets the function to add the offset frequency set in d7 02 Offset Frequency 2 to the frequency reference when the terminal activates Note Refer to d7 Offset Frequency for more information 46 Add Offse...

Page 880: ...i Function Input Setting Err when H1 xx 61 and 62 are set at the same time Refer to b3 Speed Search for more information 62 Speed Search from Fref Setting Function Description 62 Speed Search from Fref Sets the function to start speed search using an external reference although b3 01 0 Speed Search Selection at Start Disabled When the terminal is turned ON for b3 24 2 Speed Search Method Selection...

Page 881: ...elf test RS 485 serial communications operation The Self Diagnostics function connects the transmission terminal of the control terminal block to the reception terminal The function transmits the data that the drive sent to make sure that the drive can communicate correctly Note Refer to MEMOBUS Modbus communications Self Diagnostics for the self diagnostics procedure 68 High Slip Braking HSB Acti...

Page 882: ...ion will hold a stopped motor if an external force is applied or an analog reference is offset Note Refer to b9 Zero Servo for more information When you use the Zero Servo function keep the Run command ON Zero servo stops the motor and if you turn OFF the Run command it will not have power 75 Up 2 Command Setting Function Description 75 Up 2 Command Sets the function to increase the frequency refe...

Page 883: ...e to the value set in d4 03 When the Down 2 Command is active the drive decelerates the motor to Freq Reference d4 03 the bias value will decrease to the value set in d4 03 When the Up 2 Command and Down 2 Command are not active and when the Up 2 Command and Down 2 Command are active the drive holds the output frequency holds the bias value When the frequency changes it will reset the bias For all...

Page 884: ...ion Description 76 Down 2 Command Sets the function to increase the frequency reference bias value to accelerate the motor when the terminal is activated Set this function and H1 xx 75 Up 2 Command together When you activate the terminal set for Up2 Command the bias will increase When you activate the terminal set for Down 2 Command the bias will decrease When you activate or deactivate the two co...

Page 885: ...03 Multi Function Input Setting Err Refer to KEB Ride Thru function for more information 7C Short Circuit Braking N O Setting Function Description 7C Short Circuit Braking N O Sets operation of Short Circuit Braking N O If a three phase PM motor short circuits the drive will generate braking torque in the spinning motor This will stop motor rotation and also prevent external forces from spinning t...

Page 886: ... to 97 for inverse output 9F DWEZ Disable Setting Function Description 9F DWEZ Disable Sets operation of the DriveWorksEZ program saved in the drive Note Set A1 07 2 DriveWorksEZ Function Selection Digital input to use this function ON Disabled OFF Enabled 101 to 19F Inverse Input of 1 to 9F Setting Value Function Description 101 to 19F Inverse Input of 1 to 9F Sets the function of the selected MF...

Page 887: ...otor 2 Selected 1D During Regeneration 1E Executing Auto Restart 1F Motor Overload Alarm oL1 20 Drive Overheat Pre Alarm oH 21 Safe Torque OFF Setting Value Function 22 Mechanical Weakening Detection 2F Maintenance Notification 30 During Torque Limit 31 During Speed Limit 32 In Speed Limit During Trq Ctrl 33 Zero Servo Complete 37 During Frequency Output 38 Drive Enabled 39 Watt Hour Pulse Output ...

Page 888: ...values When you do not set functions to H2 40 to H2 42 set them to F Output of Logical Operation Results of MFDO This enables the logical operation results of two MFDOs to be output to one MFDO terminal Use H2 60 H2 63 and H2 66 Term M1 M2 Secondary Function to Term M5 M6 Secondary Function to set the function of the output signal for which logical operations are performed Use H2 61 H2 64 H2 67 Te...

Page 889: ...nal in through mode H2 03 Term M5 M6 Function Selection No Hex Name Description Default Range H2 03 040D Term M5 M6 Function Selection Sets the function for MFDO terminal M5 M6 2 0 1A7 Note Set this parameter to F when not using the terminal or to use the terminal in through mode H2 06 Watt Hour Output Unit Selection No Hex Name Description Default Range H2 06 0437 Watt Hour Output Unit Selection ...

Page 890: ...the MFDO terminal 0001 0001 1FFF Sets H2 09 with the address of the register that is output to Modbus Reg 2 Status Satisfied H2 01 to H2 03 63 and uses the bit in H2 10 Modbus Register 2 Bit Select H2 10 Modbus Register 2 Bit Select No Hex Name Description Default Range H2 10 0B3D Modbus Register 2 Bit Select Sets the bit of the MEMOBUS Modbus register output to the MFDO terminal 0000 0000 FFFF Se...

Page 891: ...e H2 23 1543 Comparator 1 Hysteresis Sets the hysteresis level for comparator 1 when the full scale analog output for the monitor selected in H2 20 Comparator 1 Monitor Selection is the 100 value 0 0 0 0 10 0 Note Refer to H2 xx 66 and 67 MFDO Function Select Comparator1 and Comparator2 for more information about the comparator function H2 24 Comparator 1 On Delay Time No Hex Name Description Defa...

Page 892: ...ption Default Range H2 28 1548 Comparator 2 Upper Limit Sets the upper limit detection level for comparator 1 when the full scale analog output for the monitor selected in H2 26 Comparator 2 Monitor Selection is the 100 value 0 0 0 0 300 0 Note Refer to H2 xx 66 and 67 MFDO Function Select Comparator1 and Comparator2 for more information about the comparator function H2 29 Comparator 2 Hysteresis ...

Page 893: ...utput shuts off and the motor coasts to stop Fault relay output terminal MA MC activates and terminal MB MC deactivates 2 Fast Stop Use C1 09 The drive stops the motor in the deceleration time set in C1 09 Fast Stop Time Fault relay output terminal MA MC activates and terminal MB MC deactivates 3 Alarm Only The keypad shows CP1 and the drive continues operation at the current frequency reference N...

Page 894: ...tion is disabled the drive will trigger a digital output H2 37 Comparator 2 Ineffective Time No Hex Name Description Default Range H2 37 159F Comparator 2 Ineffective Time Sets the length of time that CP2 Comparator2 Limit Fault is disabled 0 0 s 0 0 10 0 s Note After you enter a Run command and wait for the time set in this parameter the drive will monitor operation and make sure that it is in th...

Page 895: ... M4 Secondary Function No Hex Name Description Default Range H2 63 1B49 Expert Term M3 M4 Secondary Function Selects the second function for terminal M3 M4 The logical calculation results of the terminals assigned to functions by H2 02 Term M3 M4 Function Selection is output F 0 A7 H2 64 Terminal M3 M4 Logical Operation No Hex Name Description Default Range H2 64 1B4A Expert Terminal M3 M4 Logical...

Page 896: ... M6 Delay Time No Hex Name Description Default Range H2 68 1B4E Expert Terminal M5 M6 Delay Time Sets the minimum on time used to output the logical calculation results from terminal M5 M6 0 1 s 0 0 25 0 s MFDO Setting Value Selects the function configured to MFDO 0 During Run Setting Function Description 0 During Run The terminal activates when the Run command is input and when the drive is makin...

Page 897: ...eed Agree 1 Setting Function Description 2 Speed Agree 1 The terminal turns on when the output frequency is in the range of the frequency reference L4 02 Speed Agree Detection Width Note The motor rotation direction does not have an effect on the detection function CLV control uses motor speed as the reference Figure 11 93 Speed Agree 1 Time Chart ON The output frequency is in the range of frequen...

Page 898: ...Level L4 02 Speed Agree Detection Width After the terminal deactivates the terminal stays off until the output frequency is at the level set with L4 01 Note The motor rotation direction does not have an effect on the detection function The drive uses the L4 01 value as the forward reverse detection level CLV control uses motor speed as the reference ON The output frequency is less than the value o...

Page 899: ...problem with the control power supply When there is a parameter configuration error and the drive cannot operate although there is a Run command When you enter a Run command and it immediately triggers an overvoltage or undervoltage fault When the drive is in Programming Mode and will not accept a Run command 7 DC Bus Undervoltage Setting Function Description 7 DC Bus Undervoltage The terminal act...

Page 900: ...orque Detection for more information C Frequency Reference Loss Setting Function Description C Frequency Reference Loss The terminal activates when the drive detects a loss of frequency reference Note Refer to L4 05 Fref Loss Detection Selection for more information D Braking Resistor Fault Setting Function Description D Braking Resistor Fault The terminal activates when the mounting type braking ...

Page 901: ...erse detection level CLVand CLV PM control use motor speed as the reference ON The output frequency is in the range of frequency reference L4 04 OFF The output frequency is not in the range of frequency reference L4 04 Figure 11 97 Speed Agree 2 Time Chart 14 User Set Speed Agree 2 Setting Function Description 14 User Set Speed Agree 2 The terminal activates when the output frequency is in the ran...

Page 902: ... L4 04 Figure 11 99 Example of Frequency Detection 3 value of L4 03 Is Positive Note Figure 11 99 shows the result of the configuration when L4 07 1 Speed Agree Detection Selection Detection Always Enabled The default setting of L4 07 is 0 No Detection during Baseblock When the speed agreement detection selection is No Detection during Baseblock the terminal is deactivated when the drive output st...

Page 903: ...Use the L6 Torque Detection parameters to set torque detection ON The output current torque is more than the torque value set with L6 05 Torque Detection Level 2 or the level is less than the torque value set with L6 05 for longer than the time set with L6 06 Torque Detection Time 2 Note When L6 04 5 the drive will detect when the output current torque is less than the detection level of L6 05 for...

Page 904: ...OFF Motor 1 Selection 1D During Regeneration Setting Function Description 1D During Regeneration The terminal activates on when the motor is regenerating ON Motor is regenerating OFF Motor is operating or stopped 1E Executing Auto Restart Setting Function Description 1E Executing Auto Restart The terminal activates when the Auto Restart function is trying to restart after a fault The terminal deac...

Page 905: ... Monitor ON Safety stop state Terminals H1 HC and H2 HC are OFF or released safety stop state OFF Safety circuit fault or RUN READY Terminal H1 HC or terminal H2 HC is OFF or released safety circuit fault or the two terminals are ON or have short circuited RUN READY 22 Mechanical Weakening Detection Setting Function Description 22 Mechanical Weakening Detection The terminal activates when the driv...

Page 906: ...he forward direction or the reverse direction after enabling torque control and the externally input torque reference is disproportionate to the load The output terminal activates when this speed is not higher than a constant speed and the motor speed is at the speed limit This does not include operation when the drive is stopped Note Refer to d5 03 Speed Limit Selection for more information 33 Ze...

Page 907: ...rce is an external source set with b1 01 Frequency Reference Selection 1 b1 15 Frequency Reference Selection 2 b1 02 Run Command Selection 1 or b1 16 Run Command Selection 2 3D During Speed Search Setting Function Description 3D During Speed Search The terminal activates when the drive is doing speed search Note Refer to b3 Speed Search for more information 3E PID Feedback Low Setting Function Des...

Page 908: ...larm Reduction Limit Setting Function Description 4D oH Pre Alarm Reduction Limit The terminal activates when L8 03 4 Overheat Pre Alarm Selection Operate at Reduced Speed L8 19 and oH Heatsink Overheat does not clear after the drive decreases the frequency for 10 cycles Note Refer to L8 03 Overheat Pre Alarm Selection for more information 4E Braking Transistor Fault rr Setting Function Descriptio...

Page 909: ... for the MEMOBUS register address set with H2 09 Modbus Register 2 Address Select activates 65 Standby Output Setting Function Description 65 Standby Output The terminal deactivates after the drive stops operating and after the time set with b8 51 Standby Mode Wait Time ON The Run command turns on and the magnetic contactor on the input side turns on OFF The Run command turns off and the drive sto...

Page 910: ...H2 30 Comparator 2 On Delay Time B H2 31 Comparator 2 Off Delay Time Figure 11 104 Comparator 2 Output Time Chart Note The drive compares the monitors set with H2 26 as absolute values 69 External Power 24V Supply Setting Function Description 69 External Power 24V Supply The terminal activates when there is an external 24V power supply between terminals PS AC ON An external 24V power supply suppli...

Page 911: ...ers select the functions set to these analog input terminals and adjust signal levels Table 11 68 shows the functions that you can set to analog input terminals Use H3 02 H3 06 and H3 10 MFAI Function Select to set functions Table 11 68 MFAI Setting Values Setting Function 0 Frequency Reference 1 Frequency Gain 2 Auxiliary Frequency Reference 1 3 Auxiliary Frequency Reference 2 4 Output Voltage Bi...

Page 912: ...ncy reference will be 0 to 100 When H3 01 1 10 to 10V Bipolar Reference it enables signals of positive and negative polarities When you input a 0 V to 2 V signal and the motor rotates in reverse Figure 11 106 Frequency Reference When Negative Number Bias Is Configured MEMOBUS Modbus Multi Function AI1 to 3 Function Selection Let the MFAI function be assigned to MEMOBUS Modbus register 15C1 to 15C3...

Page 913: ...ignals When the drive uses this setting as the frequency reference a Forward Run command will run the motor in reverse and a Reverse Run command will run the motor forward The gain and bias settings will cause the signal to be a negative number 2 4 to 20 mA The current signal is 4 mA to 20 mA The minimum input level limit is 0 The drive will read a negative input signal caused by gain and bias set...

Page 914: ...Bipolar Reference The voltage signal is 10 Vdc to 10 Vdc This setting enables positive and negative polarity signals When the drive uses this setting as the frequency reference a Forward Run command will run the motor in reverse and a Reverse Run command will run the motor forward The gain and bias settings will cause the signal to be a negative number 2 4 to 20 mA The current signal is 4 mA to 20...

Page 915: ...gnal is 0 Vdc to 10 Vdc The minimum input level is limited to 0 so that a negative input signal due to gain and bias settings will be read as 0 1 10 to 10V Bipolar Reference The voltage signal is 10 Vdc to 10 Vdc Signals of both positive and negative polarities are enabled When this setting is used as the frequency reference the motor runs reverse when the Forward run command is input or runs forw...

Page 916: ...y a primary delay filter to the MFAI terminal 0 03 s 0 00 2 00 s Apply the primary delay filter to the analog input to enable an analog input signal without the use of high frequency noise components An analog input filter prevents irregular drive control Drive operation becomes more stable as the programmed time becomes longer but it also becomes less responsive to quickly changing analog signals...

Page 917: ...o change this setting 0 500 500 Adds the offset value for the analog input value For voltage input this parameter will set the offset when a signal of 0 V is input For current input this parameter will set the offset when a signal of 4 mA H3 05 2 or 0 mA H3 05 3 is input H3 40 Mbus Reg 15C1h Input Function No Hex Name Description Default Range H3 40 0B5C Mbus Reg 15C1h Input Function Sets the MEMO...

Page 918: ... Gain Setting Function Description 1 Frequency Gain The drive multiplies the analog frequency reference with the input value from the MFAI set with this function Example A 50 frequency gain is input to terminal A2 A frequency reference of 80 is input from terminal A1 The frequency gain is set to terminal 2 The calculated frequency reference is 40 of the maximum output frequency 2 Auxiliary Frequen...

Page 919: ...tage Bias through Analog Input 5 Accel Decel Time Gain Setting Function Description 5 Accel Decel Time Gain Enters a signal to adjust the gain used for C1 01 to C1 08 Accel Decel Time 1 through 4 if the full scale analog signal 10 Vor 20 mA is 100 When you enable C1 01 Acceleration Time 1 the acceleration time is Acceleration Time 1 C1 01 setting acceleration and deceleration time gain 100 Figure ...

Page 920: ...n level during run is the lower value between The analog input value for the MFAI terminal or The value of L3 06 Stall Prevent Level during Run Figure 11 111 Stall Prevention Level during Run through Analog Input 9 Output Frequency Lower Limit Setting Function Description 9 Output Frequency Lower Limit Enters a signal to adjust the output frequency lower limit level if E1 04 Maximum Output Frequen...

Page 921: ...s set L1 05 F Not Used Setting Function Description F Not Used Value for terminals that are not being used or terminals being used in through mode When you set a terminal that is not in use to F you can use the signal input to the terminal as PLC analog signal input through MEMOBUS Modbus communications or the communication option This input signal does not have an effect on drive operation This f...

Page 922: ...drives in applications where the vertical axis can fall make sure that you know these items Correctly configure drives and motors Correctly set parameters You can change parameter values after you do Auto Tuning Use a system that will not let the vertical axis fall if the drive fails Figure 11 113 shows the relation between torque limits from parameters and torque limits from analog input Figure 1...

Page 923: ...ue signals to calculate the PID input 1F Not Used Setting Function Description 1F Not Used Value for terminals that are not being used or terminals being used in through mode When you set a terminal that you do not use to 1F you can use the signal that is input to that terminal as the PLC analog signal input from MEMOBUS Modbus communications or the communication option This input signal does not ...

Page 924: ...rminal FM Analog Output Bias 999 9 999 9 0 0 H4 05 Terminal AM Analog Output Gain 999 9 999 9 50 0 H4 06 Terminal AM Analog Output Bias 999 9 999 9 0 0 H4 07 Terminal FM Signal Level Select 0 0 10 VDC 1 10 10 VDC 2 4 20 mA 0 H4 08 Terminal AM Signal Level Select 0 0 10 VDC 1 10 10 VDC 2 4 20 mA 0 Figure 11 114 shows the gain and bias Figure 11 114 Analog Output Gain Bias Configuration Example 1 Fo...

Page 925: ...le set H4 01 to 102 to monitor U1 02 Output Frequency Note The configurable monitor changes when the control method changes To use in through mode set this parameter to 000 or 031 You can set the terminal FM output level from the PLC through MEMOBUS Modbus communications or the communication option H4 02 Terminal FM Analog Output Gain No Hex Name Description Default Range H4 02 041E RUN Terminal F...

Page 926: ...t H4 05 50 0 H4 06 0 0 Terminal AM Analog Output Bias 0 0 H4 08 0 0 to 10 V H4 06 Terminal AM Analog Output Bias No Hex Name Description Default Range H4 06 0422 RUN Terminal AM Analog Output Bias Sets the bias of the monitor signal that is sent from MFAO terminal AM 0 0 999 9 999 9 The analog signal output from the AM terminal is a maximum of 10 V or 20 mA Select the signal level with H4 08 Termi...

Page 927: ...odbus protocol over the RS 485 port terminals D and D in the drive to use serial communication with programmable controllers PLC H5 01 Drive Node Address No Hex Name Description Default Range H5 01 0425 Drive Node Address Sets the communication slave address for drives 1FH 0 FFH Note Restart the drive after changing the parameter setting Setting 0 will not let the drive respond to MEMOBUS Modbus c...

Page 928: ...motor Fault relay output terminal MA MC will activate and MB MC will deactivate 3 Alarm Only CE is shown on the keypad and operation continues The output terminal set for Alarm H2 01 to H2 03 10 activates H5 05 Comm Fault Detection Selection No Hex Name Description Default Range H5 05 0429 Comm Fault Detection Selection Sets the function that detects CE Modbus Communication Error issues during MEM...

Page 929: ... changes then input the Enter command 1 ENTER Command Not Required It is not necessary to input the Enter command to change parameters H5 12 Run Command Method Selection No Hex Name Description Default Range H5 12 043D Run Command Method Selection Sets the input method for the Run command when b1 02 2 Run Command Selection 1 Memobus Modbus Communications or b1 16 2 Run Command Selection 2 Memobus ...

Page 930: ...ication Parameters Reload Sets the function to immediately enable updated MEMOBUS Modbus communications parameters 0 0 1 0 Reload at Next Power Cycle 1 Reload Now Note The setting value automatically returns to H5 20 0 after you enable MEMOBUS Modbus communications parameter changes The setting values of these parameters are enabled H5 01 Drive Node Address H5 02 Communication Speed Selection H5 0...

Page 931: ...minal MP as the monitor value Sinking mode and sourcing mode are supported Figure 11 117 Pulse Train Input Block Diagram H6 01 Terminal RP Pulse Train Function No Hex Name Description Default Range H6 01 042C Terminal RP Pulse Train Function Sets the function for pulse train input terminal RP 0 0 3 0 Frequency Reference When b1 01 Frequency Reference Selection 1 or b1 15 Frequency Reference Select...

Page 932: ...put signal frequency at the time when the frequency reference is 100 Make sure that H6 04 Terminal RP Function Bias 0 and H6 03 Terminal RP Function Gain 100 5 Select the detection method for the direction of motor rotation When you use an MFDI set H1 xx 7E 6 Set C5 parameters related to ASR gain and integral time to adjust responsiveness Note Set A1 02 0 and H6 01 3 to show C5 parameters You cann...

Page 933: ...put terminal MP Sets the x xx part of the Ux xx monitor 102 000 031 101 102 105 116 501 502 801 809 821 825 831 839 851 855 Note To use in through mode or when terminal MP is not used set this parameter to 000 or 031 When you use the pulse train monitor make sure that you connect peripheral devices as specified by these load conditions Incorrect connections can make the characteristics not suffici...

Page 934: ...coder Open Circuit Detect Time to the minimum frequency H6 09 Voltage Phase Sync MP Selection No Hex Name Description Default Range H6 09 156E Voltage Phase Sync MP Selection Set whether to output the pulse synchronized with drive output voltage phase from the pulse train monitor output terminal MP This parameter is only enabled when H6 06 102 Terminal MP Monitor Selection Output Frequency and H6 ...

Page 935: ... H7 00 Virtual MFIO selection No Hex Name Description Default Range H7 00 116F Expert Virtual MFIO selection Sets the function to enable and disable the virtual I O function Set this parameter to 1 to operate the virtual I O function 0 0 1 0 Disabled 1 Enabled H7 01 Virtual Multi Function Input 1 No Hex Name Description Default Range H7 01 1185 Expert Virtual Multi Function Input 1 Sets the functi...

Page 936: ...Sets the function for virtual digital output 2 F 0 1A7 H7 13 Virtual Output 2 Delay Time No Hex Name Description Default Range H7 13 11A7 Expert Virtual Output 2 Delay Time Sets the minimum ON time for virtual digital output 2 0 1 s 0 0 25 0 s H7 14 Virtual Multi Function Output 3 No Hex Name Description Default Range H7 14 11A8 Expert Virtual Multi Function Output 3 Sets the function for virtual ...

Page 937: ...e Description Default Range H7 32 1179 RUN Expert Virtual Analog Input Bias Sets the virtual analog input bias 0 0 999 9 999 9 H7 40 Virtual Analog Out Signal Select No Hex Name Description Default Range H7 40 1163 Virtual Analog Out Signal Select Sets the signal level of the virtual analog output 0 0 2 0 0 to 100 Absolute Value 1 100 to 100 2 0 to 100 Lower Limit at 0 H7 41 Virtual Analog Output ...

Page 938: ...Technical Manual H7 42 Virtual Analog Output FilterTime No Hex Name Description Default Range H7 42 1165 Virtual Analog Output FilterTime Sets the time constant for a primary filter of the virtual analog output 0 00 s 0 00 2 00 s V f CL V f OLV CLV AOLV OLV PM OLV PM AOLV PM CLV PM EZOLV ...

Page 939: ...overheat The PTC thermistors must have the characteristics in motor 1 phase as shown in Figure 11 123 Figure 11 123 PTC Thermistor Temperature and Resistance When the PTC input signal input to the drive is more than the overload alarm level the drive detects oH3 Motor Overheat PTC Input and flashes it on the keypad The drive continues the operation set in L1 03 Motor Thermistor oH Alarm Select The...

Page 940: ...tor changes when the speed control range of the motor changes Use an electronic thermal protector that aligns with the permitted load characteristics of the motor to select motor protection The electronic thermal protector of the drive uses these items to calculate motor overload tolerance and supply overload protection for the motor Output current Output frequency Motor thermal characteristics Ti...

Page 941: ... tolerance characteristics of the motor change the trigger point for the electronic thermal protector This provides motor overload protection from low speed to high speed across the full speed range Load Tolerance Cooling Capability Overload Characteristics at 100 motor load This motor is designed to operate with commercial line power Operate at a 60 Hz base frequency to maximize the motor cooling...

Page 942: ... load This motor is designed to withstand increased temperatures during continuous operation at rated speed and rated torque If the motor operates continuously at lower speed than rated rotation speed at more than 100 torque the drive will detect oL1 The drive triggers a fault relay output and the motor coasts to stop 5 PM Constant Torque Use this setting with a PM motor for constant torque that h...

Page 943: ... continuously for 1 minute after continuous operation at 100 load hot start the default setting triggers the electronic thermal protector Figure 11 126 shows an example of the electronic thermal protector operation time Motor overload protection operates in the range between a cold start and a hot start This example shows a general purpose motor operating at the base frequency with L1 02 set to 1 ...

Page 944: ...MA MC turns ON and MB MC turns OFF 2 Fast Stop Use C1 09 The drive stops the motor in the deceleration time set in C1 09 Fast Stop Time Fault relay output terminal MA MC turns ON and MB MC turns OFF L1 05 Motor Thermistor Filter Time No Hex Name Description Default Range L1 05 0484 Motor Thermistor Filter Time Sets the primary delay time constant for the PTC input signal entered to the drive This ...

Page 945: ...e drive operation during momentary power loss and the KEB Ride Thru function method of operation KEB Ride Thru Function KEB is an acronym for Kinetic Energy Backup If the drive detects a power loss or momentary power loss it will quickly decelerate the motor The drive uses regenerative energy from the motor to keep the main circuit operating When you return power during motor deceleration the driv...

Page 946: ...stant speed ratio between drives Use the dynamic braking option with System KEB Ride Thru 1 3 System KEB Ride Thru 2 The drive uses the KEB deceleration time set in L2 06 to decelerate and it also monitors the DC bus voltage If the voltage level increases the drive momentarily holds the frequency to prevent an ov before it continues to decelerate If you cannot use the dynamic braking option use Sy...

Page 947: ...us Undervoltage and the drive turns off its output Figure 11 128 Cancel the KEB Operation after the Momentary Power Loss Ride Thru Time Is Expired without KEB Ride Thru 1 When L2 07 0 00 Kinetic Energy Backup Accel Time 0 00 s the drive accelerates again as specified by the applicable Acceleration Time C1 01 C1 03 C1 05 C1 07 and usual operation continues Use the Momentary Power Loss Ride Thru Tim...

Page 948: ... deceleration When the DC bus voltage is more than the level set in L2 11 usual operation continues The drive accelerates the motor to the frequency reference value before the power loss and usual operation continues Figure 11 130 Cancel KEB Operation without Using the KEB Ride Thru if Restoration of Power Occurs while the Control Power Power Supply to the Control Board is Maintained 1 When settin...

Page 949: ... when L2 01 5 Kinetic Energy Backup DecelStop The drive starts deceleration through KEB operation The drive will continue to decelerate until the motor comes to the minimum output frequency or a complete stop If you return power during deceleration the drive continues to decelerate If you do not input the Run command the motor cannot restart KEB Operation Wiring Example Figure 11 132 shows an exam...

Page 950: ...nimum KEB Time With KEB Ride Thru There is Uv1 because you set a digital input for KEB Ride Thru and the device that controls the input operated too slowly after power loss Without KEB Ride Thru If the DC bus voltage overshoots immediately after KEB Ride Thru starts increase L2 10 to longer than the overshoot x x x x L2 11 KEB DC Bus Voltage Setpoint Single Drive KEB Ride Thru 2 Set to approximate...

Page 951: ...rive will do Speed Search and try to continue operation This will not trigger Uv1 This function lets the power loss be longer than when L2 01 1 3 Kinetic Energy Backup L2 02 If power does not return in the time set in L2 02 the drive will detect Uv1 When the drive detects momentary power loss the drive will use regenerative energy from the motor through KEB operation to decelerate When you return ...

Page 952: ... the motor will coast to stop Note The length of time that the drive can recover after a power loss changes when drive capacity changes The upper limit of the possible momentary power loss Ride Thru time changes when drive capacity changes L2 03 Minimum Baseblock Time No Hex Name Description Default Range L2 03 0487 Minimum Baseblock Time Sets the minimum baseblock time when the drive restores pow...

Page 953: ... above the low voltage detection level The drive ignores L2 02 Momentary Power Loss Ride Thru Time in this condition L2 06 0 As shown in Figure 11 133 the frequency reference decelerates to the KEB frequency level as specified by the deceleration rate set in L2 06 and then returns to the initial frequency reference as specified by C1 01 Acceleration Time 1 The drive uses the setting value of the K...

Page 954: ...en you input KEB Ride Thru KEB operation continues after the time set in L2 10 is expired When you cancel KEB Ride Thru the motor accelerates again When you do not input KEB Ride Thru during the time set in L2 10 the drive accelerates to the frequency reference that the drive had before power loss in the applicable acceleration time When L2 01 3 4 or 5 and the DC bus voltage is a minimum of the va...

Page 955: ...n one drive Note If you keep constant deceleration rates for more than one drive it can trigger ov faults Use the dynamic braking option with System KEB Ride Thru 1 to prevent ov faults 3 System KEB Ride Thru 2 The drive monitors the DC bus voltage and decelerates for the deceleration time set in L2 06 If the DC bus voltage increases the drive momentarily holds the frequency to prevent ov while de...

Page 956: ...ed the motor speed is more than the frequency reference Do not use overvoltage suppression for applications where the frequency reference and the motor speed must align When you use a braking resistor set L3 11 0 Disabled The overvoltage suppression function is enabled only when you operate immediately below the maximum frequency Overvoltage suppression does not increase the output frequency to mo...

Page 957: ...put current is less than the value set in L3 02 15 the drive stops deceleration When the time set in L3 27 is expired the drive starts acceleration again Figure 11 135 Stall Prevention During Acceleration Function in OLV PM 2 Intelligent Ignore Accel Ramp The drive ignores the acceleration time setting and the drive starts to accelerate in the minimum length of time The drive automatically adjusts...

Page 958: ...g acceleration used for constant output ranges as a percentage of the drive rated output current 50 0 100 The stall prevention level set in L3 02 Stall Prevent Level during Accel is automatically reduced when the motor is running within the constant output range Parameter L3 03 is the limit value used to prevent the stall prevention level during constant output ranges to fall below the minimum req...

Page 959: ...v faults when the deceleration time is shorter than the drive can usually accept Note The Decel Stall Prevention function will increase the deceleration time to stop and the deceleration time will be longer than the setting This function is not applicable for conveyor applications because the precision of the stop position is very important As an alternative use a dynamic braking option in these a...

Page 960: ...the Stall Prevention function during run automatically decreases the speed to prevent motor stalling Note An output frequency less than 6 Hz will disable Stall Prevention during Run regardless of L3 05 and L3 06 Stall Prevent Level during Run settings 0 Disabled The drive runs at the set frequency reference A heavy load can cause the drive to detect oC Overcurrent or oL1 and the motor will stall 1...

Page 961: ...x Name Description Default Range L3 17 0462 DC Bus Regulation Level Sets the target value for the DC bus voltage when the overvoltage suppression function and the Decel Stall Prevention function Intelligent Stall Prevention are active 200 V Class 375 V 400 V Class 750 V 200 V Class 150 400 V 400 V Class 300 800 V Note This value is initialized when E1 01 Input AC Supply Voltage is changed Sets thi...

Page 962: ...ive load cause ov faults and L3 11 1 gradually increase this parameter in 0 1 unit increments If there are large speed ripples gradually decrease this parameter in 0 05 unit increments L3 22 PM Stall Prevention Decel Time No Hex Name Description Default Range L3 22 04F9 PM Stall Prevention Decel Time Sets the momentary deceleration time that the drive will use when it tries to accelerate a PM moto...

Page 963: ...o Hex Name Description Default Range L3 25 046F Expert Load Inertia Ratio Sets the ratio between motor inertia and machine inertia 1 0 1 0 1000 0 Set one of these parameters to enable L3 25 L2 29 1 Kinetic Energy Backup Method Single Drive KEB Ride Thru 2 L3 04 2 Stall Prevention during Decel Intelligent Ignore Decel Ramp L3 11 1 Overvoltage Suppression Select Enabled H1 xx 7A or 7B MFDI Function ...

Page 964: ...ccurs while you use a frequency reference through an analog input L3 36 Current Suppression Gain Accel No Hex Name Description Default Range L3 36 11D0 Current Suppression Gain Accel Sets the gain to suppress current and motor speed hunting during operation when L3 01 3 Stall Prevention during Accel Current Limit Method Usually it is not necessary to change this setting Determined by A1 02 0 0 100...

Page 965: ...set this parameter 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Note Set L3 01 3 Stall Prevention during Accel Current Limit Method to enable this function L4 Speed Detection L4 parameters set the output of signals to the MFDO terminals for example frequency agree and speed detection The drive detects motor speed in CLVor CLV PM control methods L4 01 Speed Agree Detection Level No Hex Name Description Default Range L4 01...

Page 966: ...g frequency reference when the frequency reference is input from the MFAI terminals A1 A2 and A3 Set H2 01 to H2 03 C MFDO Function Select Frequency Reference Loss to enable this function If the frequency reference is less than 10 in 400 ms the drive detects frequency reference loss Figure 11 140 Detection of Frequency Reference Loss 0 Stop The drive follows the frequency reference and stops the m...

Page 967: ...s injury Do not use the fault restart function in hoist or lifting applications The drive can do Auto Restart when these faults occur Note You can disable Auto Restart for faults if you must not restart the machine after the fault Table 11 73 List of Faults during which Auto Restart is Available Fault Name Parameters to Disable Auto Restart GF Ground Fault L5 08 LF Output Phase Loss oC Overcurrent...

Page 968: ...nterval Attempt after L5 04 sec Counts the number of successful and unsuccessful fault resets through Auto Restart The drive does the Auto Restart process again in the intervals set in L5 04 Interval Method Restart Time When this value L5 01 the drive will send a fault signal and fault code to the keypad and the motor will coast to stop L5 07 Fault Reset Enable Select Grp1 No Hex Name Description ...

Page 969: ... M2 Terminals M3 M4 Terminals M5 M6 H2 01 H2 02 and H2 03 B N O Activated when detected H2 01 H2 02 and H2 03 18 N O Activated when detected H2 01 H2 02 and H2 03 17 N C Disactivated when detected H2 01 H2 02 and H2 03 19 N C Disactivated when detected Detection conditions and selection of operation after detection L6 01 L6 04 Detection Level L6 02 L6 05 Analog Input Terminal 1 H3 xx 7 Detection T...

Page 970: ...kening Detection function detects the mechanical weakening of a machine that can cause overtorque or undertorque because of motor speed and total drive operation time The drive activates the function if the drive total operation time is longer than the time set in L6 11 Mech Fatigue Hold Off Time You can use U4 01 Cumulative Ope Time to monitor the total operation time Parameter Settings The drive...

Page 971: ...puts an oL3 Overtorque Detection 1 and operation continues 2 oL RUN Alarm only When the Run command is enabled the drive constantly detects overtorque The drive outputs an oL3 and operation continues 3 oL Speed Agree Fault The drive detects overtorque when the output frequency aligns with the frequency reference Detection does not occur during acceleration deceleration The drive outputs an oL3 Ove...

Page 972: ... is less than the level set in L6 05 for the length the time set in L6 06 0 Disabled The drive will not detect overtorque or undertorque 1 oL Speed Agree Alarm only The drive detects overtorque when the output frequency aligns with the frequency reference Detection does not occur during acceleration deceleration The drive outputs an oL4 Overtorque Detection 2 and operation continues 2 oL RUN Alarm...

Page 973: ...status after detection 0 0 8 The drive detects mechanical weakening through overtorque or undertorque as specified by the conditions set in L6 08 to L6 11 Mechanical Deterioration Detection Settings Parameters Set overtorque undertorque detection conditions in L6 01 to L6 03 Torque Detection 1 Settings Parameters The drive disables the operation selection set in L6 01 Torque Detection Selection 1 ...

Page 974: ...e Sets the time that the drive will start mechanical deterioration detection triggered by the cumulative operation time of the drive 0 h 0 65535 h When the total operation time of the drive is more than the value set in L6 11 the drive will detect mechanical weakening Use U4 01 Cumulative Ope Time to monitor the drive total operation time L7 Torque Limit The torque limit function limits the intern...

Page 975: ...value for forward motoring as a percentage where motor rated torque is the 100 value 200 0 300 Note The lower torque limit is enabled when you set the torque limit by the following method Set H3 02 H3 06 or H3 10 10 15 MFAI Function Select Forward Reverse Regenerative Torque Limit Use a communication option to set the torque limits You must think about drive capacity when a large quantity of torqu...

Page 976: ...et the value too low with large loads the motor can stall L7 06 Torque Limit Integral Time No Hex Name Description Default Range L7 06 04AC Torque Limit Integral Time Sets the integral time constant for the torque limit function 200 ms 5 10000 ms Decrease the setting value to increase torque limit responsiveness when you use torque limits and L7 07 1 Torque Limit during Accel Decel Proportional In...

Page 977: ...00 Hz increments Setting values that are too high can cause faults If you set this parameter L7 03 Forward Regenerative TorqueLimit or L7 04 Reverse Regenerative TorqueLimit the torque limit reduction function will not operate If you input a regenerative load at low speeds and set this parameter to a small value it can cause the motor to rotate faster than the speed reference L7 36 Regen Torque Li...

Page 978: ...on Sets operation after the drive detects an oH alarm 3 0 4 0 Ramp to Stop The drive ramps to stop in the selected deceleration time Fault relay output terminal MA MC will activate and MB MC will deactivate 1 Coast to Stop The drive output shuts off and the motor coasts to stop Fault relay output terminal MA MC will activate and MB MC will deactivate 2 Fast Stop Use C1 09 The drive uses the decele...

Page 979: ...hase loss function in these conditions During deceleration The run command is not input The output current is less than 30 of the drive rated current L8 07 Output Phase Loss Protection Sel No Hex Name Description Default Range L8 07 04B3 Output Phase Loss Protection Sel Sets the function to enable and disable output phase loss detection The drive starts output phase loss detection when the output ...

Page 980: ...L8 64 The fan turns on when the drive detects that the main circuit is overheating L8 11 Heatsink Fan Off Delay Time No Hex Name Description Default Range L8 11 04B7 Heatsink Fan Off Delay Time Sets the length of time that the drive will wait before stopping the cooling fan after cancelling the Run command when L8 10 0 Heatsink Cooling Fan Ope Select Dur Run OffDly 60 s 0 300 s L8 12 Ambient Tempe...

Page 981: ...nt limit level the drive starts usual operation L8 19 Freq Reduction oH Pre Alarm No Hex Name Description Default Range L8 19 04BF Freq Reduction oH Pre Alarm Sets the ratio at which the drive derates the frequency reference when during an oH alarm 0 8 0 1 to 0 9 When these two conditions are correct this function is enabled L8 03 4 Overheat Pre Alarm Ope Selection Run L8 19 Rate oH alarm is outpu...

Page 982: ... PM motor and demagnetize the magnets When the current is unbalanced the drive will detect LF2 to stop the motor and prevent damage to the motor 0 Disabled 1 Enabled L8 31 LF2 Detection Time No Hex Name Description Default Range L8 31 04E1 LF2 Detection Time Sets the LF2 Output Current Imbalance detection time 3 1 to 100 When the output current is unbalanced for longer than the time set in L8 31 t...

Page 983: ... Use this setting to install an IP20 Open Type enclosure drive Make sure that there is 30 mm 1 18 in minimum of space between drives or between the drive and side of the enclosure panel 1 Side by Side Mounting Use this setting to install more than one drive Side by Side Make sure that there is 2 mm 0 08 in minimum of space between drives 2 IP21 NEMA Type 1 IP55 Use this setting to install UL Type ...

Page 984: ...rier Frequency Selection When L8 38 1 2 Carrier Frequency Reduction Enabled the drive applies L8 40 as the time for the carrier frequency to return to its configured value after it is decreased L8 41 High Current Alarm Selection No Hex Name Description Default Range L8 41 04F2 High Current Alarm Selection Sets the function to cause an HCA Current Alarm when the output current is more than 150 of t...

Page 985: ...ple CDBR units Without an internal braking transistor 1 Protection Enabled Prevents damage to the internal braking transistor when using a braking transistor or optional braking resistors These models have a built in braking transistor 2004 to 2138 4002 to 4168 L8 56 Stall P Accel Activation Time No Hex Name Description Default Range L8 56 047D Expert Stall P Accel Activation Time Sets the length ...

Page 986: ...he length of time the drive will wait to start baseblock after detecting LSo LSo Fault 1 0 s 0 0 10 0 s Set this parameter to 0 0 to disable the function L8 94 Low Speed Pull out Detect Level No Hex Name Description Default Range L8 94 073D Expert Low Speed Pull out Detect Level Sets the detection level for LSo Low Speed Motor Step Out as a percentage of E1 04 Maximum Output Frequency 3 0 10 L8 95...

Page 987: ...me Description Default Range n1 02 0581 Expert Hunting Prevention Gain Setting Adjusts the behavior of the hunting prevention function Usually it is not necessary to change this setting 1 00 0 00 2 50 Adjust this parameter in these conditions When n1 01 1 2 Hunting Prevention Selection Enabled Normal Enabled High Carrier Frequency If oscillation occurs when you operate a motor with a light load in...

Page 988: ... Note Set this parameter to 1 to suppress motor vibrations caused by leakage current when the wiring distance is long n1 13 DC Bus Stabilization Control No Hex Name Description Default Range n1 13 1B59 Expert DC Bus Stabilization Control Sets the oscillation suppression function for the DC bus voltage 0 0 1 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Note If the DC bus voltage does not become stable with light loads and...

Page 989: ...n1 01 2 and you cannot suppress hunting increase the value set in this parameter in 100 ms increments n2 Auto Freq Regulator AFR The speed feedback detection reduction function or AFR Automatic Frequency Regulator helps the speed become stable when you suddenly apply or remove a load Note Before you change n2 xx parameters do one of these procedures Set the motor parameters and V f pattern correct...

Page 990: ...crease the setting value in 10 ms increments and examine the response Note Set n2 02 n2 03 Automatic Freq Regulator Time 2 If n2 02 n2 03 the drive will detect oPE08 Parameter Selection Error When you change the value in n2 03 also change the value in C4 06 Motor 2 Torque Comp Delay Time by the same ratio n3 High Slip Braking HSB and Overexcitation Braking n3 parameters configure High Slip Braking...

Page 991: ...st the deceleration time for overexcitation deceleration Overexcitation deceleration lets you accelerate the motor again during deceleration Enter the Run command during overexcitation deceleration to cancel overexcitation deceleration and accelerate the drive to the specified speed To enable this function set L3 04 4 5 Stall Prevention during Decel Overexcitation High Flux Overexcitation High Flu...

Page 992: ... a set length of time the drive will hold the actual output frequency at the minimum output frequency set in E1 09 1 0 s 0 0 10 0 s If there is too much inertia or when the motor is coasting to a stop after high slip braking is complete increase the setting value If the setting value is too low machine inertia can cause the motor to rotate after high slip braking is complete n3 04 HSB Overload Tim...

Page 993: ...ion sound is unwanted set this parameter to 0 to disable the function 0 Disabled 1 Enabled The drive injects harmonic signals at the time of overexcitation deceleration You can decrease the deceleration time because motor loss increases n3 21 HSB Current Suppression Level No Hex Name Description Default Range n3 21 0579 HSB Current Suppression Level Sets the upper limit of the current that is supp...

Page 994: ...ncy n4 61 the drive adjusts the torque to agree with the settings for n4 60 and n4 62 Usually it is not necessary to change this setting 6 00 Hz 0 50 12 00 Hz n4 62 Regen Low Speed Comp Gain No Hex Name Description Default Range n4 62 1B82 Regen Low Speed Comp Gain Sets a compensation gain to improve the control qualities for regenerative loads in the low speed range 100 0 50 0 200 0 Note If you d...

Page 995: ...B86 Flux Estimate Response Low Freq Sets the responsiveness of the magnetic flux estimation in low speed ranges where 0 the output frequency which is n4 67 Estimate Gain Switchover Freq Usually it is not necessary to change this setting 0 90 0 50 1 50 If the drive detects oS Overspeed in no load conditions or if the speed does not become stable in the low speed range increase or decrease the setti...

Page 996: ...ncoder option in AOLV control You can use the encoder option for better speed control precision Note When you use an encoder option in AOLV control to operate machinery specialized tuning of the drive can be necessary You should usually set A1 02 3 Control Method Selection Closed Loop Vector when you use an encoder option When you set this parameter to 1 also set the number of PG pulses in F1 01 E...

Page 997: ... large quantity of inertia When you use this function in CLV control it also helps prevent overshoot Refer to Figure 11 148 for more information Refer to Figure 11 149 for more information about parameters related to feed forward control Set A1 02 Control Method Selection is set to one of these values to enable feed forward control 3 Closed Loop Vector Control 4 Advanced OpenLoop Vector Control 6 ...

Page 998: ...termined by C6 01 E5 01 and o2 04 0 001 10 000 s If you cannot do Inertia Tuning calculate the motor acceleration time as shown here or measure the motor acceleration time and set n5 02 to this value Calculate the Motor Acceleration Time Use this formula to find the motor acceleration time JMotor Moment of inertia of motor kg m2 nrated Motor rated speed min 1 r min Trated Motor rated torque N m Yo...

Page 999: ... Hz TLim_Test Test run torque limit fref_Test Test run frequency reference Hz WARNING Sudden Movement Hazard Machinery can accelerate suddenly Do not use this function with machinery that must not accelerate suddenly Failure to obey can cause death or serious injury Reset all of the parameters that you changed to the previous setting values Note If response to the speed reference is slow increase ...

Page 1000: ... Motor Overload increase the setting value in 0 1 unit increments n6 11 Online Resistance Tuning No Hex Name Description Default Range n6 11 1B56 Expert Online Resistance Tuning Sets the responsiveness for online resistor tuning Set this parameter to approximately 1 000 to enable the function The function is disabled when the value is 0 000 0 000 0 000 1 000 n7 EZ Drive The n7 parameters provide s...

Page 1001: ...abled for speeds that are not higher than the value set in n7 10 The value set in b8 01 Energy Saving Control Selection is enabled for speeds higher than the value set in n7 10 If there is a large quantity of oscillation when you operate in the low speed range increase the setting value When it is most important to save energy in the low speed range decrease the setting value n7 17 Resistance Temp...

Page 1002: ...his function n8 03 Pole Position Detection Time No Hex Name Description Default Range n8 03 0542 Pole Position Detection Time Sets the length of the Current Starting Time which is used for Z Pulse Offset Tuning Usually it is not necessary to change this parameter 1 5 s 1 5 5 0 s Sets the length of time of pull in current when the drive detects the motor magnetic pole of the rotors Note If the moto...

Page 1003: ...y A1 02 0 2 When A1 02 7 Control Method Selection PM Closed Loop Vector the initial motor magnetic pole detection operates the first time after the drive is energized After that the drive uses the encoder signal to calculate the rotor position and the drive saves the value until the drive is de energized 0 Pull in Starts the rotor with pull in current 1 High Frequency Injection Injects high freque...

Page 1004: ... it is not necessary to change this setting 1 0 0 1 5 0 Note Set n8 57 1 HFI Overlap Selection Enabled or n8 35 1 Initial Pole Detection Method High Frequency Injection to enable this parameter n8 45 Speed Feedback Detection Gain No Hex Name Description Default Range n8 45 0538 Speed Feedback Detection Gain Sets the internal speed feedback detection reduction unit gain as a magnification value Usu...

Page 1005: ... help conserve energy When you operate an SPN motor set this parameter to 0 Adjust this parameter in these conditions If the load is large and motor rotation is not stable decrease the setting value If you change the E5 parameters PM Motor Settings set n8 49 0 then adjust this parameter n8 51 Pull in Current Acceleration No Hex Name Description Default Range n8 51 053E Pull in Current Acceleration...

Page 1006: ...ns The ratio between the motor inertia and machine inertia is approximately 1 10 to 1 30 Parameter n8 55 0 and the drive detects STPo because of an impact load or sudden acceleration deceleration 2 Between 1 30 and 1 50 Use this setting in these conditions The ratio between the motor inertia and machine inertia is approximately 1 30 to 1 50 Parameter n8 55 1 and the drive detects STPo because of a...

Page 1007: ...function decrease the setting value in 0 05 unit increments n8 69 Speed Observer Control P Gain No Hex Name Description Default Range n8 69 065D Expert Speed Observer Control P Gain Sets the gain that the drive uses for speed estimation Usually it is not necessary to change this setting 1 00 0 00 20 00 n8 72 Speed Estimation Method Select No Hex Name Description Default Range n8 72 0655 Expert Spe...

Page 1008: ...ts the pull in current allowed to flow during deceleration as a percentage of the motor rated current 0 0 200 If overcurrent occurs during deceleration slowly decrease the setting in 5 increments Note When n8 79 0 the drive will use the value set in n8 51 Pull in Current Acceleration n8 84 Polarity Detection Current No Hex Name Description Default Range n8 84 02D3 Expert Polarity Detection Current...

Page 1009: ...d Usually it is not necessary to change this setting Determined by d5 01 0 1 0 Softstarter 1 Speed Feedback Set n8 57 1 HFI Overlap Selection Enabled to enable this parameter Increases the stability when the speed or load suddenly change for example with rapid acceleration deceleration or impact loads n8 95 Flux Position Est Filter Time No Hex Name Description Default Range n8 95 012E Expert Flux ...

Page 1010: ...s to Backup Restore o3 06 Auto Parameter Backup Selection o3 07 Auto Parameter Backup Interval o4 22 Time Format o4 23 Date Format o5 01 Log Start Stop Selection o5 02 Log Sampling Interval o5 03 to o5 12 Log Monitor Data 1 to 10 o1 Keypad Display Selection o1 parameters select the parameters shown on the initial keypad screen and to configure the parameter setting units and display units These pa...

Page 1011: ...e Mode For example to show U1 05 Motor Speed set o1 01 105 Note You cannot select U2 monitor Fault Trace or U3 Monitor Fault History The monitors that you can select are different for different control methods o1 02 Monitor Selection at Power up No Hex Name Description Default Range o1 02 0501 RUN Monitor Selection at Power up Sets the monitor item that the keypad screen shows after energizing the...

Page 1012: ...ts after the decimal point in the maximum output frequency To show a maximum output frequency of 100 00 set the parameters to these values o1 10 10000 o1 11 2 User Units Decimal Position 2 Dec XXX XX o1 04 V f Pattern Display Unit No Hex Name Description Default Range o1 04 0503 V f Pattern Display Unit Sets the setting unit for parameters that set the V f pattern frequency Determined by A1 02 0 1...

Page 1013: ...nd o1 11 o1 11 User Units Decimal Position No Hex Name Description Default Range o1 11 0521 User Units Decimal Position Sets the number of decimal places for frequency reference and monitor values Determined by o1 03 0 3 0 No Decimal Places XXXXX 1 One Decimal Places XXXX X 2 Two Decimal Places XXX XX 3 Three Decimal Places XX XXX Note Set o1 03 3 Keypad Display Selection User selected units befor...

Page 1014: ... increases o1 37 LCD Backlight ON OFF Selection No Hex Name Description Default Range o1 37 11BA RUN LCD Backlight ON OFF Selection Sets the automatic shut off function for the LCD backlight 1 0 1 Note Use o1 36 LCD backlight adjustment to adjust the intensity of the LCD backlight 0 OFF 1 ON Enables the automatic shut off function The time at which the LCD backlight automatically turns off is conf...

Page 1015: ...log Gauge 3 Trend Plot o1 41 1st Monitor Area Selection No Hex Name Description Default Range o1 41 11C1 RUN 1st Monitor Area Selection Sets the horizontal axis used to show the monitor that was set in o1 24 Custom Monitor 1 as a bar graph This parameter is only available with an LCD keypad 0 0 2 0 Area o1 42 o1 42 1 Area 0 o1 42 2 Area o1 42 0 o1 42 1st Monitor Area Setting No Hex Name Descriptio...

Page 1016: ...tion Default Range o1 47 11C7 RUN Trend Plot 1 Scale Minimum Value Sets the minimum value for the vertical axis used to display the monitor that was set in o1 24 Custom Monitor 1 as a trend plot This parameter is only available with an LCD keypad 100 300 300 o1 48 Trend Plot 1 Scale Maximum Value No Hex Name Description Default Range o1 48 11C8 RUN Trend Plot 1 Scale Maximum Value Sets the maximum...

Page 1017: ...rameter is only available with an LCD keypad 100 0 0 0 100 0 o2 Keypad Operation o2 01 LO RE Key Function Selection No Hex Name Description Default Range o2 01 0505 LO RE Key Function Selection Sets the function that lets the drive switch between LOCAL and REMOTE Modes using the button 1 0 1 0 Disabled You cannot use to switch between LOCAL and REMOTE Modes 1 Enabled You can use to switch between ...

Page 1018: ...e Run command source has not been assigned to the keypad To start the drive again after you push to stop operation turn the external Run command OFF and ON again o2 03 User Parameter Default Value No Hex Name Description Default Range o2 03 0507 User Parameter Default Value Sets the function to keep the settings of changed parameters as user parameter defaults to use during initialization 0 0 2 Wh...

Page 1019: ...ween o2 04 setting values and drive models o2 04 Setting Drive Model 62 2004 63 2006 65 2010 66 2012 67 2018 68 2021 6A 2030 6B 2042 6D 2056 6E 2070 6F 2082 70 2110 72 2138 73 2169 74 2211 75 2257 76 2313 77 2360 78 2415 92 4002 93 4004 94 4005 o2 04 Setting Drive Model 95 4007 96 4009 97 4012 99 4018 9A 4023 9C 4031 9D 4038 9E 4044 9F 4060 A1 4075 A2 4089 A3 4103 A4 4140 A5 4168 A6 4208 A7 4250 A...

Page 1020: ...r coasts to stop when the drive detects a keypad disconnection o2 07 Keypad RUN Direction Power up No Hex Name Description Default Range o2 07 0527 Keypad RUN Direction Power up Sets the direction of motor rotation when the drive is energized and the keypad is the Run command source 0 0 1 This parameter is enabled in these conditions When b1 02 0 Run Command Selection 1 Keypad or b1 16 0 Run Comma...

Page 1021: ... operation is not possible 1 Enabled The drive detects EP24v when the main circuit power supply voltage decreases Note The minor fault signal is not output from H2 xx 10 Multi Function Digital Out Minor Fault o2 27 bCE Detection Selection No Hex Name Description Default Range o2 27 1565 bCE Detection Selection Sets drive operation if the Bluetooth device is disconnected when you operate the drive ...

Page 1022: ...mum of 4 parameter backup sets 0 Memory Location 1 1 Memory Location 2 2 Memory Location 3 3 Memory Location 4 o3 05 Select Items to Backup Restore No Hex Name Description Default Range o3 05 0BDA Select Items to Backup Restore Sets which parameters are backed up restored and referenced This parameter is only available with an LED keypad 0 0 1 0 Standard Parameters 1 Standard DWEZ Parameters Note ...

Page 1023: ...e Mon Settings o4 parameters set the expected service life to help you know when to replace parts The drive will show an alarm to tell you when the replacement part interval is near o4 01 Elapsed Operating Time Setting No Hex Name Description Default Range o4 01 050B Elapsed Operating Time Setting Sets the initial value of the cumulative drive operation time in 10 hour units 0 h 0 9999 h When you ...

Page 1024: ...lue of U4 06 When the o4 07 setting changes the count of U4 06 starts again as specified by the setting of o4 07 After you complete the configuration the setting value of o4 07 automatically resets to 0 Note The maintenance period changes for different operating environments o4 09 IGBT Maintenance Setting No Hex Name Description Default Range o4 09 0525 IGBT Maintenance Setting Sets the U4 07 IGBT...

Page 1025: ...and U4 25 1 Reset Resets the values of U4 02 U4 24 and U4 25 After the reset the drive automatically resets o4 13 to 0 o4 22 Time Format No Hex Name Description Default Range o4 22 154F RUN Time Format Sets the time display format This parameter is only available when using an LCD keypad 0 0 2 Sets the display of the time shown in the upper left of the LCD keypad screen 0 24 Hour Clock 1 12 Hour C...

Page 1026: ...ng time then start to record the data log Table 11 78 Setting Parameters for Data Log Items No Name Default Data Log Monitors o5 03 Log Monitor Data 1 101 U1 01 Frequency Reference o5 04 Log Monitor Data 2 102 U1 02 Output Frequency o5 05 Log Monitor Data 3 103 U1 03 Output Current o5 06 Log Monitor Data 4 107 U1 07 DC Bus Voltage o5 07 Log Monitor Data 5 108 U1 08 Output Power o5 08 Log Monitor D...

Page 1027: ...ters Example Description 1 Attribute 2 00 00 shows that the record is a drive information record 2 File number 4 0012 The xxx part of the GLOG0xxx csv filename is a 3 digit decimal number in hexadecimal format Example filename of GLOG0018 csv 018 Dec 0012 Hex 3 Time stamp 1 12 160107111230 Date file was generated Date 20YY MM DD Time in 24 hour format HH MM SS Example data of 160107111230 11 12 30...

Page 1028: ...ow number Hex in the data log file 1 If there is no data log monitor selected the text string of 0000 is generated 2 Refer to Table 11 79 for information about unit codes Table 11 79 Unit Codes Unit Code Hex Unit Unit Code Hex Unit Unit Code Hex Unit Unit Code Hex Unit 00 08 PPR 10 H 18 0H 01 Hz 09 kW 11 V 19 02 RPM 0A Ω 12 us 1A 03 0B ms 13 min 1B 04 VAC 0C kHz 14 C 1C 05 VDC 0D PSI 15 W 1D 06 A ...

Page 1029: ...pling Interval Sets the data log sampling cycle This parameter is only available on an LCD keypad 1000 ms 100 6000 ms o5 03 Log Monitor Data 1 No Hex Name Description Default Range o5 03 1553 RUN Log Monitor Data 1 Sets the data log monitor This parameter is only available on an LCD keypad 101 000 101 855 Note Set the log data with values 101 to 999 U1 01 to U9 99 For example to show U1 05 Motor S...

Page 1030: ...th values 101 to 999 U1 01 to U9 99 For example to show U1 05 Motor Speed set o5 07 105 When it is not necessary to set data log monitors set this parameter to 000 You cannot set U2 monitors Fault Trace or U3 Monitors Fault History o5 08 Log Monitor Data 6 No Hex Name Description Default Range o5 08 1558 RUN Log Monitor Data 6 Sets the data log monitor This parameter is only available on an LCD ke...

Page 1031: ... available on an LCD keypad 000 000 101 855 Note Set the log data with values 101 to 999 U1 01 to U9 99 For example to show U1 05 Motor Speed set o5 11 105 When it is not necessary to set data log monitors set this parameter to 000 You cannot set U2 monitors Fault Trace or U3 Monitors Fault History o5 12 Log Monitor Data 10 No Hex Name Description Default Range o5 12 155C RUN Log Monitor Data 10 S...

Page 1032: ...y of general purpose motors which is 50 Hz or 60 Hz In such cases this lower frequency is used as the value for E1 06 Base Frequency and E1 04 Maximum Output Frequency after Auto Tuning completes If the maximum output frequency is too low and causes problems change the setting of E1 04 after Auto Tuning completes The following induction motor parameters are set automatically E1 xx V f Pattern for ...

Page 1033: ...o operate the motor in no load conditions at rated speed for better control precision around rated speed If the motor test report or the motor nameplate is not available enter approximately 90 of the motor rated voltage If the drive input power supply voltage is low enter approximately 90 of the input voltage When the input power supply voltage is low the current will increase Make sure that the m...

Page 1034: ...urrent Set the no load current shown on the motor test report If the motor test report is not available do not change this parameter T1 10 Motor Rated Slip Frequency No Hex Name Description Default Range T1 10 070A Motor Rated Slip Frequency Sets the motor rated slip 0 000 20 000 Hz Shows 0 000 Hz as the default value Set the rated slip shown on the motor test report If the motor test report is no...

Page 1035: ...of the motor If no load voltage is necessary at rated speed for the motor test report set the voltage in this parameter If the motor test report is not available do not change this parameter 90 of T1 03 200 V Class 0 0 255 0 V 400 V Class 0 0 510 0 V Note To get the same qualities as a Yaskawa 1000 series drive or previous models set this parameter T1 03 Motor Rated Voltage value T2 PM Motor Auto ...

Page 1036: ...ned by o2 04 and C6 01 0 00 650 00 kW Note Capacities 300 kW and less are set in units of 0 01 kW Capacities above 300 kW are set in units of 0 1 kW The maximum applicable motor output varies depending on the setting of C6 01 Normal Heavy Duty Selection T2 05 PM Motor Rated Voltage No Hex Name Description Default Range T2 05 0732 PM Motor Rated Voltage Sets the rated voltage V of the motor 200 V C...

Page 1037: ...ange T2 12 0736 PM Motor q Axis Inductance Sets the q Axis inductance of the motor on a per phase basis Determined by T2 02 0 00 600 00 mH T2 13 Back EMF Units Selection No Hex Name Description Default Range T2 13 0755 Back EMF Units Selection Sets the units that the drive uses to set the induced voltage constant 1 0 1 0 mV rev min 1 mV rad s Note When T2 13 0 the drive will use E5 24 PM Back EMF ...

Page 1038: ...tion No Hex Name Description Default Range T3 00 1198 Control Loop Tuning Selection Sets the type of Control Auto Tuning 0 0 3 0 Inertia Tuning 1 ASR Speed Regulator 2 Deceleration Rate Tuning 3 KEB Tuning Note Settings 0 and 1 are available only when A1 02 3 7 Control Method Selection Closed Loop Vector or PM Closed Loop Vector T3 01 Test Signal Frequency No Hex Name Description Default Range T3 ...

Page 1039: ...rameter Auto Tuning when A1 02 8 Control Method Selection EZ Vector Control These two modes are available Value set in T4 01 Operational overview Items input for tuning Items tuned 0 Follow the instructions in the setup wizard on the keypad to manually enter the necessary motor parameters T4 02 Motor Type Selection T4 03 Motor Max Revolutions T4 04 Motor Rated Revolutions T4 05 Motor Rated Frequen...

Page 1040: ...te When T4 02 1 2 Motor Type Selection PM SynRM input is not necessary because it assumes Motor Rated Revolutions 60 Number of Motor Poles 2 T4 06 Motor Rated Voltage No Hex Name Description Default Range T4 06 3135 Motor Rated Voltage Sets the rated voltage V of the motor 200 V Class 200 0 V 400 V Class 400 0 V 200 V Class 0 0 255 0 V 400 V Class 0 0 510 0 V T4 07 Motor Rated Current No Hex Name ...

Page 1041: ...Range T4 08 3137 Motor Rated Capacity Sets the motor rated capacity in 0 01 kW units Determined by E9 10 0 10 650 00 kW T4 09 Number of Poles No Hex Name Description Default Range T4 09 3138 Number of Poles Sets the number of motor poles Determined by E9 01 2 48 V f CL V f OLV CLV AOLV OLV PM OLV PM AOLV PM CLV PM EZOLV V f CL V f OLV CLV AOLV OLV PM OLV PM AOLV PM CLV PM EZOLV ...

Page 1042: ...Inertia Tuning 197 Operation 176 PM motor 193 PM Motor Parameters 1035 Precautions 199 Precautions to Note before ASR Tuning 201 Precautions to Note before Inertia Tuning 201 Rotational Auto Tuning Precautions 200 Stationary Auto Tuning for Line to Line Resistance precautions 201 Stationary Auto Tuning Precautions 200 Stator resistance Auto Tuning precautions 201 Auto Tuning Error 330 381 B Backli...

Page 1043: ...lete Backed up Parameters 172 Derating Altitude 464 Ambient Temperature Setting 980 Carrier Frequency 460 Change to UL Type 1 55 Enclosure Type 983 External Cooling Fin 983 Finless 983 Side by side 983 dEv Detection level 823 Detection time 823 Fault 340 Minor Fault 363 Operation Selection after Detection 822 dFPS 386 DI A3 Parameter 829 Diagnosing and Resetting Faults 388 Digital input option Par...

Page 1044: ...8 Panel cut out dimensions 68 Exterior Dimensions Diagram IP20 Drive 466 468 476 478 489 External 24 V power supply Power supply input terminals 108 External Cooling Fin Derating 983 F FAn Fault 344 Minor Fault 366 FAn1 344 Fast Stop Time Parameter 752 Fault 330 337 Fault code MEMOBUS Modbus 322 Fault Code List 331 Fault history Display procedure 176 Fault Reset 388 Fault Restart Parameter 967 FbH...

Page 1045: ...etting 184 Display drive information 188 Display software version 188 External dimensions 45 HOME screen 155 Installation 44 Installation on control panel 45 Language selection 179 675 Meaning of indicators 141 Method of operation 141 Remove 44 Set date and time 179 Set time 179 Setup Wizard 181 Start stop data logging 183 Keypad Display 1010 Keypad Display Selection 1011 Keypad Operation 1017 Key...

Page 1046: ...ion of motor rotation 155 Positive Temperature Coefficient PTC Thermistor 939 Wiring 76 Wiring distance 94 Motor 2 Base Frequency 810 Base voltage 811 Control mode settings 809 Leakage Inductance 813 Line to Line Resistance 812 Maximum Output Frequency 810 Maximum Output Voltage 810 Mid point B frequency 811 Mid point B voltage 811 Middle Output Frequency 810 Middle Output Frequency Voltage 810 Mi...

Page 1047: ...13 379 oPE15 379 oPE16 379 oPE18 379 oPE20 380 oPE33 380 Operation during momentary power loss Operation method selection 951 Parameter 951 Operation During Momentary Power Loss KEB Ride Thru Function 945 Speed Search function 713 oPr 354 Option card Parameter 820 Options 490 oS Detection level 823 Detection time 823 Fault 354 Minor Fault 370 Operation Select at Overspeed 821 Output Phase Loss Det...

Page 1048: ...Output Current Overload 984 Output Phase Loss Detection 979 Overload 980 PF 979 rr 985 Software Current Limit Selection 981 Uv1 952 Pulse Train Input Terminal RP Function Selection 931 Pulse Train Input Output Parameter 931 Pulse train output Terminal MP function selection 933 Wiring specifications 113 R Rating 200 V Drive 446 Rating 400 V Drive 449 rdEr 387 Ready LED status 147 Remove Front cover...

Page 1049: ...dure 149 Procedure for no load test run 202 Procedure for test run with actual load 202 Thermal overload relay Connection 123 Tightening torque Control circuit terminals 109 Main circuit terminals 82 TiM Fault 359 Minor Fault 372 Timer function Parameter 721 Torque compensation Parameter 791 Torque Compensation Parameter 759 Torque Control Parameter 790 Switching to from Speed Control 793 Torque l...

Page 1050: ... 125 Braking Resistor 119 Checklist 133 Control circuit terminal block 110 Control circuit terminals 104 DC reactor 125 Main circuit terminal block 98 Main circuit terminals 76 MEMOBUS Modbus 292 Motor 76 Noise filter 127 Thermal overload relay 123 Wiring distance Drive and motor 94 Z Z pulse Auto Tuning 193 Zero Servo function Parameter 747 ...

Page 1051: ...G 1020 Addition Larger drive capacities added along with corresponding data Three Phase 200 V CIPR GA70x2360 and 2415 Three Phase 400 V CIPR GA70x4371 to 4675 2 4 Addition IP20 Applicable Gauge added to Main Circuit Wire Gauges and Tightening Torques November 2016 2 All Revision Reviewed and corrected entire documentation Upgraded drive software version to PRG 1018 Addition Larger drive capacities...

Page 1052: ...ubject to change without notice for ongoing product modifications and improvements 2016 YASKAWA Electric Corporation MANUAL NO SIEP C710617 05F 5 1 Published in Japan October 2017 15 11 8_YEU Original instructions SIEPC71061705 YASKAWA EUROPE GmbH Hauptstraβe 185 65760 Eschborn Germany Phone 49 6196 569 300 Fax 49 6196 569 398 E mail info yaskawa eu com Internet http www yaskawa eu com DRIVE CENTE...

Page 1053: ...ing usual operation Functions the same as during usual operation Stationary PM Motor Parameter Settings Disabled Disabled Digital outputs react as in normal operation if one of the parameter setting conditions listed below becomes true 1 H2 01 to H2 04 are not set to F 2 H2 40 to H2 42 are not set to F 3 H2 60 63 66 69 72 are not set to F 4 H7 10 12 14 16 are not set to F and H7 00 1 5 F5 01 to F5...

Reviews:

No comments

Related manuals for GA700

BEIER-Electronic SV1-2-10Z Instruction Manual preview
SV1-2-10Z
Brand: BEIER-Electronic Pages: 22
Aaeon COM-KB Manual preview
COM-KB
Brand: Aaeon Pages: 76
Abicor Binzel EWR Quick Install Instructions preview
EWR
Brand: Abicor Binzel Pages: 8
UNITED C5 Series Installation & Service Manual preview
C5 Series
Brand: UNITED Pages: 22
Hafele DT 100 Operating Instructions Manual preview
DT 100
Brand: Hafele Pages: 82
Caen V793 Technical Information Manual preview
V793
Brand: Caen Pages: 20
Hach sc200 Software Update preview
sc200
Brand: Hach Pages: 2
Hach ORBISPHERE 410 Quick Operator'S Manual preview
ORBISPHERE 410
Brand: Hach Pages: 12
Hach AS950 AWRS Basic Operations preview
AS950 AWRS
Brand: Hach Pages: 472
Hach sc1000 User Manual preview
sc1000
Brand: Hach Pages: 64
V2 ELETTRONICA CL1 Quick Start Manual preview
CL1
Brand: V2 ELETTRONICA Pages: 6
Hach SC4500 Basic User Manual preview
SC4500
Brand: Hach Pages: 210
VAT 670 Series Installation, Operating, & Maintenance Instructions preview
670 Series
Brand: VAT Pages: 39
Samson 3730-6 Mounting And Operating Instructions preview
3730-6
Brand: Samson Pages: 124
Samson TROVIS 5500 Operating Instructions Manual preview
TROVIS 5500
Brand: Samson Pages: 86
VAC V100 Troubleshooting Manual preview
V100
Brand: VAC Pages: 5
Abocom AM7221 User Manual preview
AM7221
Brand: Abocom Pages: 10
TEL AFA4000/1/AS Installation And Calibration Manual preview
AFA4000/1/AS
Brand: TEL Pages: 26

Brands by name

Popular brands

Load more brands